BTS-8K Troubleshooting 411-9001-048 1604

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)
Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8003

Troubleshooting
411-9001-048
.
Document status: Standard
Document version: 16.04
Document date: 6 October 2006
Copyright © 1999-2006, Nortel Networks

All Rights Reserved.
Originated in France
The information contained in this document is the property of Nortel Networks. Except as specifically authorized
in writing by Nortel Networks, the holder of this document shall keep the information contained herein confidential
and shall protect same in whole or in part from disclosure and dissemination to third parties and use for evaluation,
operation and maintenance purposes only.
You may not reproduce, represent, or download through any means, the information contained herein in any way or in
any form without prior written consent of Nortel Networks.
The following are trademarks of Nortel Networks: *NORTEL NETWORKS, the NORTEL NETWORKS corporate logo,
the NORTEL Globemark, UNIFIED NETWORKS, S2000, S4000, S8000. GSM is a trademark of France Telecom
All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
3
Contents
New in this release 21
Features 21
Other changes 21
Introduction 23
Chapter 1 Manual User Guide 27
1.1 Introduction 27
1.1.1 Corrective maintenance 27
1.1.2 Preventive maintenance 27
1.1.3 Intervention restrictions 28
1.1.4 RoHS compliancy 30
Chapter 2 Description of the cabinets 33

2.1 Presentation 33
2.2 Composition of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 33
2.2.1 Introduction 33
2.2.2 Description of an S8000 Outdoor base cabinet with the BCF 33
2.2.3 Description of an S8000 Outdoor base cabinet with the CBCF 38
2.2.4 Description of an S8000 Outdoor extension cabinet 42
2.2.5 Description of an S8000 Outdoor external battery cabinet 44
2.2.6 Description of the S8000 Outdoor BTS products 44
2.2.7 Location 47
2.2.8 Cross-reference between the equipment item and the replacement sheets
for the S8000 Outdoor BTS 77
2.3 Composition of the S8000 Indoor BTS 94
2.3.2 Description of an S8000 Indoor base cabinet with the BCF 94
2.3.3 Description of an S8000 Indoor base cabinet with the CBCF 96
2.3.4 Description of an S8000 Indoor extension cabinet 99
2.3.5 Location 100
2.3.6 Cross-reference between the equipment and the maintenance sheets for
the S8000 Indoor BTS 112
2.4.2 Description of an S8003 Indoor base cabinet with the CBCF 128

Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8003 Troubleshooting
411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
Copyright © 1999-2006, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
4 Contents
2.4.3 Description of the S8003 Indoor BTS products 129

2.4.4 Location 131
2.4.5 Cross-reference between the equipment and the maintenance sheets for
the S8003 Indoor BTS 136
Chapter 3 Description of a start-up 141

3.1 Introduction 141
External BTS8000 / S8003 synchronization on a master BTS 143
3.2 S8000 Outdoor BTS power supply 143
3.2.1 Power supplies 143
3.2.2 Distribution of power supplies 143
3.2.3 Batteries (optional) 143
3.3 S8000 Indoor BTS power supply 155
3.5 S8000 Outdoor BTS power-on/power-off 161
3.5.1 Power-on 161
3.5.2 Power-off 164
3.6 S8000 Indoor BTS power-on/power-off 167
3.6.1 Power-on 167
3.6.2 Power-off 167
3.7.1 Power-on 168
3.7.2 Power-off 169
3.8 Start-up phases 170
ICM specific LEDs behavior 177
ICM SYN LEDs behavior 177
Chapter 4 Faults without alarms at the OMC-R 179

4.2 Fault location 179
4.2.1 BTS state 179
4.2.2 On-site checking procedures 179
4.2.3 On-site checking procedures for S8003 BTS 181
Chapter 5 Preventive maintenance procedures 183

5.1.1 Presentation 183
5.1.2 Test schedule 184
5.1.3 Replacement schedule 186
5.1.4 Summary of the preventive maintenance schedule 192
5.1.5 Description of a preventive maintenance procedure sheet 197

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Contents 5
5.2 On-site checks 198

5.2.1 Preliminary checks before performing preventive maintenance
procedures 198
5.2.2 Final checks after having performed preventive maintenance
procedures 201
5.3 Check at the OMC-R 201
procedures 201
procedures 201
5.4 Preventive maintenance procedure sheets 202
5.4.1 Test of the AC lightning protector (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 202
5.4.2 Test of the AC lightning protectors (battery cabinet) 223
5.4.3 Test of the internal and external batteries (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 227
5.4.4 Test of the door gasket (S8000 Indoor BTS and S8003 Indoor BTS) 244
5.4.5 Test of the door gasket or hood gasket (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 249
5.4.6 Test of the external alarm primary lightning protector (S8000 Outdoor
BTS) 257
5.4.7 Test of the external alarm secondary lightning protector (S8000 Outdoor
BTS) 263
5.4.8 Test of the ground fault interrupter (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 266
5.4.9 Test of the lightning protectors of the 48 V box (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 273
5.4.10 Test of the PCM lightning protectors (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 278
5.4.11 Test of the external alarm secondary lightning protectors (S8000 Indoor
BTS and S8003 Indoor BTS) 283
5.4.12 Test of the fans (S8003 Indoor BTS) 290
5.4.13 DACS preventive maintenance 293
Chapter 6 Replacement procedures 313

6.1.1 Presentation 313
6.1.2 Description of a replacement procedure sheet 313
6.1.3 Preliminary operations 314
6.1.4 Final checks after having performed replacement procedures 315
6.1.5 Tools 316
6.2 Replacement procedure sheets 316
6.2.1 Replacement of the ALCO board 335
6.2.2 Replacement of a CMCF board (S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS,
and S8003 Indoor BTS) 338
6.2.3 Replacement of a CPCMI board (S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS,
6.2.4 Replacement of a CSWM board 346
6.2.5 Replacement of a DSC board 349
6.2.6 Replacement of a GTW board 353
6.2.7 Replacement of a PCMI board 356

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
6 Contents
6.2.8 Replacement of the PSCMD board 359

6.2.9 Replacement of the RECAL board (S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor
BTS, and S8003 Indoor BTS) 362
6.2.10 Replacement of a SYNC board 365
6.2.11 Replacement of an AC box circuit breaker (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 368
6.2.12 Replacement of the ADU circuit breaker (S8000 Outdoor BTS with
GIPS) 390
6.2.13 Replacement of the AC breaker (battery cabinet) 391
6.2.14 Replacement of an ACU climatic unit (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 393
6.2.15 Replacement and cleaning of the ACU filter (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 404
6.2.16 Replacement of the ACU or DACS gasket (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 407
6.2.17 Replacement of a base cabinet fan (S8000 Indoor BTS) 412
6.2.18 Replacement of a BCF cabinet fan (S8000 Indoor BTS) 415
6.2.19 Replacement of a FANICO board (S8000 Indoor BTS with BCF) 419
Replacement of a FANICO board (S8000 Indoor BTS with CBCF) 421
Replacement of a BCF power supply 422
6.2.20 Replacement of the DACS climatic system (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 426
6.2.21 Replacement of the DACS actuator (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 433
6.2.22 Replacement of the DACS brass bushing (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 438
6.2.23 Replacement of the DACS capacitor (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 441
6.2.24 Replacement of the DACS control assembly (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 445
6.2.25 Replacement of the DACS control assembly (Control board NTQA98KB
with S8000 Outdoor BTS) 460
6.2.27 Replacement of the DACS air inlet clogged switch (S8000 Outdoor
BTS) 481
6.2.28 Replacement of the DACS heater (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 485
6.2.29 Replacement of the DACS thermistor (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 489
6.2.30 Replacement of the DACS thermostat (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 492
6.2.31 Replacement of the auto-reset DACS heater thermostat (S8000 Outdoor
BTS) 496
6.2.32 Replacement of the DACS (extended) transformer (S8000 Outdoor
BTS) 499
6.2.33 Replacement of a DACS twin blower (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 503
6.2.34 Replacement of the Low Noise DACS ambient thermistor (S8000 Outdoor
BTS) 525
6.2.35 Replacement of the door gasket (S8000 Indoor BTS and S8003 Indoor
BTS) 530
6.2.36 Repair or replacement of the door gaskets (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 537
6.2.37 Replacement of the door gasket (battery cabinet) 549
6.2.38 Replacement of a DRX module (S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS,
6.2.39 Replacement of an external alarm primary lightning protector (S8000
Outdoor BTS) 556
6.2.40 Replacement of the external alarm secondary lightning protector (S8000
Outdoor BTS) 560

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Contents 7
6.2.41 Replacement of the external batteries (battery cabinet) 563

6.2.42 Replacement of the external battery circuit breaker (Battery cabinet
NTQA36AA) 575
6.2.43 Replacement of the DC breaker (battery cabinet) 579
6.2.44 Replacement of the fan filter (S8000 Indoor BTS) 582
6.2.45 Replacement of an F-type converter (S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor
6.2.46 Replacement of a ground fault interrupter (S8000 Outdoor BTS with AC
mains box) 589
6.2.47 Repair or replacement of the hood gasket (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 598
6.2.48 Replacement of the internal batteries (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 604
6.2.49 Replacement of the internal battery circuit breaker (S8000 Outdoor
BTS) 608
6.2.50 Replacement of the lightning protectors of the 48 V box (S8000 Outdoor
BTS) 613
6.2.51 Replacement of a PCM lightning protector (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 616
6.2.52 Replacement of the AC lightning protector (battery cabinet) 619
6.2.53 Replacement of a power amplifier module (S8000 Outdoor and Indoor
6.2.54 Replacement of the power supply rack of the seven-rectifier type (S8000
Outdoor BTS) 632
6.2.55 Replacement of the power supply rack of the six-rectifier type (S8000
Outdoor BTS) 638
6.2.56 Replacement of a rectifier of the seven- rectifier type (500W rectifier
module) (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 648
6.2.57 Replacement of a rectifier of the six-rectifier type (600W rectifier module)
(S8000 Outdoor BTS) 652
6.2.58 Replacement of the GIPS (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 654
6.2.59 Replacement of a rectifier of the GIPS (680W rectifier module) (S8000
Outdoor BTS) 659
6.2.60 Replacement of the AC Distribution Unit (ADU) (S8000 Outdoor BTS
with GIPS) 661
6.2.61 Replacement of a (CC8) remote tunable cavity combiner (S8000 Indoor
BTS) 663
6.2.62 Replacement of a RF-combiner module (S8000 Outdoor and Indoor
BTS, and S8003 Indoor BTS) 667
6.2.63 Replacement of a Rx-splitter (S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS,
6.2.64 Replacement of the external alarm secondary lightning protector (S8000
Outdoor BTS) 682
6.2.65 Replacement of the ADU AC surge protector (S8000 Outdoor BTS with
GIPS) 684
6.2.66 Replacement of the user AC plug (S8000 Outdoor BTS with GIPS) 685
6.2.67 Replacement of the single-phase AC lightning protector (S8000 Outdoor
BTS with AC main box) 687
6.2.68 Replacement of the thermostats (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 696

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
8 Contents
6.2.69 Replacement of the tri-phase AC lightning protector (S8000 Outdoor

BTS with AC main box) 700
6.2.70 Replacement of a Tx-filter module (TX-F) (S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000
Indoor BTS and S8003 Indoor BTS) 708
6.2.71 Replacement of the 75 Ohms kit (S8000 Indoor BTS and S8003 Indoor
BTS) 713
6.2.72 Replacement of the 75 Ohms kit (S8000 BTS Outdoor) 717
6.2.73 Replacement of the air filter (S8003 Indoor BTS) 721
6.2.74 Replacement of a fan (S8003 Indoor BTS) 724
6.2.75 Installation of the new S8000 Outdoor BTS AC single phase lightning
protector 729
6.2.76 Installation of the new S8000 Outdoor BTS AC three phase lightning
protector 733
6.2.77 Replacement of the BRC module (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 737
Replacement of the heating and ventilation unit (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 739
Chapter 7 On-site TIL use 741

7.2 Preliminary actions 741
7.2.1 Actions at the OMC-R 741
7.2.2 On-site actions 742
7.3 Corrective action sheets 742
7.3.1 Alarm: High temperature alarm 742
7.3.2 Alarm: High current alarm 743
7.3.3 Alarm: Low power alarm 744
7.3.4 Alarm: VSWR alarm 745
7.3.5 Alarm: Automatic level control 746
7.3.6 Alarm: PA power shutdown alarm 750
7.3.7 Alarm: Main RX connector alarm 751
7.3.8 Alarm: Diversity RX connector alarm 751
7.3.9 Alarm: Diversity loss - main channel alarm 752
7.3.10 Alarm: Diversity loss - diversity channel alarm 753
7.3.11 Alarm: RX PLL alarm 754
7.3.12 Alarm: TX alarm 755
7.3.13 Alarm: BB filter alarm 756
7.4 TX test 757
7.4.2 TX test procedure 758
Chapter 8 DACS and Low Noise DACS technical manual 761

8.1 DACS technical manual 764
8.1.1 Technical aspects 764
8.1.2 DACS operation 767
8.1.3 Troubleshooting 771
8.2 Low noise DACS technical manual 777

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Contents 9
8.2.1 Technical aspects 777

8.2.2 Low noise DACS operation 780
8.2.3 Troubleshooting 785
Figures
Figure 1 Corrective maintenance diagnostic 29
Figure 2 Guide to using the maintenance manual 30
Figure 3 Overview of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet (with ACUs) 49
Figure 4 Overview of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet (with DACS - type
1) 50
Figure 5 Overview of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet (with DACs - type
2) 51
Figure 6 Overview of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet (with DACs - type
3) 52
Figure 7 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with
the BCF 53
the CBCF 54
H2D coupling 55
Figure 10 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS extension cabinet
with H2D coupling 56
H4D coupling 57
with H4D coupling 58
tx-filter/duplexer coupling 59
with tx-filter/duplexer coupling 60
Figure 15 Single-phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS 61
BTS 62
BTS 63
Figure 18 Split single-phase AC box (GSM 1900) type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS 64
BTS 65
BTS 66
Figure 21 Tri-phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS 67
BTS 68
BTS 69
BTS 70

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
10 Contents

BTS 71
Figure 26 AC box / GIPS with E, F, or UK type user AC plug 72
Figure 27 AC box / GIPS with US type user AC plug 73
Figure 28 External battery cabinet NTQA36AA of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
(NTQA36GA batteries) 74
Figure 29 External battery cabinet NTQA36AB of the S8000 outdoor BTS (SBS
60 batteries) 75
Figure 30 External battery cabinet NTQA36BA of the S8000 BTS (SBS C11
batteries) 76
Figure 31 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS BCF cabinet 101
Figure 32 Overview of an S8000 Indoor BTS with the BCF cabinet 102
Figure 33 Overview of an S8000 Indoor BTS with the CBCF 103
Figure 34 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet with H2D
coupling 104
Figure 35 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS extension cabinet with
H2D coupling 105
Figure 36 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet with H4D
coupling 106
H4D coupling 107
Figure 38 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet with
Figure 40 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet with CC8
coupling 110
CC8 coupling 111
Figure 42 S8003 Indoor BTS: view of the cabinet (H2D coupling) 131
Figure 43 S8003 Indoor BTS: location of the modules 132
Figure 44 S8003 Indoor BTS: modules numbering 133
Figure 45 S8003 Indoor BTS: O3 duplexer + Tx Filter 134
Figure 46 S8003 Indoor BTS: O3 duplexer 135
Figure 47 Mains power supply of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (single-phase) 147
Figure 48 Mains power supply of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (split
single-phase) 148
Figure 49 Mains power supply of the S8000 outdoor BTS (tri-phase types 1,
2 and 3) 149
Figure 50 Mains power supply of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (tri-phase type 4 or
5) 150
Figure 51 Mains power supply of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with AC box/GIPS
(Single-phase) 151
(Split-phase) 152
(Tri-phase) 153
Figure 54 -48 V Power supply of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (BCF or CBCF) 154
Figure 55 -48V power supply of the S8000 outdoor BTS with GIPS 155
Figure 56 -48 V Power supply of the S8000 Indoor BTS (BCF or CBCF) 157

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Contents 11
Figure 57 View of the -48 V power supply of the S8000 Indoor BTS 158
Figure 58 Wiring of the S8000 Indoor BTS -48 V power supply 159
Figure 59 Wiring of the S8003 Indoor BTS -48V power supply 160
Figure 60 Start-up phases of an S8000 / S8003 BTS 171
Figure 61 Start-up phases of an S8000 BTS using LEDs of the BCF 174
Figure 62 Start-up phases of an S8000 / S8003 BTS using LEDs of the
CBCF 176
Figure 63 S8003 Indoor BTS: Type F power supply cables safety measures 200
Figure 64 Location of the AC lightning protector of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with
ACUs 204
Figure 65 Location of the AC lightning protector of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
with DACS 205
Figure 66 Flowchart of the test procedure of the AC lightning protector of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS 206
Figure 67 Single-phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS 213
Figure 68 Side covers of the AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 214
Figure 69 View of the single-phase AC lightning protector type 1 of the S8000
Outdoor BTS 215
Figure 70 View of the single-phase AC lightning protector type 2 or type 3 of
the S8000 Outdoor BTS 216
Figure 71 Split single-phase AC box (GSM 1900) of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS 217
Figure 72 View of the split single-phase AC lightning protector type 1 of the
Figure 73 View of the split single-phase AC lightning protector type 2 or type 3
of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 219
Figure 74 Tri-phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 220
Figure 75 View of the tri-phase AC lightning protector type 1 of the S8000
Outdoor BTS 221
Figure 76 View of the tri-phase AC lightning protector type 2, type 3 or type 4 of
Figure 77 Flowchart of the AC lightning protector test procedure (battery
cabinet) 224
Figure 78 Location of the AC lightning protector (battery cabinet) 226
Figure 79 Location of the internal batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with
ACUS 229
Figure 80 Location of the internal batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with
DACS 230
Figure 81 External battery cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (NTQA36GA
batteries) 231
Figure 82 External battery cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (SBS 60
batteries) 232
Figure 83 External battery cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (SBS C11
batteries) 233
Figure 84 Flowchart of the test procedure of the batteries of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS 234
Figure 85 View of the internal batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 240
Figure 86 External battery cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (NTQA36GA
batteries) 241

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
12 Contents
Figure 87 Location of the door gasket on the cabinet or the BCF cabinet of the
S8000 Indoor BTS 246
Figure 88 Location of the door gasket on the cabinet (S8003 Indoor BTS) 247
Figure 89 Flowchart of the test procedure of the door gasket (S8000 Indoor BTS
and S8003 Indoor BTS 248
Figure 90 Location of the door gaskets or the hood gasket of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS with the ACUs 251
Figure 91 Location of the door gaskets of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the
DACS 252
Figure 92 Flowchart of the test procedure of the door gaskets of the S8000
Outdoor BTS 253
Figure 93 Flowchart of the test procedure of the hood gasket of the S8000
Outdoor BTS 256
Figure 94 Test procedure of the external alarm primary lightning protectors of
Figure 95 View of the external alarm primary lightning protectors of the S8000
Outdoor BTS 262
Figure 96 Test procedure of the external alarm secondary lightning protectors of
Figure 97 View of the external alarm secondary lightning protectors of the
Figure 98 Location of the ground fault interrupter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
with the ACUs 268
Figure 99 Location of the ground fault interrupter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
with DACS 269
Figure 100 Flowchart of the test procedure of the ground fault interrupter of the
Figure 101 View of the single-phase ground fault interrupter of the S8000
Outdoor BTS 272
Figure 102 View of the tri-phase ground fault interrupter of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS 273
Figure 103 Flowchart of the test procedure of the 48 V box lightning protector of
Figure 104 View of the 48 V box lightning protectors of the S8000 Ou tdoor
BTS 277
Figure 105 Flowchart of the test procedure for the pcm lightning protectors of
Figure 106 View of the PCM lightning protectors of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 282
Figure 107 Test procedure for the external alarm secondary lightning protectors
(S8000 and S8003 Indoor BTS) 284
Figure 108 Location of the external alarm secondary lightning protectors (ALPRO
board) of the S8000 Indoor BTS 287
Figure 109 Location of the external alarm secondary lightning protectors (ALPRO
Figure 110 View of the external alarm secondary lightning protector (ALPRO
Figure 111 Flowchart of the test procedure of the S8003 Indoor fans 291
Figure 112 Extraction of the fan tray from the S8003 Indoor BTS cabinet 292
Figure 113 DACS or Low Noise DACS unit 311
Figure 114 DACS or Low Noise DACS unit in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 312

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Contents 13
Figure 115 S8003 Indoor BTS: Type F power supply cables safety measures 315
Figure 116 ALCO board 337
Figure 117 CMCF board 342
Figure 118 E1 CPCMI board (S8000 Outdoor/Indoor BTS and S8003 Indoor
BTS) 345
Figure 119 T1 CPCMI board 346
Figure 120 CSWM board 349
Figure 121 DSC board 352
Figure 122 GTW board 355
Figure 123 E1 PCMI board 358
Figure 124 T1 PCMI board 359
Figure 125 PSCMD board 362
Figure 126 RECAL board 365
Figure 127 SYNC board 368
Figure 128 Single-phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS 376
Figure 129 Side view of the single-phase AC box type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS 377
Figure 130 Side view of the single-phase AC box type 2 or type 3 of the S8000
Outdoor BTS 378
Figure 131 Side covers of the AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 379
Figure 132 Split single-phase AC box (GSM 1900) of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS 380
Figure 133 Side view of the split single-phase AC box type 1 of the S8000
Outdoor BTS 381
Figure 134 Side view of the split single-phase AC box type 2 or type 3 of the
Figure 135 Tri-phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 383
Figure 136 Side view of the tri-phase AC box type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS 384
Figure 137 Side view of the tri-phase AC box type 2, type 3, type 4 or 5 of the
Figure 138 Main circuit breaker of the (split) single-phase AC box of the S8000
Outdoor BTS 386
Figure 139 Climatic system breaker of the (split) single-phase AC box of the
Figure 140 Climatic system breaker of the tri-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS 388
Figure 141 Rectifier circuit breaker of the (split) single-phase AC box of the
Figure 142 Rectifier circuit breaker of the tri-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS 390
Figure 143 Internal view of the AC box (battery cabinet) 393
Figure 144 ACU climatic units of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 398
Figure 145 Climatic unit interconnection box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 399
Figure 146 Cable exit of an ACU of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 400
Figure 147 Different sides of an ACU of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 403
Figure 148 View of the ACU filter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 407
Figure 149 View of the ACU gasket of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 411
Figure 150 View of the DACS gasket of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 412

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
14 Contents
Figure 151 Base cabinet ventilation rack of the S8000 Indoor BTS 415
Figure 152 BCF cabinet ventilation of the S8000 Indoor BTS 417
Figure 153 Top view of the BCF cabinet of the S8000 Indoor BTS 418
Figure 154 View of the S8000 Indoor BTS with CBCF ventilation unit 422
Figure 155 BCF power supply 425
Figure 156 DACS climatic system of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 430
Figure 157 DACS interconnection box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 431
Figure 158 View of the DACS of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 437
Figure 159 DACS actuator of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 438
Figure 160 DACS capacitor of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 445
Figure 161 Control Board NTU498AA 446
Figure 162 DACS filter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 448
Figure 163 Control assembly of the Low Noise DACS and DACS control kit of
Figure 164 Wiring for the Low Noise DACS 472
Figure 165 Wiring for the Standard DACS without DACS control kit nor DACS
multispeed blower kit 473
Figure 166 DACS transfer board of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 474
Figure 167 Wiring for the standard DACS with a control assembly and two
multispeed blowers 475
Figure 168 Wiring for the Standard DACS with one multispeed blower kit (for
FAN B) 476
Figure 169 Wiring for the standard DACS with the control kit 477
Figure 170 Wiring for the Standard DACS with a DACS control kit and one DACS
multispeed blower (FAN A) 478
Figure 172 DACS air inlet switch of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 485
Figure 173 DACS heater of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 489
Figure 174 DACS thermostat of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 496
Figure 175 DACS transformer of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 503
Figure 177 Wiring for the Low Noise DACS 518
Figure 178 Wiring for the standard DACS without control kit Nor multispeed
blower kit 519
Figure 179 DACS transfer board of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 520
Figure 180 Wiring for the standard DACS with a control assembly and two
multispeed blowers 521
Figure 181 Wiring for the standard DACS with one multispeed blower kit (for
FAN B) 522
Figure 182 Wiring for the Standard DACS with the control kit 523
Figure 183 Wiring for the standard DACS with a control kit and one multispeed
blower (FAN A) 524
Figure 184 DACS twin blowers of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 525
Figure 185 DACS Control assembly of the Low Noise and of the DACS control kit
of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 529
Figure 186 Location of the door gasket of the S8000 Indoor BTS 532
Figure 187 Cut of the gasket of the S8000 Indoor BTS 533
Figure 188 Location of the door gasket of the S8003 Indoor BTS 536
Figure 189 View of the door gaskets of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 540

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Contents 15
Figure 190 Silicone deposit at a door gasket corner of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS 541
Figure 191 Front view of an inner corner of a door of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS 542
Figure 192 Front view of a door gasket corner of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 543
Figure 193 Side view of a door gasket corner of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 544
Figure 194 Front view of two door gaskets of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 545
Figure 195 DRX module 555
Figure 196 eDRX module 556
Figure 197 View of the external alarm primary lightning protectors of the S8000
Outdoor BTS 559
Figure 198 View of the external alarm secondary lightning protector of the S8000
Outdoor BTS 562
Figure 199 External battery cabinet (NTQA36AA type) of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS (only SBS 60 batteries) 566
Figure 200 External battery cabinet (NTQA36AB type) of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS (SBS 60 batteries) 570
Figure 201 External battery cabinet (NTQA36BA type) of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS (SBS C11 batteries) 574
Figure 202 External battery cabinet NTQA36AA of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
(NTQA36GA batteries) 578
Figure 203 External battery circuit breaker of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 579
Figure 204 DC breaker of the battery cabinet 582
Figure 205 View of the fan filter of the S8000 Indoor BTS 585
Figure 206 F-type converter 588
Figure 207 Single-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 593
Figure 208 Tri-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 594
Figure 209 View of the ground fault interrupter of the single-phase AC box of
Figure 210 View of the ground fault interrupter of the tri-phase AC box of the
Figure 211 Internal and external views of the tri-phase ground fault interrupter of
Figure 212 View of the gaskets of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the ACUs 601
Figure 213 View of the gaskets of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the DACS 602
Figure 214 Internal batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 608
Figure 215 Internal batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 611
Figure 216 Internal battery circuit breaker of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 612
Figure 217 View of the 48 V box lightning protector of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS 616
Figure 218 View of the PCM lightning protectors of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 619
Figure 219 AC box (battery cabinet - CE type) 622
Figure 220 Internal view of the AC box (CE type) 623
Figure 221 Internal view of the AC box (US type) 624
Figure 222 View of the US lightning protector 625
Figure 223 Power amplifier (type 1) 629
Figure 224 Power amplifier (type 2) 630
Figure 225 High Power Amplifier (HePA) 631
Figure 226 Power supply rack (seven-rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS 636

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
16 Contents
BTS 637
Figure 228 Top view of the PCU (seven-rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS 638
Figure 229 Power supply rack (six-rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (type
1) 643
2) 644
1) 645
2) 646
Figure 233 Top view of the PCU (six-rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
(type 1) 647
Figure 234 Top view of the PCU (six-rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
(type 2) 648
BTS 650
Figure 236 Rectifier (seven-rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 651
Figure 237 Rectifier (six-rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (type 1) 653
Figure 238 GIPS 657
Figure 239 View of the DCU 658
Figure 240 680W rectifier of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 660
Figure 241 View of the ADU of the GIPS 663
Figure 242 Remote tunable cavity combiner (CC8) 666
Figure 243 RF-combiner (duplexer) (S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS,
Figure 244 RF-combiner (H2D) (S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS, and
S8003 Indoor BTS) 673
Figure 245 RF-combiner (H4D with VSWR) (S8000 Outdoor BTS and S8000
Indoor BTS) 674
Figure 246 RF-combiner (H4D without VSWR) (S8000 Outdoor BTS and S8000
Indoor BTS) 675
Figure 247 Rx-splitter 680
Figure 248 Higher and lower Rx-splitter 681
Figure 249 View of the secondary lightning protector (ALPRO board) of the
S8000 Indoor BTS and S8003 Indoor BTS 684
Figure 250 Single-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 691
Figure 251 Single-phase AC lightning protector of AC box type 2 of the S8000
Outdoor BTS 692
Figure 252 Single-phase AC lightning protector of AC box type 1 of the S8000
Outdoor BTS 693
Figure 253 Split single-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 694
Figure 254 Split single-phase AC lightning protector of AC box type 1 of the
Figure 255 Split single-phase AC lightning protector of AC box type 2 of the
Figure 256 Tri-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 705
Figure 257 Tri-phase AC lightning protector of AC box type 1 of the S8000
Outdoor BTS 706

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Contents 17
Figure 258 Tri-phase AC lightning protector of AC box type 2 of the S8000

Outdoor BTS 707
Figure 259 Tx-filter 712
Figure 260 S8000 Indoor BTS: Cabinet top 715
Figure 261 S8003 Indoor BTS: Cabinet top 716
Figure 262 View of the 75 Ohms adaptation module 719
Figure 263 View of the 75 Ohms adaptation module 720
Figure 264 View of the air filter of the S8003 Indoor BTS 723
Figure 265 Extraction of the fan tray from the S8003 Indoor BTS cabinet 728
Figure 266 Removal of an S8003 Indoor fan from the fan tray 729
Figure 267 Lightning protector cables 732
Figure 268 Single phase AC lightning protector 733
Figure 269 Lightning protector cables 736
Figure 270 Single phase AC lightning protector 737
Figure 271 Battery Remote Controler (BRC) module 739
Figure 272 Installation for the TX test procedure 759
Figure 273 DACS or Low Noise DACS unit in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 762
Figure 274 DACS or Low Noise DACS unit 763
Figure 275 Re-activation of the DACS thermostat of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS 776
Figure 276 Re-activation of the DACS thermostat of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS 790
Tables
Table 1 ACU climatic unit location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 77
Table 2 DACS climatic system location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 77
Table 3 DRX location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 77
Table 4 DRX diversity reception chain location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 78
Table 5 DRX main reception chain location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 80
Table 6 External battery location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 81
Table 7 F-type converter location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 81
Table 8 Internal battery location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 82
Table 9 COMBINER_H4D_LN location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 82
Table 10 H4D-VSWR-COMBINER location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 83
Table 11 COMBINER_LN location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 83
Table 12 Output Rx-splitter D location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 84
Table 13 Output Rx-splitter M location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 86
Table 14 PA Power amplifier location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 87
Table 15 Rectifier location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 88
Table 16 TX-FILTER location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 89
Table 17 VSWR-COMBINER location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 90
Table 18 ALCO board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 91
Table 19 BCF power supply location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 91
Table 20 CSWM board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 92
Table 21 DSC board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 92
Table 22 GTW board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 92
Table 23 PCMI board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 92
Table 24 SYNC board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 93
Table 25 CMCF board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 93
Table 26 CPCMI board Location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 93
Table 27 RECAL board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 93

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
18 Contents
Table 28 DRX location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 112

Table 29 DRX diversity reception chain location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 112
Table 30 DRX main reception chain location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 114
Table 31 F-type converter location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 116
Table 32 H4D-LN-combiner location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 116
Table 33 H4D-VSWR-combiner location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 117
Table 34 Fan system location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 117
Table 35 Combiner_LN location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 118
Table 36 Output Rx-splitter D location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 119
Table 37 Output Rx-splitter M location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 120
Table 38 PA power amplifier location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 122
Table 39 TX-filter location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 123
Table 40 VSWR-combiner location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 124
Table 41 ALCO board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 125
Table 42 BCF fan system location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 125
Table 43 BCF power supply location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 125
Table 44 CSWM board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 125
Table 45 DSC board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 126
Table 46 GTW board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 126
Table 47 PCMI board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 126
Table 48 SYNC board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 126
Table 49 CMCF board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 127
Table 50 CPCMI board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 127
Table 51 RECAL board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 127
Table 52 DRX location in the S8003 Indoor BTS 136
Table 53 DRX diversity reception chain location in the S8003 Indoor BTS 136
Table 54 DRX main reception chain location in the S8003 Indoor BTS 137
Table 55 F-type converter location in the S8003 Indoor BTS 137
Table 56 LNA-combiner location in the S8003 Indoor BTS 137
Table 57 Output Rx-splitter D location in the S8003 Indoor BTS 138
Table 58 Output Rx-splitter M location in the S8003 Indoor BTS 138
Table 59 PA power amplifier location in the S8003 Indoor BTS 139
Table 60 CMCF board location in the S8003 Indoor BTS 139
Table 61 CPCMI board location in the S8003 Indoor BTS 139
Table 62 RECAL board location in the S8003 Indoor BTS 139
Table 63 Network synchronization parameters 142
Table 64 Discharge times of the batteries 144
Table 65 Rectifier number in function of the configuration (1/2) 145
Table 66 Rectifier number in function of the configuration (1/2) 145
Table 67 Charging times on the batteries 146
Table 68 Storage duration depending of storage temperature 146
Table 69 Fuse description of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 165
Table 70 Fuse description of the S8000 Indoor BTS 168
Table 71 Fuse description of the S8003 Indoor BTS 170
Table 72 ICM specific LEDs behavior 177
Table 73 ICM SYN LEDs behavior 177
Table 74 Test performed twice a year 184
Table 75 Tests performed once a year 184
Table 76 Replacement performed twice a year 186
Table 77 Replacements performed once a year 186

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Contents 19
Table 78 Replacements performed every four years 187

Table 79 Replacements performed every five years 188
Table 80 Replacement performed every six years 189
Table 81 Replacements performed every ten years 189
Table 82 Replacement performed every fifteen years 191
Table 83 Summary of the preventive maintenance schedule of the S8000
Outdoor BTS 192
Indoor BTS 195
Indoor BTS 196
Table 85 Product reference 283
Table 85 Product reference 290
Table 86 Thermistors Characteristics - Rt vs. T 308
Table 87 DACS Parts Cross Reference Table 309
Table 88 Produce reference for S8000 BTS 338
Table 89 Product reference for S8003 BTS 338
Table 92 Prom Numbers on GTW Board 353
Table 93 DACS (extended) transformer (S8000 Outdoor BTS) product
reference 499
Table 94 Product reference for S8000 Indoor BTS 530
Table 95 Product reference for S8003 Indoor BTS 530
Table 96 Door gasket (battery cabinet) product reference 549
Table 97 DRX module product reference for S8000 BTS 550
Table 98 DRX module product reference for S8003 BTS 551
Table 98 External alarm secondary lightning protector product reference for
Table 99 AC mains box product reference for S8000 Outdoor BTS 589

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
20 Contents

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
21
New in this release

The following section details what is new in the Nortel GSM BTS
S8000/S8003 Troubleshooting for release 16.0
Features
See the following sections for information about feature changes:
• New network synchronization configuration parameters (15347) (v
16.01).
— A new set of parameters for configuring the network synchronization
feature are presented in a table in the section on installation and
commissioning for BTS synchronization.
• RoHS compliancy (30066, 30067, 30068) (v16.02).

— Added section to provide information on RoHS compliancy for S8000
indoor/outdoor and S8003.
Other changes
See the following sections for information about changes that are not
feature-related:
• Removed information on BSC 12000 due to EOL (End Of Life).
Replaced all occurrences of BSC 2G with BSC 12000HC.
• Modified procedure: Replacement of a duplexer RF-Combiner module.
The procedure modification changes the order of cable insertion to avoid
the possibility of unexpected VSWR alarm reporting.
• Modified Replacement of the power supply rack of the six-rectifier
type (S8000 Outdoor BTS) to include substeps for reconnection of
PCU cables and to supply torque value of the jack connector screw
concerned. (16.03)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
22 New in this release

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
23
Introduction
This document describes the corrective and preventive maintenance
procedures applicable to:
• the S8000 Outdoor BTS for GSM 850, 900, 1800 and 1900
• the S8000 Indoor BTS for GSM 850, 900, 1800 and 1900
• the S8003 Indoor BTS for GSM 900, 1800 and GSM-R
Prerequisites
The readers must be familiar with the following NTPs:
<01> : Nortel GSM BSS Overview
<51> : Nortel GSM TML (BTS) Commissioning and Fault Management
< 63 > : Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals
<103> : Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fault Clearing
Readers should also refer to the following NTPs:
< 07 > : Nortel GSM BSS Fundamentals — Operating Principles
<101> : Nortel GSM BSC 12000HC/TCU 2G Fault Clearing
<102> : Nortel GSM BTS S2000/S2000E/S4000 Fault Clearing
<105> : Nortel GSM BSS Fault Clearing — Advanced Maintenance

Procedures
<124> : Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference
<125> : Nortel GSM BSS Performance Management — Observation

Counters Dictionary

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
24 Introduction
<129> : Nortel GSM OMC-R Commands Reference — Configuration,

Performance, and Maintenance menus
<130> : Nortel GSM OMC-R Commands Reference — Security,

Administration, SMS-CB, and Help menus
<131> : Nortel GSM BSC 3000/TCU 3000 Fault Clearing
<133>: Nortel GSM BSS Performance Management— Observations

Counters Fundamentals
Navigation
This document consists of eight chapters:
• Chapter 1 "Manual User Guide" (page 27) describes how to use this
maintenance manual.
• Chapter 2 "Description of the cabinets" (page 33) provides a brief
description of the boards and modules contained in S8000 and S8003
BTSs.
• Chapter 3 "Description of a start-up" (page 141) describes the procedure
for starting up an S8000 and S8003 BTS and for monitoring the BTS
start-up. It also provides a brief description of the BTS power supply.
• Chapter 4 "Faults without alarms at the OMC-R" (page 179) describes
how to locate faults when some components of the S8000 and S8003
BTS do not send alarms to the OMC-R.
• Chapter 5 "Preventive maintenance procedures" (page 183) provides a
guide for maintenance personnel to perform preventive maintenance to
the S8000 and S8003 BTS. Preventive maintenance allows you to take
recommended actions at scheduled intervals to decrease the number of
problems that can affect the BTS.
• Chapter 6 "Replacement procedures" (page 313) provides a guide
for maintenance personnel to perform replacement procedures to the
S8000 and S8003 BTS. Replacement procedures allow you to replace
boards and modules of the BTS. These procedures are applicable:
— when an item of equipment is faulty
— when an item of equipment has to be replaced according to the
preventive maintenance
• Chapter 7 "On-site TIL use" (page 741) provides a guide of actions to

be taken in the case of the fault number 1067 on some equipments of
the S8000 and S8003 BTS.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Navigation 25
• Chapter 8 "DACS and Low Noise DACS technical manual" (page

761) provides a technical and operational description and describes
troubleshooting.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
26 Introduction

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
27
Chapter 1
Manual User Guide
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 Corrective maintenance
The network maintenance is based on the graphical supervision of the
network.
It is also based on the identification and the replacement of faulty items of
equipment, using the alarms and the notifications described in NTP < 39 >.
This process is divided into two steps:
• locating and identifying the faulty items of equipment (see Figure 1
"Corrective maintenance diagnostic" (page 29)),
• replacing the faulty items of equipment, using the replacement
procedures given in this manual (see Figure 2 "Guide to using the
maintenance manual" (page 30))
When a faulty item of equipment sends an alarm to the OMC-R, this alarm
is identified by a fault number. NTP 128 gives the procedures associated
with the various fault numbers.
When a faulty item of equipment triggers several alarms, NTP < 105 >
enables the operator to locate this faulty item of equipment. It also helps
the operator when an abnormal operation occurs in a BTS, a TCU, a BSC,
PCM links, or on any BTS entities.
1.1.2 Preventive maintenance

The implementation of the preventive maintenance procedures is the
responsibility of each customer.
Preventive maintenance is used to periodically test the items of equipment
that do not directly trigger any alarm at the OMC-R. However, the execution
of these procedures may trigger alarms at the OMC-R.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
28 Chapter 1 Manual User Guide
This process is divided into two steps (see Figure 1 "Corrective maintenance
diagnostic" (page 29)):
• the test procedures of the items of equipment
• the replacement procedures of the items of equipment
All these procedures are described in this manual.
1.1.3 Intervention restrictions

There may be a lapse of time between the identification of the alarm at the
OMC-R and the time the operator responsible for the intervention arrives at
the site.
The operator must be synchronized with the OMC-R (by telephone) before
an on-site intervention, in the following cases:
• isolating procedure
• intervention because alarms are triggered at the OMC-R
• completion of an on-site intervention
• return to service procedure

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
1.1 Introduction 29
Figure 1
Corrective maintenance diagnostic

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 2
Guide to using the maintenance manual
1.1.4 RoHS compliancy

The following BTS are RoHS compliant:
• S8000 Indoor
• S8000 Outdoor

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
1.1 Introduction 31
• S8003
Other S8000 RoHS compliant modules include:

• eDRX 900
• eDRX 1800
• DRX ND3 GSMR
• CMCF Phase 2
• CPCMI
• RECAL
• CBCFICO
• Rectifier 680W
• F-Type converter
Mixed configurations (RoHS modules with non-RoHS modules) are

supported for all the BTS only in a non-RoHS product.
A non RoHS module/product will be repaired when possible, else will be

exchanged by a RoHS module/product.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
33
Chapter 2
Description of the cabinets
2.1 Presentation
A description of the cabinets is given for:
• the S8000 Outdoor BTS for GSM 850, 900, 1800 and 1900
• the S8000 Indoor BTS for GSM 850, 900, 1800 and 1900
• the S8003 Indoor BTS for GSM 900, GSM 1800
2.2 Composition of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

2.2.1 Introduction
The S8000 Outdoor BTS contains:
• one base cabinet
• one or two extension cabinets (used according to the configuration type)
• one external battery cabinet (optional) per cabinet (base cabinet,
extension cabinet)
There are two types of DRX: DRX and eDRX. The term DRX used alone
refers to the two types unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. For
example, if only DRX appears in a sentence (or a diagram), this should be
interpreted as referring to the two types. However, if DRX and/or eDRX
appear in a sentence (or diagram), then the term DRX refers just to the
type DRX.
2.2.2 Description of an S8000 Outdoor base cabinet with the BCF

The S8000 Outdoor base cabinet contains two compartments (see Figure
3 "Overview of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet (with ACUs)" (page
49) and Figure 5 "Overview of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet (with
DACs - type 2)" (page 51)):
• one main compartment
• one top compartment

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
34 Chapter 2 Description of the cabinets
2.2.2.1 Description of the main compartment

The main compartment of the S8000 Outdoor base cabinet contains, in its
maximum configuration, the following elements (see Figure 7 "Maximum
equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with the BCF" (page 53),
Figure 8 "Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with
the CBCF" (page 54), Figure 11 "Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor
BTS base cabinet with H4D coupling" (page 57) and Figure 33 "Overview of
an S8000 Indoor BTS with the CBCF" (page 103)):
• one Base Common Functions (BCF) subsystem containing the following
elements:
— two Control and SWitching Modules (CSWM)
— two GaTeWay boards (GTW)
— two SYNChronization boards (SYNC)
— four Data Signaling Concentration boards (DSC)
— three PCM Interface boards (PCMI)
— one Power Supply CoMmanD board (PSCMD)
— two or three BCF power supplies 5 V/12 A
• one ALarm COllecting board (ALCO)

• eight TRXs, made up of:
— eight DRXs or eDRXs
— eight Power or High Power Amplifiers (PA or HePA)
Eight HePA are supported with thermal and electrical constraints.
• RF-combiner modules which can be six D RF-combiners, or six H2D

RF-combiners, or two H4D RF-combiners, or four TX-filters associated
with four D RF-combiners:
— six D RF-combiners, each composed of:
– one duplexer
– one LNA-combiner module
– one VSWR-combiner module (optional)
— six H2D RF-combiners, each composed of:

– one duplexer
– one hybrid coupler

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
— two H4D RF-combiners, each composed of:

– one duplexer
– three hybrid couplers
— four TX-filters associated with four D RF-combiners:

– four D RF-combiners, each composed of:
– one duplexer
– four TX-filters, each composed of:

– one TX-filter
• one COMbiner InterCOnnection panel (COMICO)

• two F-type converters (one is optional)
• six reception couplers (Rx-splitters)
• one power supply rack contains the following elements:
— six rectifiers or seven rectifiers
— one Power Control Unit (PCU)
• or one GSM Integrated Power System (GIPS) containing the following

elements:
— up to five rectifiers
— one DC Distribution and Control Unit (DCU)
— one AC Distribution Unit (ADU)
• one high temperature thermostat located above the BCF

• one low temperature thermostat located under the power supply rack
• one single-phase, split single-phase or tri-phase AC box containing the
following elements:
— single-phase AC box (types 1, 2 and 3, see Figure 15 "Single-phase
AC box (GSM 900/1800) type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page
61) to Figure 17 "Single-phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) type 3 of
the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 63)):

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
– two supply filters

– a main circuit breaker
– a climatic system circuit breaker
– a rectifier circuit breaker
– one electrical outlet with differential (types 2 and 3) or two ones
(type 1)
– one AC lightning protector
– one AC voltage supply indicator light (type 1)
– two fuses (type 1)
— split single-phase AC box (types 1, 2 and 3, see Figure 18 "Split

single-phase AC box (GSM 1900) type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS"
(page 64) to Figure 20 "Split single-phase AC box (GSM 1900) type
3 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 66)):
– three supply filters
– a main circuit breaker
– a climatic system circuit breaker
– a rectifier circuit breaker
– two electrical outlets with differential
– one fuse (types 2 and 3) or two ones (type 1)
— tri-phase AC box (types 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 see Figure 21 "Tri-phase

67) to 2-23 :
– four supply filters
– a general stop button
– the ACU0 and ACU1 climatic system breakers (type 1) or the
DACS climatic system breaker (types 2, 3 and 4 )
– the rectifier circuit breaker (types 1, 2 and 3) or three rectifier
circuit breakers (type 4)
– one electrical outlet with differential (types 2, 3 and 4 ) or two
ones (type 1)
• or one AC box / GIPS:

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
— single phase, split phase or three phase input terminal blocks

— E, F, UK or US type user AC plug including an AC breaker with a
differential device and surge protectors
• lightning protection modules: (optional, depending on countries):

— lightning protection modules type 1:
– two ALPRO boards maximum, each containing up to eight
external alarm secondary lightning protectors (ALarm
PROtection: protection for the ALCO board external alarms)
– one PRIPRO board, containing up to eight primary lightning
protectors (PRImary PROtection: protection for the ALPRO
boards)
– up to twelve PCM lightning protectors

– one external alarm connection box
– one PCM connection module
Either lightning protection module type 1 or type 2 is used, no mixed module

type is allowed.
2.2.2.2 Description of the top compartment

The top compartment contains the following elements (see Figure 3
"Overview of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet (with ACUs)" (page 49)
and Figure 5 "Overview of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet (with DACs
- type 2)" (page 51)):
• a set of internal batteries (optional)
• one climatic unit system (ACUs or DACS):
— two ACUs (Air Conditioning Unit), each containing the following
elements:
– one compressor
– two blowers, each made up of a condenser and an evaporator
— one DACS, containing the following elements:

– one filter
– twin blowers
– one transformer
– one thermostat

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
• air inlets and outlets
2.2.3 Description of an S8000 Outdoor base cabinet with the CBCF

The S8000 Outdoor base cabinet contains two compartments (see Figure
3 "Overview of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet (with ACUs)" (page
49) and Figure 5 "Overview of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet (with
DACs - type 2)" (page 51)):

The main compartment of the S8000 Outdoor base cabinet contains, in its
maximum configuration, the following elements (see Figure 6 "Overview of
an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet (with DACs - type 3)" (page 52), Figure
9 "Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with H2D
coupling" (page 55), Figure 11 "Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor
BTS base cabinet with H4D coupling" (page 57) and Figure 13 "Maximum
equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with tx-filter/duplexer
coupling" (page 59)):
• one Compact BCF (CBCF) subsystem containing the following elements:
— three Compact PCM Interface boards (CPCMI)
— two Compact Main Common Functions boards (CMCF)
— one interconnection BCF ICO board
— one CBCF interconnection Back Panel module (CBP)
• one REmote Control and ALarm board (RECAL)

— eight Power Amplifiers (PAs) type 1 or type 2 or ePAs or up to six
HePA Unlike the PA type 2, the PA type 1 contains a fuse and can
contain a switch.
• RF-combiner modules are six D RF-combiners, or six H2D

– one duplexer

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

– one duplexer

– one duplexer
— four TX-filters associated with four D RF-combiners:

– one duplexer
– four TX-filters, each composed of:

– one TX-filter

• one power supply rack containing the following elements:

elements:
• one high temperature thermostat located above the CBCF

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
• one single-phase, split single-phase or tri-phase AC box containing the
following elements:
— single-phase AC box (types 1, 2 and 3, see Figure 15 "Single-phase
61) to Figure 17 "Single-phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) type 3 of
the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 63)):
– two supply filters
– the main circuit breaker
– the climatic system circuit breaker
– the rectifier circuit breaker
– one electrical outlet with differential (types 2 and 3) or two ones
(type 1)
– two fuses (type 1)
— split single-phase AC box (types 1, 2 and 3, see Figure 18 "Split

single-phase AC box (GSM 1900) type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS"
(page 64) to Figure 20 "Split single-phase AC box (GSM 1900) type
3 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 66)):
– three supply filters
– the main circuit breaker
– the climatic system circuit breaker
– the rectifier circuit breaker
– two electrical outlets with differential
– one fuse (types 2 and 3) or two ones (type 1)
— tri-phase AC box (types 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 see Figure 21 "Tri-phase

67) to 2-23 :
– four supply filters
– the general stop button
– the ACU0 and ACU1 climatic system breakers (type 1) or the
DACS climatic system breaker (types 2, 3 and 4)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
– the rectifier circuit breaker (types 1, 2 and 3) or three rectifier

circuit breakers (type 4)
– one electrical outlet with differential (types 2, 3 and 4) or two
ones (type 1)
• or one AC box / GIPS (S8000 outdoor only) (see Figure 26 "AC box /
GIPS with E, F, or UK type user AC plug" (page 72) and Figure 27 "AC
box / GIPS with US type user AC plug" (page 73)):
— single phase, split phase or three phase input terminal blocks
— E, F, UK or US type user AC plug including an AC breaker with
differential device and surge protectors
• lightning protection modules:

– two ALPRO boards, at the maximum, containing up to
eight external alarm secondary lightning protectors (ALarm
PROtection: protection for the RECAL board external alarms)
– one PRIPRO board, containing up to eight primary lightning
protectors (PRImary PROtection: protection for the ALPRO
boards)
– up to twelve PCM lightning protectors

– one external alarm connection box
– one PCM connection module
• one SiteFlash cables kit (NTQA79CA) is mandatory when implementing

a satellite ABIS connection. It is used to update the nominal software
of the CBCF, DRX or eDRX modules, allowing the BTS to synchronize
on the network. The kit includes:
— one cable for a CBCF connection (through the CMCF board)
(NTQA3370)
— one cable dedicated to an eDRX or DRX connection (NTQA3372)

The top compartment contains the following elements (see Figure 3
"Overview of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet (with ACUs)" (page 49)
and Figure 5 "Overview of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet (with DACs
- type 2)" (page 51)):

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
• one climatic unit system (ACUs or DACS):

— two ACUs (Air Conditioning Unit), each containing the following
elements:
– one compressor
– two blowers, each made up of a condenser and an evaporator
— one DACS, containing mainly the following elements:

– one filter
– twin blowers
– one transformer
– one thermostat
• air inlets and outlets
2.2.4 Description of an S8000 Outdoor extension cabinet

The extension cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTS and the base cabinet are
alike with the exception of the missing BCF or CBCF. A filling plate replaces
the BCF or the CBCF (see Figure 10 "Maximum equipment of an S8000
Outdoor BTS extension cabinet with H2D coupling" (page 56), Figure 12
"Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS extension cabinet with
H4D coupling" (page 58), and Figure 14 "Maximum equipment of an S8000
Outdoor BTS extension cabinet with tx-filter/duplexer coupling" (page 60)).
So the extension cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor base cabinet contains two
compartments:

The main compartment of the S8000 Outdoor extension cabinet, in its
maximum configuration, contains the following elements:
• one filling plate which replaces the CBCF
• one ALarm COllecting board (ALCO) or one REmote Control and ALarm
board (RECAL):
— one ALCO board in the case of a base cabinet with the BCF
— one RECAL board in the case of a base cabinet with the CBCF

— eight Power Amplifiers (PAs, ePAs or six HePA maximum)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

with four D RF-combiners
• one power supply rack containing the following elements:

elements:
• one high temperature thermostat located above the filling plate

• one single-phase, split single-phase or tri-phase AC box (type 1, type 2,
type 3, type 4 or 5)
• lightning protection modules

The top compartment contains the following elements:
• one climatic unit system (ACUs or DACS), containing mainly the
following elements:
— twin blowers
— one filter
— one transformer
— one thermostat
— if there is no ACU, see the section 2.2.3.2
• the air inlets and outlets

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
2.2.5 Description of an S8000 Outdoor external battery cabinet

The battery cabinet (see Figure 28 "External battery cabinet NTQA36AA
of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (NTQA36GA batteries)" (page 74) to Figure
30 "External battery cabinet NTQA36BA of the S8000 BTS (SBS C11
batteries)" (page 76)) is designed for an external usage and is made of:
• up to four stacks of four batteries each
• a battery thermal probe connected to the positive terminal of the second
lower string
• a DC breaker to switch off the external battery backup of the BTS
• an AC box providing mains directly from the operator box, containing an
RF filter, a current surge protector and a circuit breaker
• a heating and ventilation unit triggered by a thermostat
• two thermostats triggering a low and a high temperature alarm
respectively
2.2.6 Description of the S8000 Outdoor BTS products

2.2.6.1 GSM frequency bands (GSM 900, 1800, 1900, 850, and
850/1900)
The S8000 Outdoor BTS contains eight DRX in maximum configuration.
The following configurations are in Single Band:
Coupling Monocabinet Bicabinet Tricabinet

system
1O3DDD
indoor S8000/
S8003
(GSM-R only)
max 1S222
D
min.1S000
max 1S444 max 2S444

D+TX-filter
min.1O0D min.2S000

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

system
H2D max 1O8 H2D max 2S88 H2D max 3S888 H2D
min.1O0 H2D min.2S00 H2D min.3S000 H2D
max 1S44 H2D max 2S444 H2D
min.1S00 H2D min.2S000 H2D
max 1S332 H2D
min.1S000 H2D
max 1S323 H2D
min.1S003 H2D
max S233
min.S033
max 1S422
min.1S400
max S242
min.S040
max S224
min.S004
max 2S448 H2D
min.2S005 H2D
max 2S844 H2D
min.2S500 H2D
max 1O8 H4D max 2S88 H4D max 3S888 H4D
H4D
min.1O0 H4D min.2S00 H4D min.3S000 H4D
max 2S448
H2D/H4D
H2D/H4D
min.2S000
H2D/H4D
max 2S844
H4D/H2D
H4D/H2D
min.2S000
H4D/H2D
CC8
max 1O8 CC8 max 2S88 CC8 max 3S111 CC8
(indoor 18
min.1O1 CC8 min.2S11 CC8 min.3S111 CC8
only)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
The following configurations are in Dual Band:

system
max O2_2 max S222_222
D
min.1S000 min.S000_000
max S2_2_2
min.O0_0
H2D+Rx+F max S22_22
ilter min.S00_00
max O4_4
D+TX+Filter
min.O0_0
max O4_4
min.O0_0
max S44_44 max S444_444
min.S00_00 min.S000_000
max S332_332
min.S000_000
max S323_323
H2D
min.S003_003
max S233_233
min.S033_033
max O6_2 max S6_2/6_2 max S6_2/6_2/6_2
min.O5_0 min.S5_0/5_0 min.S5_0/5_0/5_0
max O5_3 max S5_3/5_3 max S5_3/5_3/5_3
min.05_3 min.S5_3/5_3 min.S5_3/5_3/5_3
max S44_22 max S444_222
H2D/D
min.S0_0 min.S000_000
max O6_2 max S6_2/6_2 max S6_2/6_2/6_2
min.O5_0 min.S5_0/5_0 min.S5_0/5_0/5_0
max O5_3 max S5_3/5_3 max S5_3/5_3/5_3
H4D/H2D min.05_3 min.S5_3/5_3 min.S5_3/5_3/5_3
ATTENTION
Although most configurations are not completely equipped with DRXs, at least
one DRX must be installed on site when the configuration is set up.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
2.2.6.2 GSM frequency band 850
GSM frequency band 850 - single band

system
S111D
D
S222D
D+TX-filter S44 D + TX-filter S444 D + TX-filter
H2D S332 H2D
S444 H2D S44 H2D
S442 H2D
H4D
H2D/H4D
H4D/H2D
GSM frequency band 850/1900 - dual band

system
O2_2D
D
S222_222D
D+TX-filter
H2D S4_4/4_4/4_4
S332_332 H2D
H2D
S6_2/6_2/6_2
O4_4 H2D
H2D
S5_3/5_3/5_3
S44_44 H2D
H2D
S444_444 H2D
S44_22 H2D/D
H2D/D
S444_444 H2D
H2D/H4D
H4D/H2D
2.2.7 Location
The equipment is given a number according to its position in the cabinet,
the type of cabinet, and the type of element (see Figure 3 "Overview of
an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet (with ACUs)" (page 49) to Figure
28 "External battery cabinet NTQA36AA of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
(NTQA36GA batteries)" (page 74) and Table 1 "ACU climatic unit location in
the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 77) to Table 27 "RECAL board location in
the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 93)).
The equipment number n starts with number Zero for the first equipment on
the left side of the cabinet. Next equipment number is equipment n+1.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 3
Overview of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet (with ACUs)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 4
Overview of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet (with DACS - type 1)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 5
Overview of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet (with DACs - type 2)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 6
Overview of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet (with DACs - type 3)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 7
Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with the BCF

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 8
Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with the CBCF

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 9
Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with H2D coupling

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 10
Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS extension cabinet with H2D coupling

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 11
Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with H4D coupling

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 12
Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS extension cabinet with H4D coupling

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 13
Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with tx-filter/duplexer coupling

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 14
Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS extension cabinet with tx-filter/duplexer
coupling

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 15
Single-phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 16

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 17

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 18
Split single-phase AC box (GSM 1900) type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 19

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 20

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 21
Tri-phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 22

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 23

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 24

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 25

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 26
AC box / GIPS with E, F, or UK type user AC plug

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 27
AC box / GIPS with US type user AC plug

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 28
External battery cabinet NTQA36AA of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (NTQA36GA batteries)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 29
External battery cabinet NTQA36AB of the S8000 outdoor BTS (SBS 60 batteries)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 30
External battery cabinet NTQA36BA of the S8000 BTS (SBS C11 batteries)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
2.2.8 Cross-reference between the equipment item and the replacement

sheets for the S8000 Outdoor BTS
2.2.8.1 Common equipment to the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the
BCF and to the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the CBCF
Table 1
ACU climatic unit location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment Test Replacement
Equipment type Cabinet Location
number sheet sheet
ACU cooling system 0 Base ACU cooler 0 Section 6.2.14
"Replacement of
an ACU climatic
-
ACU cooling system 1 Base ACU cooler 1 unit (S8000
Outdoor BTS)"
(page 393)
Table 2
DACS climatic system location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment Equipme Replacement
Cabinet Location Test Sheet
Type nt Type Sheet
DACS cooling DACS Section
0 Base
system cooler 0 6.2.20
Chapter 8 "DACS "Replacement
DACS cooling Extensi DACS
1 and Low Noise of the DACS
system on 0 cooler 1
DACS technical climatic sys
manual" (page 761) tem (S8000
DACS cooling Extensi DACS
2 Outdoor BTS)"
system on 1 cooler 2
(page 426)
Table 3
DRX location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
number sheet sheet
DRX 0 Base DRX 0 Section
6.2.38
DRX 1 Base DRX 1
"Replacement
DRX 2 Base DRX 2 of a DRX
DRX 4 Base DRX 3 - module (S8
000 Outdoor
DRX 5 Base DRX 4 BTS, S8000
DRX 6 Base DRX 5 Indoor BTS,
and S8003
DRX 7 Base DRX 6 Indoor BTS)"

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

number sheet sheet
DRX 8 Base DRX 7
DRX 9 Extension 0 DRX 0
DRX 16 Extension 0 DRX 7 (page 550)
Table 4
DRX diversity reception chain location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment Type Equ Cabinet Location Test Replacement
ipm Sheet Sheet
ent
Type
DRX_Diversity_R 0 Base Diversity reception
eception_Chain chain of DRX 0
Section 6.2.38
"Replacement of
a DRX module
DRX_Diversity_R 2 Base Diversity reception (S8000 Outdoor
-
eception_Chain chain of DRX 2 BTS, S8000 Indoor
BTS, and S8003
Indoor BTS)" (page
550)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

DRX_Diversity_R 8 Extension Diversity reception
eception_Chain 0 chain of DRX 0

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Table 5
DRX main reception chain location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment Equip Cabinet Location Test Replacement Sheet
Type ment Shee
Type t
DRX_Main_Rec 0 Base Main reception
eption_Chain chain of DRX 0
DRX_Main_Rec 7 Extensi Main reception
Section 6.2.38
eption_Chain on 0 chain of DRX 7
"Replacement of a DRX
DRX_Main_Rec 8 Extensi Main reception module (S8000 Outdoor
-
eption_Chain on 0 chain of DRX 0 BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS,
and S8003 Indoor BTS)"
(page 550)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

Table 6
External battery location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment Equip Cabinet Location Test sheet Replacement sheet
type ment
numb
er
Battery 0 Base Battery Section 5.4.3 Section 6.2.41
cabinet cabinet "Test of the "Replacement of the
internal and external batteries
Battery 1 Extension Battery
external batteries (battery cabinet)"
cabinet 0 cabinet
(S8000 Outdoor (page 563)
Battery 2 Extension Battery BTS)" (page 227)
cabinet 1 cabinet
Table 7
F-type converter location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Replacem
Equipment Test
Equipment type Cabinet Location ent
number sheet
sheet
Converter_F 0 Base F power supply 0
Converter_F 1 Base F power supply 1 Section
6.2.45 "Re
Converter_F 2 Extension 0 F power supply 0
placement
- of an F-type
converter
(S8000
Outdoor
411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Replacem
Equipment Test
Equipment type Cabinet Location ent
number sheet
sheet
5 BTS, S8000
Converter_F Extension 1 F power supply 1
Indoor BTS
and S8003
Indoor BTS)"
(page 585)
Table 8
Internal battery location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipm
ent Cabinet Location
type sheet sheet
number
Battery 0 Base Battery Section
5.4.3
Battery 1 Extension 0 Battery
"Test of
Battery 2 Extension 1 Battery the inter
Section 6.2.48
nal and
"Replacement
extern
of the internal
al bat
batteries (S8000
teries
Outdoor BTS)"
(S8000
(page 604)
Outdoor
BTS)"
(page
227)
Table 9
COMBINER_H4D_LN location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment Equip Cabinet Location Test Replacement sheet
type ment sheet
number
Combiner_ 0 Base Combiner_H Section 6.2.62 "
H4_LN 4_LN 0 - Replacement of a
RF-combiner module
Combiner_ 1 Base Combiner_H
H4_LN 4_LN 1

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Combiner_ 2 Extensi Combiner_H

H4_LN on 0 4_LN 2
H4_LN on 0 4_LN 3 (S8000 Outdoor &
Indoor BTS, and S8003
Combiner_ 4 Extensi Combiner_H Indoor BTS)" (page 667)
H4_LN on 1 4_LN 4
H4_LN on 1 4_LN 5
Table 10
H4D-VSWR-COMBINER location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment Equipmen Cabinet Location Test Replacement sheet
type t number sheet
Combiner_H4 0 Base Combiner_H4
_VSWR _VSWR 0
_VSWR _VSWR 1 Section 6.2.62 "
Replacement of
Combiner_H4 2 Extension 0 Combiner_H4 a RF-combiner
_VSWR _VSWR 2 module (S8000
-
Combiner_H4 3 Extension 0 Combiner_H4 Outdoor &
_VSWR _VSWR 3 Indoor BTS, and
S8003 Indoor BTS)"
Combiner_H4 4 Extension 1 Combiner_H4 (page 667)
_VSWR _VSWR 4
Combiner_H4 5 Extension 1 Combiner_H4
_VSWR _VSWR 5
Table 11
COMBINER_LN location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipm
type sheet sheet
number
Combiner_LN 0 Base LN 0
Section 6.2.62 "
Combiner_LN 1 Base LN 1 Replacement of a
Combiner_LN 2 Base LN 2 RF-combiner module
- (S8000 Outdoor &
Combiner_LN 3 Base LN 3 Indoor BTS, and
Combiner_LN 4 Base LN 4 S8003 Indoor BTS)"
(page 667)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Equipm
type sheet sheet
number
Combiner_LN 6 Extension LN 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
Table 12
Output Rx-splitter D location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
type ment sheet
numb
er
D_Output_R 0 Base D_Output_RX Section 6.2.63
X_Splitter _Splitter 0 "Replacement of a
Rx-splitter (S8000
D_Output_R 1 Base D_Output_RX
- Outdoor BTS, S8000
X_Splitter _Splitter 1
Indoor BTS, and
D_Output_R 2 Base D_Output_RX S8003 Indoor BTS)"
X_Splitter _Splitter 2 (page 677)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

D_Output_R 7 Extension 0 D_Output_RX

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Table 13
Output Rx-splitter M location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
type ment sheet
number
M_Output_R 0 Base M_Output_RX
M_Output_R 7 Extensi M_Output_RX
Section 6.2.63
X_Splitter on 0 _Splitter 7
"Replacement of a
M_Output_R 8 Extensi M_Output_RX Rx-splitter (S8000
-
X_Splitter on 0 _Splitter 0 Outdoor BTS, S8000
Indoor BTS, and S8003
Indoor BTS)" (page 677)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

Table 14
PA Power amplifier location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipme Equipment Test Replacement
Cabinet Location
nt type number sheet sheet
PA, ePA or 0 Base PA 0
HePA
HePA
HePA
HePA
Section 6.2.53
PA, ePA or 4 Base PA 4 "Replacement of a
HePA power amplifier module
-
PA, ePA or 5 Base PA 5 (S8000 Outdoor &
HePA Indoor BTS and S8003
HePA
HePA
PA, ePA or 8 Extension PA 0
HePA 0
HePA 0

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Equipme Equipment Test Replacement

Cabinet Location
nt type number sheet sheet
HePA 0
HePA 0
HePA 0
HePA 0
HePA 0
HePA 0
HePA 1
HePA 1
HePA 1
HePA 1
HePA 1
HePA 1
HePA 1
HePA 1
Table 15
Rectifier location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment Equipment Cabinet Location Test Replacement sheet
type number she
et
Rectifier 0 Base Rectifier Section 6.2.57 "
48 V Replacement of a rectifier
- of the six-rectifier type
Rectifier 1 Extension 0 Rectifier
(600W rectifier module)
48 V
(S8000 Outdoor BTS)"

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Rectifier 2 Extension 1 Rectifier (page 652)Section 6.2.56

48 V "Replacement of a rectifier
of the seven- rectifier type
(page 648)Section 6.2.57
"Replacement of a rectifier
of the seven- rectifier type
(page 652)
Table 16
TX-FILTER location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipme Test
Equipment Replacement
nt Cabinet Location she
type sheet
number et
Tx-filter 0 Base Tx-filter of VSWR 0
Tx-filter 3 base Tx-filter of VSWR 3
Tx-filter 7 Base Tx-filter of VSWR 7 Section 6.2.70
Tx-filter 8 Extension 0 Tx-filter of VSWR 0 "Replacement of
a Tx-filter module
Tx-filter 9 Extension 0 Tx-filter of VSWR 1 (TX-F) (S8000
-
Tx-filter 10 Extension 0 Tx-filter of VSWR 2 Outdoor BTS,
S8000 Indoor BTS
Tx-filter 11 Extension 0 Tx-filter of VSWR 3 and S8003 Indoor
Tx-filter 12 Extension 0 Tx-filter of VSWR 4 BTS)" (page 708)
Tx-filter 13 Extension 0 Tx-filter of VSWR 5

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Equipme Test
nt Cabinet Location she
type sheet
number et
Table 17
VSWR-COMBINER location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
type number sheet
Combiner_ 0 Base VSWR 0
VSWR
VSWR
VSWR
VSWR
VSWR
Section 6.2.62 "
VSWR
Replacement of a
Combiner_ 6 Extension VSWR 0 RF-combiner module (S8000
-
VSWR 0 Outdoor & Indoor
BTS, and S8003 Indoor
Combiner_ 7 Extension VSWR 1
BTS)" (page 667)
VSWR 0
VSWR 0
VSWR 0
VSWR 0
VSWR 0
VSWR 1

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

VSWR 1
VSWR 1
VSWR 1
VSWR 1
VSWR 1
2.2.8.2 Equipment of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the BCF
Table 18
ALCO board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment Equipmen Cabinet Location Test Replacement sheet
type t number sheet
ALCO 0 Base ALCO
Section 6.2.75 "Installation
ALCO 1 Extension ALCO of the new S8000 Outdoor
0 - BTS AC single phase
lightning protector"
ALCO 2 Extension ALCO
(page 729)
1
Table 19
BCF power supply location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
type type sheet
Converter 0 Base BCF power Section 6.2.19
BCF supply 0 "Replacement of a
- FANICO board (S8000
Converter 1 Base BCF power
Indoor BTS with BCF)"
BCF supply 1
(page 419)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Converter 2 Base BCF power

BCF supply 2
Table 20
CSWM board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Test
Equipment type Cabinet Location she
number sheet
et
CSWM 0 Base CSWM A board Section 6.2.4
"Replacement of
CSWM 1 Base CSWM B board -
a CSWM board"
(page 346)
Table 21
DSC board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
number sheet sheet
DSC 0 Base DSC 0
Section 6.2.5
DSC 1 Base DSC 1 "Replacement of a
-
DSC 2 Base DSC 2 DSC board" (page
349)
DSC 3 Base DSC 3
Table 22
GTW board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
number sheet sheet
GTW 0 Base GTW 0 Section 6.2.6
"Replacement of
GTW 1 Base GTW 1 -
a GTW board"
(page 353)
Table 23
PCMI board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
number sheet sheet
PCMI 0 Base PCMI 0 Section 6.2.7
- "Replacement of
PCMI 1 Base PCMI 1
a PCMI board"

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
PCMI 2 Base PCMI 2 (page 356)
Table 24
SYNC board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
number sheet sheet
SYNC 0 Base SYNC 0 Section 6.2.10
"Replacement of
SYNC 1 Base SYNC 1 -
a SYNC board"
(page 365)
2.2.8.3 Equipment of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the CBCF
Table 25
CMCF board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
number sheet sheet
CMCF 0 Base CMCF 0 Section 6.2.2
"Replacement of a
CMCF 1 Base CMCF 1
CMCF board (S8000
- Outdoor BTS, S8000
Indoor BTS, and
S8003 Indoor BTS)"
(page 338)
Table 26
CPCMI board Location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment Equipment Test Replacement
Cabinet Location
type number sheet sheet
CPCMI 0 Base CPCMI 0 Section 6.2.3
"Replacement of
CPCMI 1 Base CPCMI 1
a CPCMI board
CPCMI 2 Base CPCMI 2 (S8000 Outdoor
-
BTS, S8000 Indoor
BTS, and S8003
Indoor BTS)" (page
343)
Table 27
RECAL board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Cabinet Location
RECAL 0 Base RECAL Section 6.2.9
- "Replacement of
the RECAL board

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

Cabinet Location
RECAL 1 Extension 0 RECAL (S8000 Outdoor BTS,
S8000 Indoor BTS,
RECAL 2 Extension 1 RECAL
and S8003 Indoor
BTS)" (page 362)
2.3 Composition of the S8000 Indoor BTS

2.3.1 Introduction
The S8000 Indoor BTS contains:
• one base cabinet
• one BCF cabinet, only in the case of the BCF subsystem
• one or two extension cabinets (used according to the configuration type)
2.3.2 Description of an S8000 Indoor base cabinet with the BCF

The S8000 Indoor base cabinet contains two compartments (see Figure 32
"Overview of an S8000 Indoor BTS with the BCF cabinet" (page 102)):

The main compartment of the S8000 Indoor base cabinet contains, in its
maximum configuration, the following elements (see Figure 34 "Maximum
equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet with H2D coupling" (page
104), Figure 36 "Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet
with H4D coupling" (page 106) and Figure 38 "Maximum equipment of an
S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet with tx-filter/duplexer coupling" (page 108)):
• one ALarm COllecting board (ALCO)
— eight DRXs (The term DRX used alone refers to the two types DRX
or eDRX unless the context clearly indicates otherwise.)
— eight Power Amplifiers (PAs or ePAs)

RF-combiners, or two H4D RF-combiners, or four Tx-filters associated
– one duplexer

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.


– one duplexer

– one duplexer
— four Tx-filters associated with four D RF-combiners:

– one duplexer
– four Tx-filters, each composed of:

– one Tx-filter

• six receive couplers (Rx-splitters)
• one ventilation rack containing the following elements:
— three fans (one is optional)
— one FANICO board (control of the fan speed)
— one filter

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

• two ALPRO boards at the maximum (ALarm PROtection: protection for
the ALCO board external alarms)
• the radio outputs
• the 75 adaptation kit (optional)
• the top connection kit (optional) for the interconnection with the BCF
cabinet
• the terminal block for the DC power supply
• one fan grid enabling the air outlet
2.3.2.3 Description of the BCF cabinet

The BCF cabinet contains two compartments (see Figure 31 "Maximum
equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS BCF cabinet" (page 101)):
The main compartment contains, in its maximum configuration, the following

elements:
• two Control and SWitching Modules (CSWM)
• two GateWay boards (GTW)
• two SYNChronization boards (SYNC)
• four Data Signaling Concentration boards (DSC)
• three PCM Interface boards (PCMI)
• one Power Supply CoMmanD board (PSCMD)
• two or three BCF power supplies 5 V/12 A
The top compartment contains one ventilation rack with the following
elements:
• three fans
• one FANICO board (control of the fan speed)
2.3.3 Description of an S8000 Indoor base cabinet with the CBCF

The S8000 Indoor cabinet contains two compartments :

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

elements (see Figure 34 "Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor
BTS base cabinet with H2D coupling" (page 104), Figure 36 "Maximum
equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet with H4D coupling" (page
106) and Figure 38 "Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS base
cabinet with tx-filter/duplexer coupling" (page 108)):
• one Compact Base Common Functions (CBCF) containing the following
elements:
• one REmote and Control ALarm board (RECAL)

— eight DRXs (The term DRX used alone refers to the two types DRX
or eDRX unless the context clearly indicates otherwise.)
— eight Power or High Power Amplifiers (PA or HePA)
Eight HePA are supported with electrical constraints.

RF-combiners, or two H4D RF-combiners, or four Tx-filters associated
with four D RF-combiners, or one remote tunable cavity coupler (CC8):
– one duplexer

– one duplexer

– one duplexer

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

— four Tx-filters associated with four D RF-combiners:

– one duplexer
– four Tx-filters, each composed of:

– one Tx-filter
— one remote tunable cavity coupler (CC8)

— three fans (one is optional)
— one filter
• one SiteFlash cables kit (NTQA79CA) is mandatory when implementing

a satellite ABIS connection. It is used to update the nominal software
of the CBCF, DRX or eDRX modules, allowing the BTS to synchronize
on the network. The kit includes:
— one cable for a CBCF connection (through the CMCF board)
(NTQA3370)
— one cable dedicated to an eDRX or DRX connection (NTQA3372)

the RECAL board external alarms)
• the block terminal for the DC power supply

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
2.3.4 Description of an S8000 Indoor extension cabinet

The extension cabinet of the S8000 Indoor BTS and the base cabinet are
alike with the exception of the BCF cabinet or the CBCF subsystem is
missing.
The S8000 Indoor extension cabinet contains two compartments:

The main compartment, in its maximum configuration, contains the following
elements (see Figure 35 "Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS
extension cabinet with H2D coupling" (page 105), Figure 37 "Maximum
equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS extension cabinet with H4D coupling"
(page 107) and Figure 39 "Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS
extension cabinet with tx-filter/duplexer coupling" (page 109)):
• one ALarm COllecting board (ALCO) or one REmote Control and ALarm
board (RECAL):
— one ALCO board in the case of a base cabinet with the BCF cabinet
— one RECAL board in the case of a base cabinet with the CBCF

— eight DRX (The term DRX used alone refers to the two types DRX or
eDRX unless the context clearly indicates otherwise.)
— eight Power Amplifiers (PAs or ePAs)
• RF-combiner modules
— three fans
— one filter

the ALCO board external alarms)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
• the 75 adaption kit (optional)

• the top connection kit (optional) for the interconnection with the BCF
cabinet
• the block terminal for the DC power supply
2.3.5 Location
The equipment is given a number according to its position in the cabinet,
the type of cabinet, and the type of element (see Figure 31 "Maximum
equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS BCF cabinet" (page 101) to Figure
39 "Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS extension cabinet
with tx-filter/duplexer coupling" (page 109) and Table 29 "DRX diversity
reception chain location in the S8000 Indoor BTS" (page 112) to Section
2.4 "Composition of the S8003 Indoor BTS" (page 128)).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 31
Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS BCF cabinet

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 32
Overview of an S8000 Indoor BTS with the BCF cabinet

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 33
Overview of an S8000 Indoor BTS with the CBCF

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 34
Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet with H2D coupling

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 35
Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS extension cabinet with H2D coupling

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 36
Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet with H4D coupling

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 37
Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS extension cabinet with H4D coupling

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 38
Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet with tx-filter/duplexer coupling

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 39
Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS extension cabinet with tx-filter/duplexer coupling

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 40
Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet with CC8 coupling

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 41
Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS extension cabinet with CC8 coupling

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
2.3.6 Cross-reference between the equipment and the maintenance

sheets for the S8000 Indoor BTS
2.3.6.1 Common equipment to the S8000 Indoor BTS with the
BCF and to the S8000 Indoor BTS with the CBCF
Table 28
DRX location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
number sheet sheet
DRX 0 Base DRX 0
DRX 1 Base DRX 1
DRX 2 Base DRX 2
DRX 3 Base DRX 3
DRX 4 Base DRX 4
DRX 5 Base DRX 5
DRX 6 Base DRX 6
DRX 7 Base DRX 7
DRX 10 Extension 0 DRX 2 Table 28 "DRX
DRX 11 Extension 0 DRX 3 location in the
- S8000 Indoor
DRX 12 Extension 0 DRX 4 BTS" (page
DRX 13 Extension 0 DRX 5 112)
Table 29
DRX diversity reception chain location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
Equipm
Equipment type Cabinet Location Test Replacement
ent

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
number sheet sheet

DRX_Diversit 0 Base Diversity reception
y_Reception_ chain of DRX 0
Chain
Chain
Chain
Chain
Chain
Chain
y_Reception_ chain of DRX 6 Table 28 "DRX
Chain location in the
- S8000 Indoor
DRX_Diversit 7 Base Diversity reception BTS" (page
y_Reception_ chain of DRX 7 112)
Chain
DRX_Diversit 8 Extension Diversity reception
y_Reception_ 0 chain of DRX 0
Chain
Chain
Chain
Chain
Chain
Chain

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Equipm
Test Replacement
Equipment type ent Cabinet Location
sheet sheet
number
Chain
Chain
Chain
Chain
Chain
Chain
Chain
Chain
Chain
Chain
Table 30
DRX main reception chain location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
Equipm Replacement
Equipment type Cabinet Location Test
ent

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
number sheet sheet

DRX_Main_Rec 8 Extension Main reception
eption_Chain 0 chain of DRX 0
DRX_Main_Rec 9 Extension Main reception Table 28 "DRX
eption_Chain 0 chain of DRX 1 location in the
- S8000 Indoor
DRX_Main_Rec 10 Extension Main reception BTS" (page
eption_Chain 0 chain of DRX 2 112)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Equipm
Test Replacement
sheet sheet
number
Table 31
F-type converter location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
number sheet sheet
Converter_F 0 Base F power supply 0
Converter_F 1 Base F power supply 1 Section 6.2.45
"Replacement
Converter_F 2 Extension F power supply 0 of an F-type
0 converter
Converter_F 3 Extension F power supply 1 (S8000 Outdoor
-
0 BTS, S8000
Indoor BTS and
Converter_F 4 Extension F power supply 0 S8003 Indoor
1 BTS)" (page
Converter_F 5 Extension F power supply 1 585)
1
Table 32
H4D-LN-combiner location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
number sheet sheet
_LN _LN 0 Section 6.2.62 "
Combiner_H4 1 Base Combiner_H4 Replacement of
_LN _LN 1 a RF-combiner
module (S8000
Combiner_H4 2 Extension Combiner_H4
- Outdoor &
_LN 0 _LN 0
Indoor BTS, and
Combiner_H4 3 Extension Combiner_H4 S8003 Indoor
_LN 0 _LN 1 BTS)" (page
Combiner_H4 4 Extension Combiner_H4 667)
_LN 1 _LN 0

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Combiner_H4 5 Extension Combiner_H4

_LN 1 _LN 1
Table 33
H4D-VSWR-combiner location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
number sheet sheet
Combiner_H4 0 Base Combiner_H4_
_VSWR VSWR 0
Combiner_H4 1 Base Combiner_H4_ Section 6.2.62 "
_VSWR VSWR 1 Replacement of
Combiner_H4 2 Extension Combiner_H4_ a RF-combiner
_VSWR 0 VSWR 0 module (S8000
- Outdoor &
Combiner_H4 3 Extension Combiner_H4_ Indoor BTS, and
_VSWR 0 VSWR 1 S8003 Indoor
Combiner_H4 4 Extension Combiner_H4_ BTS)" (page
_VSWR 1 VSWR 0 667)
Combiner_H4 5 Extension Combiner_H4_
_VSWR 1 VSWR 1
Table 34
Fan system location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
number sheet sheet
Fan system 0 Base FAN 0
Fan system 3 Extension FAN 0
0 Section 6.2.17
"Replacement of
Fan system 4 Extension FAN 1 a base cabinet
0 -
fan (S8000
Fan system 5 Extension FAN 2 Indoor BTS)"
0 (page 412)
1
1

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

1
Table 35
Combiner_LN location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
Equipm
Test Replacement
sheet sheet
number
0
0 Section
6.2.62 " Rep
lacement of a
0
RF-combiner
Combiner_LN 9 Extension LN 3 module (S8
0 - 000 Outdoor
Combiner_LN 10 Extension LN 4 & Indoor
0 BTS, and
S8003 Indoor
Combiner_LN 11 Extension LN 5 BTS)" (page
0 667)
1
1
1
1
1

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
1
Table 36
Output Rx-splitter D location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
Equipm
Test Replacement
sheet sheet
number
D_Output_RX 0 Base D_Output_RX_Spl
_Splitter itter of DRX 0
Section
D_Output_RX 6 Base D_Output_RX_Spl 6.2.63
_Splitter itter of DRX 6 "Replacement
D_Output_RX 7 Base D_Output_RX_Spl of a Rx-splitter
_Splitter itter of DRX 7 (S8000
- Outdoor BTS,
D_Output_RX 8 Extension D_Output_RX_Spl S8000 Indoor
_Splitter 0 itter of DRX 0 BTS, and
D_Output_RX 9 Extension D_Output_RX_Spl S8003 Indoor
_Splitter 0 itter of DRX 1 BTS)" (page
677)
D_Output_RX 10 Extension D_Output_RX_Spl
_Splitter 0 itter of DRX 2

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Equipm
Test Replacement
sheet sheet
number
Table 37
Output Rx-splitter M location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
Equipm
Test Replacement
sheet sheet
number
M_Output_RX 0 Base M_Output_RX_Sp
_Splitter litter of DRX 0
Section
M_Output_RX 2 Base M_Output_RX_Sp 6.2.63
_Splitter litter of DRX 2 "Replacement
M_Output_RX 3 Base M_Output_RX_Sp of a Rx-splitter
_Splitter litter of DRX 3 (S8000
- Outdoor BTS,
M_Output_RX 4 Base M_Output_RX_Sp S8000 Indoor
_Splitter litter of DRX 4 BTS, and
M_Output_RX 5 Base M_Output_RX_Sp S8003 Indoor
_Splitter litter of DRX 5 BTS)" (page
677)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Equipm
Test Replacement
sheet sheet
number
M_Output_RX 8 Extension M_Output_RX_Sp
_Splitter 0 litter of DRX 0

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

Table 38
PA power amplifier location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
number sheet sheet
PA, ePA or HePA 0 Base PA 0
PA, ePA or HePA 8 Extension 0 PA 0 Section 6.2.53
PA, ePA or HePA 9 Extension 0 PA 1 "Replacement of
a power amplifier
PA, ePA or HePA 10 Extension 0 PA 2
module (S8000
PA, ePA or HePA 11 Extension 0 PA 3 - Outdoor &
Indoor BTS and
S8003 Indoor
PA, ePA or HePA 13 Extension 0 PA 5 BTS)" (page
PA, ePA or HePA 14 Extension 0 PA 6 625)


411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Table 39
TX-filter location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
Test
Equipment type Cabinet Location she
number sheet
et
Tx-filter 9 Extension 0 Tx-filter of VSWR 1 Section 6.2.68
Tx-filter 10 Extension 0 Tx-filter of VSWR 2 "Replacement
of the thermo
Tx-filter 11 Extension 0 Tx-filter of VSWR 3 -
stats (S8000
Tx-filter 12 Extension 0 Tx-filter of VSWR 4 Outdoor BTS)"
Tx-filter 13 Extension 0 Tx-filter of VSWR 5 (page 696)


411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Table 40
VSWR-combiner location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
number sheet sheet
Combiner_VS 0 Base VSWR 0
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
Combiner_VS 6 Extension 0 VSWR 0
WR
Combiner_VS 7 Extension 0 VSWR 1 Section 6.2.62 "
WR Replacement of
Combiner_VS 8 Extension 0 VSWR 2 a RF-combiner
WR module (S8000
- Outdoor &
Combiner_VS 9 Extension 0 VSWR 3 Indoor BTS, and
WR S8003 Indoor
Combiner_VS 10 Extension 0 VSWR 4 BTS)" (page
WR 667)
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
2.3.6.2 Equipment of the S8000 Indoor BTS with the BCF
Table 41
ALCO board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
number sheet sheet
ALCO 0 Base ALCO Section 6.2.1
1 "Replacement of
ALCO Extension 0 ALCO -
the ALCO board"
ALCO 2 Extension 1 ALCO (page 335)
Table 42
BCF fan system location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
number sheet sheet
BCF fan system 0 BCF BCF fan 0 Section 6.2.18
"Replacement of
BCF fan system 1 BCF BCF fan 1
a BCF cabinet
BCF fan system 2 BCF BCF fan 2 -
fan (S8000
Indoor BTS)"
(page 415)
Table 43
BCF power supply location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
number sheet sheet
Converter_BCF 0 Base BCF power Section 6.2.19
supply 0 "Replacement
of a FANICO
Converter_BCF 1 Base BCF power
- board (S8000
supply 1
Indoor BTS with
Converter_BCF 2 Base BCF power BCF)" (page
supply 2 419)
Table 44
CSWM board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
number sheet sheet
CSWM 0 Base CSWM A Section 6.2.4
board - "Replacement of
a CSWM board"

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CSWM 1 Base CSWM B

(page 346)
board
Table 45
DSC board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
number sheet sheet
DSC 0 Base DSC 0
Section 6.2.5
DSC 1 Base DSC 1 "Replacement of
-
DSC 2 Base DSC 2 a DSC board"
(page 349)
DSC 3 Base DSC 3
Table 46
GTW board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
number sheet sheet
GTW 0 Base GTW 0 Section 6.2.6
"Replacement of
GTW 1 Base GTW 1 -
a GTW board"
(page 353)
Table 47
PCMI board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
number sheet sheet
PCMI 0 Base PCMI 0 Section 6.2.7
"Replacement of
PCMI 1 Base PCMI 1 -
a PCMI board"
PCMI 2 Base PCMI 2 (page 356)
Table 48
SYNC board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
number sheet sheet
SYNC 0 Base SYNC 0 Section 6.2.10
"Replacement of
SYNC 1 Base SYNC 1 -
a SYNC board"
(page 365)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
2.3.6.3 Equipment of the S8000 Indoor BTS with the CBCF
Table 49
CMCF board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
number sheet sheet
CMCF 0 Base CMCF 0 Section 6.2.2
1 "Replacement
CMCF Base CMCF 1
of a CMCF
board (S8000
- Outdoor BTS,
S8000 Indoor
BTS, and S8003
Indoor BTS)"
(page 338)
Table 50
CPCMI board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
number sheet sheet
CPCMI 0 Base CPCMI 0 Section 6.2.3
"Replacement
CPCMI 1 Base CPCMI 1
of a CPCMI
CPCMI 2 Base CPCMI 2 board (S8000
- Outdoor BTS,
S8000 Indoor
BTS, and S8003
Indoor BTS)"
(page 343)
Table 51
RECAL board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
number sheet sheet
RECAL 0 Base RECAL Section 6.2.9
"Replacement
RECAL 1 Extension 0 RECAL
of the RECAL
RECAL 2 Extension 1 RECAL board (S8000
- Outdoor BTS,
S8000 Indoor
BTS, and S8003
Indoor BTS)"
(page 362)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
2.4 Composition of the S8003 Indoor BTS

2.4.1 Introduction
The S8003 Indoor BTS contains only one cabinet.
2.4.2 Description of an S8003 Indoor base cabinet with the CBCF

The S8003 Indoor cabinet contains two compartments:

elements (see Figure 42 "S8003 Indoor BTS: view of the cabinet (H2D
coupling)" (page 131) and Figure 43 "S8003 Indoor BTS: location of the
modules" (page 132)):
• one Compact Base Common Functions (CBCF) contains the following
elements:
• one REmote and Control ALarm board (RECAL)

• three TRXs, composed of:
— three DRXs
— three Power Amplifiers (PAs)
• RF-combiner modules are six D RF-combiners, or two H2D

RF-combiners, or one Tx-filter associated with two D RF-combiners:
– one duplexer

– one duplexer

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
— one Tx-filter associated with two D RF-combiners. :

– two D RF-combiners, each composed of:
– one duplexer
– one Tx-filter, composed of:

– one Tx-filter

• up to two F-type converters
• six receive couplers (RX-splitters)
• one DC main panel:
— one main breaker 60 A
— 9 fuses
2.4.2.2 Description of the cooling compartment, at the bottom of

the main compartment
The internal cooling system is composed of four fans (bottom of the main
compartment).

• one ALPRO board (ALarm PROtection: protection for the RECAL board
external alarms)
• the 75 Ohms adaptation kit (optional)
2.4.3 Description of the S8003 Indoor BTS products

2.4.3.1 GSM frequency bands (GSM 900)
The Indoor S8003 BTS supports single band GSM 900, 1800, E-GSM 900,
and GSM-R 900 frequency bands.
ATTENTION
GSM-R specific
The BRC module is equipment specific to GSM-R applications. It allows the
Battery Remote Maintenance.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
The Indoor S8003 BTS is designed to extend the S8000 GSM family: the
S8003 is a high performance 3 DRX BTS designed for macro-cellular voice
and data applications, with site configurations ranging from 1 TRX to 3 TRXs
either in a tri-sectorial (S111), bi-sectorial (S11, S21) or omni-directional
(O1, O2, O3) site configuration.
Tx-filters are not available at GSM-R frequency.
The S8003 Indoor BTS is composed of one base cabinet with no extension
cabinet configuration available (at market introduction).
Omni-directional, Bi-sectorial and tri-sectorial configurations are supported
with two kinds of TX coupling:
• D/TxF
• H2D
The cabinet includes, the TX coupling version, the following modules:

• 1 CBCF module
• 1 RECAL module
• 1 type F power supply (2nd as an option)
Main configurations of the S8003 Indoor BTS are listed in the following
table and lists the number of modules that are necessary (depending on
the configuration).
RX
Coupli Antenna
Configuration DRX PA splitter TxF D H2D
ng port
1-4
O1 D/TxF 1 1 2 2 2
O2 D/TxF 2 2 2 2 2
D/TxF 3 3 2 1 2 3
O3
H2D 3 3 2 2 2
O3DDD D/TxF 3 3 2 3 3
S11 D/TxF 2 2 4 4 4
S21 D/TxF 3 3 3 4 4
S111 D/TxF 3 3 6 6 6
ATTENTION
Although most configurations are not completely equipped with DRX, at least one
DRX must be installed on site when the configuration is set up.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
2.4.4 Location
The equipment is given a number according to its position in the cabinet
and the type of element.
Figure 42
S8003 Indoor BTS: view of the cabinet (H2D coupling)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 43
S8003 Indoor BTS: location of the modules

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 44
S8003 Indoor BTS: modules numbering

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 45
S8003 Indoor BTS: O3 duplexer + Tx Filter

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 46
S8003 Indoor BTS: O3 duplexer

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
2.4.5 Cross-reference between the equipment and the maintenance

sheets for the S8003 Indoor BTS
Table 52
DRX location in the S8003 Indoor BTS
Replacem
Equipment Test
Equipment type Location ent
number sheet
sheet
DRX 0 DRX 0 Section
6.2.38 "Re
DRX 1 DRX 1
placement
DRX 2 DRX 2 of a DRX
module
(S8000
- Outdoor
BTS, S8000
Indoor BTS,
and S8003
Indoor
BTS)" (page
550)
Table 53
DRX diversity reception chain location in the S8003 Indoor BTS
Replacem
Equipment Test
Equipment type Location ent
number sheet
sheet
DRX_Diversity_Rece 0 Diversity reception Section
ption_Chain chain of DRX 0 6.2.38 "Re
placement
DRX_Diversity_Rece 1 Diversity reception
of a DRX
ption_Chain chain of DRX 1
module
DRX_Diversity_Rece 2 Diversity reception - (S8000
ption_Chain chain of DRX 2 Outdoor
BTS, S8000
Indoor BTS,
and S8003

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Indoor
BTS)" (page
550)
Table 54
DRX main reception chain location in the S8003 Indoor BTS
Location
DRX_Main 0 Main reception chain
_Reception of DRX 0
_Chain Section 6.2.38
"Replacement of a DRX
DRX_Main 1 Main reception chain
module (S8000 Outdoor
_Reception of DRX 1 -
BTS, S8000 Indoor
_Chain
BTS, and S8003 Indoor
DRX_Main 2 Main reception chain BTS)" (page 550)
_Reception of DRX 2
_Chain
Table 55
F-type converter location in the S8003 Indoor BTS
Location
Converter_F 0 F power supply 0 Section 6.2.45
"Replacement of an F-type
Converter_F 1 F power supply 1
converter (S8000 Outdoor
-
BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS
(page 585)
Table 56
LNA-combiner location in the S8003 Indoor BTS
Equipment type Location
number sheet sheet
Combiner_LN 0 LNA 0 Section 6.2.62 "
Combiner_LN 1 LNA 1 Replacement of a
RF-combiner module (S8000
Combiner_LN 2 LNA 2 -
Outdoor & Indoor
Combiner_LN 3 LNA 3 BTS, and S8003 Indoor
Combiner_LN 4 LNA 4 BTS)" (page 667)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Combiner_LN 5 LNA 5
Table 57
Output Rx-splitter D location in the S8003 Indoor BTS
Location
D_Output_R 0 D_Output_RX_Splitter
X_Splitter of DRX 0
X_Splitter of DRX 1
Section 6.2.63
D_Output_R 2 D_Output_RX_Splitter "Replacement of a
X_Splitter of DRX 2 Rx-splitter (S8000 Outdoor
-
D_Output_R 3 D_Output_RX_Splitter BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS,
X_Splitter of DRX 3 and S8003 Indoor BTS)"
(page 677)
X_Splitter of DRX 4
X_Splitter of DRX 5
Table 58
Output Rx-splitter M location in the S8003 Indoor BTS
Location
M_Output_R 0 M_Output_RX_Splitter
X_Splitter of DRX 0
Section 6.2.63
X_Splitter of DRX 1
"Replacement of a
M_Output_R 2 M_Output_RX_Splitter Rx-splitter (S8000 Outdoor
-
X_Splitter of DRX 2 BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS,
(page 677)
X_Splitter of DRX 3
X_Splitter of DRX 4

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
X_Splitter of DRX 5
Table 59
PA power amplifier location in the S8003 Indoor BTS
Equipment Equipment Test
Location Replacement sheet
type number sheet
PA 0 PA 0 Section 6.2.53 "Replacement
of a power amplifier module
PA 1 PA 1
- (S8000 Outdoor & Indoor
PA 2 PA 2 BTS and S8003 Indoor
BTS)" (page 625)
Table 60
CMCF board location in the S8003 Indoor BTS
Location
CMCF 0 CMCF 0 Section 6.2.2 "Replacement of a
CMCF board (S8000 Outdoor BTS,
CMCF 1 CMCF 1 -
S8000 Indoor BTS, and S8003
Table 61
CPCMI board location in the S8003 Indoor BTS
Location
CPCMI 0 CPCMI 0 Section 6.2.3 "Replacement
of a CPCMI board (S8000
CPCMI 1 CPCMI 1
- Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor
CPCMI 2 CPCMI 2 BTS, and S8003 Indoor
BTS)" (page 343)
Table 62
RECAL board location in the S8003 Indoor BTS
Test
Equipment Equipment
Location she Replacement sheet
type number
et
Section 6.2.9 "Replacement of
the RECAL board (S8000 Outdoor
RECAL 0 RECAL -
BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS, and
S8003 Indoor BTS)" (page 362)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
141
Chapter 3
Description of a start-up
3.1 Introduction
This chapter contains the procedure for starting up an S8000 / S8003 BTS. A
BTS start-up is carried out in two steps. Perform them in the following order:
• Power on the extension cabinets then the base cabinet (see Section
3.5 "S8000 Outdoor BTS power-on/power-off" (page 161) and Section
3.6 "S8000 Indoor BTS power-on/power-off" (page 167)). As a help, a
brief description of the S8000 BTS power supply is provided in Section
3.2 "S8000 Outdoor BTS power supply" (page 143) and Section 3.3
"S8000 Indoor BTS power supply" (page 155): for more information,
refer to NTP <63> .. S8003 Indoor BTS power supply is briefly described
in Section 3.4 "S8003 Indoor BTS power supply" (page 159).
• Monitor the start-up phases (see Section 3.8 "Start-up phases" (page
170)).
There are three types of DRX: DRX, eDRX, and DRX-ND3. In this
chapter, the term DRX includes all types unless the context indicates
otherwise.
3.1.1 Effect of GPS equipment on the BTS S8000 / S8003 start-up

Start-up
The start--up of a BTS8000 / S8003 that has GPS equipment installed is
as follows::
• The BTS power--up induces a power--up of the True Position GPS
receiver (TMU or LMU + EIU):
— During the start--up of thesemodules (which can take up to 30
minutes), their LEDs blink in yellow. Once the start--up is complete
(and the modules are available as a source of GPS synchronization),
these LEDs stop blinking and become green.
— Once GPS becomes available, radio traffic is lost while the BTS8000
/ S8003 synchronizes onto GPS.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
142 Chapter 3 Description of a start-up
• The BTS starts synchronized first on its internal clock and then on the
BSC using the Abis link.
— If GPS synchronization has been selected (during configuration),
theOMC--R requests the BTS8000 / S8003 to synchronize on GPS.
— If the GPS equipment is still in its own start--up phase, the BTS
remains synchronized on Abis until GPS becomes available.
Consequently, there can be delay of up to 30 minutes between the
activation of the GPS synchronization function on theOMC--Rand its
actual implementation by the network.
— Parameters entered to configure the network synchronization feature
are transferred from the OMC-R to the BTS in the field Site container
as shown in the following table:
Table 63
Network synchronization parameters
Parameter Byte Function
Reserved Byte 0 Not used
btsSMSynchroM Byte 1 Activation via this field with the following
ode possible values:
0 = normal (default)
1 = master
2 = slave
3 = gpsBurstSync
4 = gpsTimeSync
5 = masterGpsBurstSync
6 = masterGpsTimeSync
TN Offset Byte 2
FN Offset Byte 3 of FN Offset Byte 3 is the MSB
Byte 4 Byte 5 is the LSB
Byte 5 of FN Offset
Whatever the value of the field btsSMSynchroMode is, the TN offset

byte and FN offset byte are always transmitted by the OMC.
LED management
For S8000 / S8003 and CMCF Phase 2:
• If the PPS is OK and the serial link too: CLK0. The three CLK LEDs
(CLK0, CLK1 and CLK2) flash simultaneously 3 times for a period of 2
seconds with a 50 % duty rate and then the status changes.
• If theGPS has been lost (return to holdovermode):CLK0. The three
CLKLEDs (CLK0, CLK1 and CLK2) are on, the LCKD and the HLDVR
LEDs are off..

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Power-off
Anymaintenance that requires a BTS power--off, will lead to a loss ofGPS.
At BTS restart, the GPS equipment will perform a cold start--up.
External BTS8000 / S8003 synchronization on a master BTS

Start-up
The start--up of a BTS8000 / S8003 that uses external BTS synchronization
is as follows:
• If the master BTS is already available, the slave BTS8000 / S8003 starts
synchronized on the master.
• If the master BTS is not available, the slave BTS8000 / S8003 starts
synchronized on its internal clock and then on the Abis link.
— If the master BTS becomes available later, the slave BTS8000 /
S8003 then re--synchronizes onto the master BTS. Radio traffic is
lost during this re--synchronization.
Master BTS becomes unavailable

If a slave BTS8000 / S8003 is synchronized on a master BTS and the
master becomes unavailable, the slave BTS8000 / S8003 continues
operating using Abis synchronization.
3.2 S8000 Outdoor BTS power supply

3.2.1 Power supplies
3.2.1.1 F-type converters
Two F-type converters supply the +15 V and -15 V DC required by the
LNA-combiners and the VSWR-combiners.
3.2.1.2 BCF power supplies (if any)

The BCF power supplies supply the boards of the BCF unit.
3.2.2 Distribution of power supplies

3.2.2.1 Mains power supply
Figure 47 "Mains power supply of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (single-phase)"
(page 147) to Figure 49 "Mains power supply of the S8000 outdoor BTS
(tri-phase types 1, 2 and 3)" (page 149) show the equipments supplied
with the mains power supply.
3.2.2.2 -48 V power supply

Figure 54 "-48 V Power supply of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (BCF or CBCF)"
(page 154) shows the equipments supplied with -48 V.
3.2.3 Batteries (optional)

The batteries are used to keep the cabinet on after an AC failure.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Two types of batteries can be used: internal batteries and external batteries.
3.2.3.1 Internal batteries

The internal batteries are located in the top compartment of the cabinet.
The battery type is SBS 40 from HAWKER CHLORIDE (string of four

batteries 12 V DC, in series).
3.2.3.2 External batteries

The external batteries are located in an independent cabinet.
This battery cabinet can house two types of batteries: SBS 60 (50.8 Ah)
or SBS C11 (92 Ah) from HAWKER CHLORIDE (up to 4 strings in parallel,
each stack made of four 12 V DC batteries in series).
3.2.3.3 Discharge times of the batteries

The Table 64 "Discharge times of the batteries" (page 144) presents
the discharge times of the internal and external batteries for some
configurations.
Table 64
Discharge times of the batteries
Configu Internal External batteries
ration batteries
SBS 60 SBS C11
(SBS 40)
1 str 2 stri 3 stri 4 stri 1 str 2 stri 3 stri 4 stri
ing ngs ngs ngs ing ngs ngs ngs
O1 2 h 2 h 6h 9h 14 h 6h 14 h 20 h 24 h
45
S111 1 h 1 h 3h 5h 7h 2 h 7h 11 h 16 h
15 45 30
S222 30 min 45 1 h 2 h 3 h 1 h 3 h 6 h 8 h 30
min 45 45 30 45 45 15
S233 20 min 30 1 h 2h 2 h 1 h 2 h 4 h 6 h 45
min 15 30 15 45 30
The Table 67 "Charging times on the batteries" (page 146) presents the
charging times of the internal and external batteries for some configurations.
However, these charging times depend on the following conditions:
• the temperature must be ambient (20C-25 C or 68F-77F)
• the discharge depth must be respected (stopping voltage 42 V)
• the batteries must be practically new and correctly maintained in
accordance with the preventive maintenance procedure (see Section

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
5.4.3 "Test of the internal and external batteries (S8000 Outdoor BTS)"
(page 227))
• the initial capacity of batteries must be equal to 100%
• the remaining capacity of the batteries (before recharging) must be
more than 20%
• the outage duration (the time between discharge end and recharge
beginning) must be lower than one week
• there must not be any mains power supply cut when charging batteries
• the BTS must be in the optimal running conditions
The number of rectifiers in the cabinet must be:
Table 65
Rectifier number in function of the configuration (1/2)
Configuration S S11 S21 S22 S22 S32 S33
O1
PA/ePA 11 1 1 1 2 2 2
500W rectifiers 4 4 5 5 6
of the seven-re 2 3 3
ctifiers type
600W or 680W 4 4 5 5
rectifiers of the
2 2 3 3
six-rectifiers
type
680W rectifiers 3 4 4 4
2 2 3 3
of the GIPS
Table 66
Rectifier number in function of the configuration (1/2)
Configuration mixed PA/ePA S S11 S21 S22 S22
O1
/ HePA 11 1 1 1 2
500W rectifiers of the 4 5 6
2 3 4
seven-rectifiers type

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Configuration mixed PA/ePA S S11 S21 S22 S22

O1
/ HePA 11 1 1 1 2
600W or 680W rectifiers of the 4 5
2 3 3 4
six-rectifiers type
680W rectifiers of the GIPS 2 2 3 3 4 4
Table 67
Charging times on the batteries
Internal External batteries (SBS 60)

batteries 2 strin 3 strin 4 strin
(SBS 40) 1 string
gs gs gs
Time needed for 1 to 3 h 1,5 to 2 to 5 h 2,5 to 3 to 10 h
80% charging rate 4 h 7 h
Time needed for Until 36 Until 48 Until 60 Until 72
100% charging Until 24 h h h h h
rate
These charging times depend on the conditions quoted in Section 3.2.3.3

"Discharge times of the batteries" (page 144).
3.2.3.4 Batteries storage

Storage duration is dependent of the last recharge date.
• For new batteries, the duration is calculated from the original charge
date. This date is indicated on a label under the format dd/mm/yy.
• For batteries which were already recharged by Nortel, the new duration
is calculated from the last recharge cycle. The date of this last recharge
is manually noted on the label after each maintenance operation.
Table 68
Storage duration depending of storage temperature
Data only used for HAWKER SBS Battery
Battery Temperatur 20 C 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C
e during storage
Maximum Storage 20 mon 15 mon 10 mon 7 mon 5 mon
Time ths ths ths ths ths
ATTENTION
To avoid any inadequate storage or transportation and to guarantee battery
long-term performance, only one recharge cycle is allowed in the warehouse.
Also the discharge depth must not be lower than 12.6V before the battery is
recharged, otherwise the battery may have defects and then the maintenance
procedure is applicable.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 47
Mains power supply of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (single-phase)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 48
Mains power supply of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (split single-phase)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 49
Mains power supply of the S8000 outdoor BTS (tri-phase types 1, 2 and 3)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 50
Mains power supply of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (tri-phase type 4 or 5)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 51
Mains power supply of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with AC box/GIPS (Single-phase)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 52
Mains power supply of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with AC box/GIPS (Split-phase)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 53
Mains power supply of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with AC box/GIPS (Tri-phase)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 54
-48 V Power supply of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (BCF or CBCF)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 55
-48V power supply of the S8000 outdoor BTS with GIPS
3.3 S8000 Indoor BTS power supply


411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
3.3.1.2 BCF power supplies

The BCF power supplies supply the boards of the BCF cabinet.

Figure 59 "Wiring of the S8003 Indoor BTS -48V power supply" (page 160)
shows the equipments supplied with the -48 V power supply.
Figure 58 "Wiring of the S8000 Indoor BTS -48 V power supply" (page 159)
shows the wiring diagram of the -48 V power supply.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 56
-48 V Power supply of the S8000 Indoor BTS (BCF or CBCF)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 57
View of the -48 V power supply of the S8000 Indoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 58
Wiring of the S8000 Indoor BTS -48 V power supply
3.4 S8003 Indoor BTS power supply

3.4.1.1 DC Main Breaker
The CB01 breaker supplies power for the whole BTS.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.


Figure 61 "Start-up phases of an S8000 BTS using LEDs of the BCF" (page
174) shows the wiring diagram of the -48 V power supply.
Figure 59
Wiring of the S8003 Indoor BTS -48V power supply

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
3.5 S8000 Outdoor BTS power-on/power-off

3.5.1 Power-on
3.5.1.1 (Split) Single-phase mains power supply (S8000 outdoor
BTS with AC mains box)
The procedure below describes the power-on of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
when it is completely powered off.
The extension cabinet, if any, must be powered on before the base cabinet.
The order in which the power supplies of a cabinet are put into service
is as follows:
Step Action
1 Put the main breaker in the "I" position.
2 Put the climatic system circuit breaker in the "I" position.

3 Put the rectifier circuit breaker in the "I" position.
4 Put the switch of each rectifier in the "I" position.

5 Put the battery circuit breaker in the "I" position.
6 Put the FAN circuit breaker of the PCU in the "I" position.
7 Put the PA circuit breaker of the PCU in the "I" position.
8 Put the switch of each F-type converter in the "I" position.
9 Put the switch of each PA in the "I" position or connect the power
cables of the PAs to the PA-ICO.
10 Put the DRX circuit breaker of the PCU in the "I" position.
11 Put the BCF circuit breaker of the PCU in the "I" position.
12 If the cabinet contains the BCF, perform the two following actions.
a. Put the switch of each BCF power supply in the "I" position.
b. Put the switch of the PSCMD board of the BCF in the "I" position.
—End—
Check the BTS starts correctly by monitoring the state of its LEDs (see
Section 3.8 "Start-up phases" (page 170)).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
3.5.1.2 Tri-phase mains power supply (S8000 outdoor BTS with

AC mains box)
is as follows:
Step Action
1 Put the climatic system circuit breaker(s) in the "I" position.
2 Put the rectifier circuit breaker(s) in the "I" position.

3 Put the switch of each rectifier in the "I" position.
4 Put the battery circuit breaker in the "I" position.
5 Put the FAN circuit breaker of the PCU in the "I" position.
6 Put the PA circuit breaker of the PCU in the "I" position.

9 Put the DRX circuit breaker of the PCU in the "I" position.
10 Put the BCF circuit breaker of the PCU in the "I" position.
—End—
Check for the BTS starting correctly by monitoring the state of its LEDs (see
3.5.1.3 S8000 outdoor BTS with GIPS

is as follows:

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Step Action
1 Preliminary operations check:

• The circuit breakers of the ADU are in the "OFF" position.
• The switches of the rectifiers are in the "O" position.
• The batteries, PA, DRX, DACS, BCF circuit breakers of the DCU
are in the "OFF" position.
• The switches of the PAs are in the "I" position or the power
cables of the PAs are disconnected from the PA-ICO.
• The switches of the F-converters are in the "O" position.
2 At the operator AC power supply, put the circuit breaker of the

cabinet in the "ON" position.
3 Put the DACS circuit breaker of the ADU of the GIPS in the "ON"
position.
4 The fans start up.
5 Open the cabinet and check the three LEDs of the DACS are ON.
6 The rectifier circuit breakers of the ADU are in the "ON" position.
7 The switch of each rectifier is in the "I" position.

8 The green LED on the front face of each rectifier is ON.
9 The four green LEDs on the DCU front face are ON.
10 If battery back-up is used, put the batteries circuit breaker of the
DCU in the "ON" position.
11 if a battery cabinet is used, put the DC circuit breaker of the battery

cabinet in the "ON" position.
12 Put the DACS circuit breaker of the DCU in the "ON" position.
13 Put the PA circuit breaker of the DCU in the "ON" position.

16 Put the DRX circuit breaker of the DCU in the "ON" position.
17 Put the BCF circuit breaker of the DCU in the "ON" position.
18 If the cabinet contains the BCF, perform the following actions:

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
—End—
Check the BTS starting correctly by monitoring the state of its LEDs (see
3.5.2 Power-off
3.5.2.1 (Split) Single-phase mains power supply (S8000 outdoor
BTS with AC mains box)
The extension cabinet, if any, must be powered off before the base cabinet.
Step Action
a. Put the switch of the PSCMD board of the BCF in the "O"
position.
b. Put the switch of each BCF power supply in the "O" position.
2 Put the switch of each PA in the "O" position or disconnect the power
cables of the PAs from the PA-ICO.
3 Put the switch of each F-type converter in the "O" position.

4 Put the four circuit breakers of the PCU in the "O" position in the
following order:
a. the PA circuit breaker
b. the FAN circuit breaker
c. the DRX circuit breaker
d. the BCF circuit breaker
5 Put the battery circuit breaker in the "OFF" position.

6 Put the switch of each rectifier in the "O" position.
7 Put the rectifier circuit breaker in the "OFF" position.

8 Put the climatic system circuit breaker in the "OFF" position.
9 Put the main breaker in the "OFF" position.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
3.5.2.2 Tri-phase mains power supply (S8000 outdoor BTS with

AC mains box)
Step Action
position.
following order:
5 Put the battery circuit breaker in the "O" position.
6 Put the switch of each rectifier in the "O" position.
7 Put the rectifier circuit breaker(s) in the "O" position.
8 Put the climatic system circuit breaker in the "O" position.
—End—
Table 69
Fuse description of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Rated Rated
Location Identification current voltage Type
(A) V AC
PA INTERCO F0-F9 10 A 250 V time delay
PA 10 A 250 V time delay
BCF/CBCF
F01 4 A 250 V time delay
(Input/Output)
USER F02 10 A 250 V time delay

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Rated Rated
(A) V AC
ALCO or RECAL F03 1 A 250 V time delay
BCF power supply F4A 4 A 250 V time delay
DRX INTERCO F0-F7 2 A 250 V fast blow
3.5.2.3 S8000 outdoor BTS with GIPS

Step Action
position.
2 Put the BCF circuit breaker of the DCU in the "OFF" position.
3 Put the DRX circuit breaker of the DCU in the "OFF" position.
5 Put the switch of each F-converter in the "O" position.
6 Put the PA circuit breaker of the DCU in the "OFF" position.

7 Put the DACS circuit breaker of the DCU in the "OFF" position.
8 If a battery cabinet is used, put the DC circuit breaker of the battery

cabinet in the "OFF" position.
9 If battery back-up is used, put the batteries circuit breaker of the
DCU in the "OFF" position.
10 Put the switch of each rectifier on the "O" position.

11 The green LED on each rectifier front face is OFF.
12 The four green LEDs on the DCU front face are OFF.
13 Put the rectifier circuit breakers of the ADU in the "OFF" position.
14 Put the DACS circuit breaker of the ACU box in the "OFF" position.
15 At the operator AC power supply, put the circuit breaker of the

cabinet in the "OFF" position.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
—End—
3.6 S8000 Indoor BTS power-on/power-off

3.6.1 Power-on
The procedure below describes the power-on of the S8000 Indoor BTS
The extension cabinet must be powered on before the base cabinet. Then
turn on the BCF cabinet if any.
The order in which the power supplies of the base or extension cabinet are
put into service is as follows:
Step Action
1 Put the FAN circuit breaker in the "I" position.

2 Put the PA circuit breaker in the "I" position.

5 Put the DRX circuit breaker in the "I" position.

6 Put the ALCO/BCF or RECAL/BCF circuit breaker in the "I" position.
—End—
3.6.2 Power-off
Turn on imperatively in the following order: the BCF cabinet, if any, then the
base cabinet and the extension cabinet.
Step Action

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
position.
2 Put the switch of each PA in the "O" position or connect the power
following order:
—End—
Table 70
Fuse description of the S8000 Indoor BTS
Rated Rated
(A) V AC
PA INTERCO F0-F9 10 A 250 V time delay
PAs 10 A 250 V time delay
BCF or CBCF
F01 4 A 250 V time delay
(Input/Output)
BCF power supply F4A 4 A 250 V time delay
DRX INTERCO F0-F7 2 A 250 V fast blow
Fan 800 mA 250 V fast blow
BCF fan 800 mA 250 V fast blow
3.7 S8003 Indoor BTS power-on/power-off

3.7.1 Power-on
The following procedure describes the power-on of the S8003 Indoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
The order in which the power supplies of the cabinet are put into service
is as follows:
Step Action
1 Put the CB01 circuit breaker in the "I" position.
3 Put the switch of each PA in the "I" position.
—End—
DANGER
Electric shock
Ensure that the unused power cable for the Type F power supply
module is capped and secured before powering up the S8003
BTS and/or performing any maintenance procedure (refer to
Figure 63 "S8003 Indoor BTS: Type F power supply cables safety
measures" (page 200)).
3.7.2 Power-off
Turn off in the following order:
Step Action
1 Put the switch of each PA in the "O" position.

3 Put the CB01 main circuit breaker in the "O" position.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Table 71
Fuse description of the S8003 Indoor BTS
Rated Rated
(A) V AC
DRX ICO F1 4 A 250 V slow blow
FPSU F2-F3 10 A 250 V slow blow
CBCF F4 2.5 A 250 V slow blow
FAN F5 1 A 250 V slow blow
RECAL F6 1 A 250 V slow blow
PA F7-F9 10 A 250 V slow blow
3.8 Start-up phases

The S8000/S8003 BTS start-up falls into a number of phases, which are
summarized in the following flowcharts (see Figure 60 "Start-up phases of
an S8000 / S8003 BTS" (page 171)). The LEDs on the front panels of the
BTS boards allow to follow this start-up (see Figure 61 "Start-up phases of
an S8000 BTS using LEDs of the BCF" (page 174) and Figure 62 "Start-up
phases of an S8000 / S8003 BTS using LEDs of the CBCF" (page 176)).
When the state of a btsSiteManager object goes to "unlocked", the BTS
can send spontaneous messages to the controlling BSC (spontaneous
messages indicating the absence of certain equipment).
When a site starts up, the BTS does not know the hardware configuration
necessary for the site definition chosen by the operator. BTS alarms are
active by elements:
• making up the maximum configuration of a site
• absent from the configuration when the site starts up
This choice requires at the OMC-R:

• the operator displays the hardware configuration of the site after its
start-up
• the operator verifies between the hardware configuration and the chosen
configuration
To do this, perform a "Display" or "Display all" command on the

btsSiteManager object checking the "btsDescription" parameter is in the
proper range.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 60
Start-up phases of an S8000 / S8003 BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 61
Start-up phases of an S8000 BTS using LEDs of the BCF

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 62
Start-up phases of an S8000 / S8003 BTS using LEDs of the CBCF

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
ICM specific LEDs behavior

The following table gives detailed information on ICM specific LEDs
behavior. All these LEDs are OFF when the ICM is un--powered. All these
LEDs are amber during BISTs.
Table 72
ICM specific LEDs behavior
LED name Color Meaning
G (GPS) One GPS or external synchro status LED:
-- OFF: no external synchronizatione
-- Green: GPS synchronization or holdover mod
-- Red: bad external synchronization signal
-- Amber: slave BTS is synchronized on its master BTS
SYN (synch Four LEDs for synchronizing source: one out of the 8 PCMs or
ro) external synchronization (in that case the 4 LEDs are ON) -- see Table
73 "ICM SYN LEDs behavior" (page 177)--
H( holdover One LED for synchro locked status:
) -- ON on active ICM: un--locked or holdover indication
-- ON on passive ICM: un--locked indication
-- OFF: synchro is locked on external source (GPS or master BTS),
or Abis
ICM SYN LEDs behavior

The behavior of the four LEDs for synchronization source is described in
following table.
Table 73
ICM SYN LEDs behavior
SYNCHRO 0 1 2 3
SOURCE
External source
(GPS, master BTS)
(*)
(*) (*) (*) (*)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
SYNCHRO 0 1 2 3
SOURCE
Holdover (**)
switched off (**) switched off (**) switched off (**) switched off (**)
(*) If GPS or external synchronization signals are newly detected, the four SYN LEDs blink 3
times (1 second on, 1 second off).
(**) In Holdover, the SYN LED indicates the clock source (PCM number) that the syn tries to use for
synchronization. In that case, the holdover LED (H) is ON on the active ICM.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
179
Chapter 4
Faults without alarms at the OMC-R
4.1 Introduction
The purpose of this chapter is to detect and locate the modules that do not
send alarms to the OMC-R.
S8003 Indoor BTS is identified on the OMC-R as an S8000 Indoor BTS
4.2 Fault location

This paragraph lists the cases leading to a loss of site.
An alarm of a site state change has been displayed on the OMC-R.
4.2.1 BTS state

On the site, the mains power supply is not present.
The following elements are concerned:
• high temperature and low temperature thermostats
• main circuit breaker in the case of a single-phase or split single-phase
mains power supply
• rectifier breaker
• power supply rack
4.2.2 On-site checking procedures

Procedure
Step Action
1 Check the type of the AC box.

• For a single-phase or split single-phase AC box type 1, go to
step 2.
• Otherwise, go to step 3.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
180 Chapter 4 Faults without alarms at the OMC-R
2 Check the AC box indicator light.

• If the indicator light is on, go to step 3.
• f the indicator light is off, replace the main circuit breaker (Field
Replaceable Unit). Refer to Section 6.2.11 "Replacement of an
AC box circuit breaker (S8000 Outdoor BTS)" (page 368). Then
go to step 3.
3 Check the green LEDs on the power supply rack rectifiers.

• If all the LEDs are on, go to step 4.
• If the indicator light is off, perform the following actions.
— For the GIPS, replace the ADU module. Refer to Section
6.2.58 " Replacement of the GIPS (S8000 Outdoor BTS)"
(page 654) then go to step 4.
— Otherwise, replace the main circuit breaker (Field
Replaceable Unit). Refer to Section 6.2.11 "Replacement
of an AC box circuit breaker (S8000 Outdoor BTS)" (page
368). Then go to step 3.
4 Check the LEDs on the PCU / DCU.

• If all the LEDs are on, go to step 5.
• If all the LEDs are off:
DANGER
Electric shock
The BTS remains supplied with the mains power
supply, so take care while handling the equipment.
— Undo the six screws on the front panel with the battery
breaker, above the power supply rack.
— Remove the battery breaker front panel.
— For the GIPS, disconnect the sub-D alarm connector (refer
to the Section 6.2.58 " Replacement of the GIPS (S8000
Outdoor BTS)" (page 654))
Otherwise, disconnect the two sub-D connectors (refer
to the replacement procedure of the power supply rack:
Section 6.2.55 "Replacement of the power supply rack of
the six-rectifier type (S8000 Outdoor BTS)" (page 638) or

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
4.2 Fault location 181
Section 6.2.54 "Replacement of the power supply rack of

the seven-rectifier type (S8000 Outdoor BTS)" (page 632)).
– If the BTS remains turned off, replace the power supply
rack (Field Replaceable Unit - Refer to Section 6.2.55
"Replacement of the power supply rack of the six-rectifier
type (S8000 Outdoor BTS)" (page 638) or Section
6.2.54 "Replacement of the power supply rack of the
seven-rectifier type (S8000 Outdoor BTS)" (page 632))
or the GIPS.
– If the BTS is turned on, the thermostats are faulty.
Replace the thermostats (Field Replaceable Unit). Refer
to Section 6.2.68 "Replacement of the thermostats
(S8000 Outdoor BTS)" (page 696).
Then go to step 5.
5 Check the power supply.

a. For the GIPS, put the PA, DRX, BCF, DACS circuit breakers in
the "ON" position.
Otherwise, put the L1/CB1, L2/CB2, L3/CB3 and L4/CB4 circuit
breakers in the "I" position.
b. In the case of a new break, replace the power supply rack (Field
Replaceable Unit - Refer to Section 6.2.55 "Replacement of
the power supply rack of the six-rectifier type (S8000 Outdoor
BTS)" (page 638) or Section 6.2.54 "Replacement of the power
supply rack of the seven-rectifier type (S8000 Outdoor BTS)"
(page 632)) or the GIPS. Then go to step 6.
6 Additional operations
Make sure that the possible faults have been cleared.
—End—
4.2.3 On-site checking procedures for S8003 BTS

Procedure
Step Action
1 Check that CB01 main breaker is in the "I" position.
2 Additional operation
Make sure that the possibly faults have been cleared.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
182 Chapter 4 Faults without alarms at the OMC-R
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
183
Chapter 5
Preventive maintenance procedures
5.1 Introduction
5.1.1 Presentation
This chapter contains the preventive maintenance procedures applicable to
the S8000 BTS and to the S8003 BTS.
There are two types of procedures:
• test procedures, given in this chapter (the structure of a test procedure
is described in Section 5.1.5 "Description of a preventive maintenance
procedure sheet" (page 197))
• replacement procedures, given in Chapter 6 "Replacement procedures"
(page 313)
These procedures must be performed following the schedule given below

(twice a year, once a year, or every two years, etc., see Table 75 "Tests
performed once a year" (page 184) to Replacement performed every fifteen
years). Table 83 "Summary of the preventive maintenance schedule of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 192), Table 84 "Summary of the preventive
maintenance schedule of the S8003 Indoor BTS" (page 195), and Table 85
"Summary of the preventive maintenance schedule of the S8003 Indoor
BTS" (page 196) present a summary of the preventive maintenance
schedule.
If proper preventive maintenance is not performed on the DACS and

LNDACS, the units may malfunction which in turn can result in a loss of
service during temperature extremes.
This activity yields the best results if performed prior to the onset of cold
weather. If any of the findings of this preventive maintenance procedure
require the replacement of any part or assembly, please refer to the
corresponding NTP document for that action.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
184 Chapter 5 Preventive maintenance procedures
It is possible to group some procedures, which reduces the intervention

time. The provided intervention time corresponds to the intervention time for
only one item of equipment.
CAUTION
BTS outage is possible
Maintenance operations may take longer than the battery’s
capacity, so BTS outage is possible. Advise the OMC-R supervisor
that alarms may occur.
5.1.2 Test schedule

The following tables list the items of equipment according to their test
schedule.
Table 74
Test performed twice a year
Impact of
On-site
S800x the test
Equipment intervention Test sheet
BTS on the
time
service
Test of the S8003 5 minutes none Section 5.4.12 "Test of the fans
fans Indoor (S8003 Indoor BTS)" (page 290)
Table 75
Tests performed once a year
On-site Impact of the
S800x
Equipment intervention test on Test sheet
BTS
time the service
AC lightning S8000 30 minutes loss of service if Section 5.4.1 "Test of
protector Outdo there are not the AC lightning protector
Note: Perform or any batteries (S8000 Outdoor BTS)"
the test of the (page 202)
internal batteries
first.
Standard DACS S8000 30 minutes loss of service Section 5.4.13 "DACS
or Low Noise Outdo preventive maintenance"
DACS or (page 293)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

S800x
BTS
time the service
Door gasket S8000 10 minutes for none Section 5.4.4 "Test of the
Note: The Indoor each gasket door gasket (S8000 Indoor
schedule is BTS and S8003 Indoor
reduced by BTS)" (page 244)
half in a severe
S8003 10 minutes for none Section 5.4.4 "Test of the
environment.
Indoor each gasket door gasket (S8000 Indoor
BTS and S8003 Indoor
BTS)" (page 244)
Door gasket or S8000 5 minutes for none Section 5.4.5 "Test of
hood gasket Outdo each gasket the door gasket or hood
or gasket (S8000 Outdoor
BTS)" (page 249)
External alarm S8000 10 minutes for none Section 5.4.6 "Test of
primary lightning Outdo each lightning the external alarm primary
protectors or protector lightning protector (S8000
Outdoor BTS)" (page 257)
External alarm S8000 5 minutes for none Section 5.4.7 "Test of the
secondary Outdo each lightning external alarm secondary
lightning or protector lightning protector (S8000
protectors Outdoor BTS)" (page 263)
External S8000 one hour per loss of service if Section 5.4.3 "Test of
batteries Outdo string loss of the the internal and external
or mains power batteries (S8000 Outdoor
supply BTS)" (page 227)
Ground fault S8000 5 minutes none Section 5.4.8 "Test of
interrupter Outdo the ground fault interrupter
or (S8000 Outdoor BTS)"
(page 266)
Internal batteries S8000 45 minutes loss of service if Section 5.4.3 "Test of
Note: Perform Outdo loss of the the internal and external
the test of the or mains power batteries (S8000 Outdoor
internal batteries supply BTS)" (page 227)
before the test of
the AC lightning
protector.
Lightning S8000 20 minutes none Section 5.4.9 "Test of the
protectors of the Outdo lightning protectors of the
48 V box or 48 V box (S8000 Outdoor
BTS)" (page 273)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

S800x
BTS
time the service
PCM lightning S8000 10 minutes for none Section 5.4.10 "Test of the
protectors Outdo each lightning PCM lightning protectors
or protector (S8000 Outdoor BTS)"
(page 278)
Secondary S8000 15 minutes for none Section 5.4.11 "Test of the
lightning Indoor each board external alarm secondary
protector lightning protectors (S8000
Note: The Indoor BTS and S8003
schedule is Indoor BTS)" (page 283)
reduced by
S8003 15 minutes none Section 5.4.11 "Test of the
half in a severe
Indoor external alarm secondary
environment.
lightning protectors (S8000
Indoor BTS and S8003
5.1.3 Replacement schedule

The following tables list the items of equipment according to their
replacement schedule.
Table 76
Replacement performed twice a year
Replacement
Equipment S800x BTS intervention replacement on the
sheet
time service
ACU filter S8000 5 minutes none Section 6.2.15
Outdoor "Replacement
and cleaning of
the ACU filter
(S8000 Outdoor
BTS)" (page
404)
Air filter S8003 15 minutes none Section 6.2.73
Note: The Indoor "Replacement
schedule is of the air filter
reduced by (S8003 Indoor
half in a severe BTS)" (page
environment. 721)
Table 77
Replacements performed once a year

replacement on Replacement
Equipment S8000 BTS intervention
the sheet
time

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
service
Standard DACS Outdoor 5 minutes none Section 6.2.26
or Low Noise "Replacement of
DACS filter the DACS filter
Note: The (S8000 Outdoor
replacement of BTS)" (page 478)
the Standard
or Low Noise
DACS filter must
be performed
at least once a
year and varies
according to the
environment
of the BTS: to
obtain a more
accurate and
appropriate
schedule, see
Section 8.1.3
"Troubleshootin
g" (page 771).
Fan filter Indoor 15 minutes none Section 6.2.44
Note: The "Replacement of
schedule is the fan filter (S8000
reduced by Indoor BTS)" (page
half in a severe 582)
environment.
Table 78
Replacements performed every four years
Impact of the
On-site
replacement
Equipment S800x BTS intervention Replacement sheet
on the
time
service
Door gasket S8000 2 hours for full none Section 6.2.35
Indoor configuration "Replacement of the
door gasket (S8000
Indoor BTS and
S8003 Indoor BTS)"
(page 530)
S8003 2 hours for full none Section 6.2.35
Indoor configuration "Replacement of the
door gasket (S8000
Indoor BTS and
S8003 Indoor BTS)"
(page 530)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Impact of the
On-site
replacement
Equipment S800x BTS intervention Replacement sheet
on the
time
service
Door or hood S8000 2 hours none Section 6.2.36
gasket Outdoor "Repair or
replacement of
the door gaskets
(S8000 Outdoor
BTS)" (page 537)
Section 6.2.47
"Repair or
replacement of
the hood gasket
(S8000 Outdoor
BTS)" (page 598)
External S8000 30 minutes per loss of service if Section 6.2.41
batteries Outdoor string loss of the mains "Replacement of the
power supply external batteries
(battery cabinet)"
(page 563)
Internal batteries S8000 20 minutes for loss of service if Section 6.2.48
Outdoor each battery loss of the mains "Replacement of the
power supply internal batteries
(S8000 Outdoor
BTS)" (page 604)
Table 79
Replacements performed every five years
Impact of the
On-site
Equipment S800x BTS intervention
the sheet
time
service
ACU S8000 2 hours none Section 6.2.14
Outdoor "Replacement of an
ACU climatic unit
(S8000 Outdoor
BTS)" (page 393)
ACU gasket S8000 included in ACU loss of service Section 6.2.16
Outdoor replacement "Replacement of
the ACU or DACS
gasket (S8000
Outdoor BTS)"
(page 407)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Impact of the
On-site
the sheet
time
service
Ground fault S8000 45 minutes loss of service if Section 6.2.46
interrupter Outdoor there are not "Replacement
any batteries of a ground fault
interrupter (S8000
Outdoor BTS with
AC mains box)"
(page 589)
Fans S8003 30 minutes none Section 6.2.74
Indoor "Replacement of a
fan (S8003 Indoor
BTS)" (page 724)
Table 80
Replacement performed every six years
Impact of the
On-site
Equipment S8000 BTS intervention
the sheet
time
service
Standard or Low Outdoor 1 hour loss of service Section 6.2.20
Noise DACS "Replacement of
the DACS climatic
system (S8000
Outdoor BTS)"
(page 426)
Standard or Low S8000 30 minutes for loss of service Section 6.2.16
Noise DACS Outdoor each gasket "Replacement of
gasket the ACU or DACS
gasket (S8000
Outdoor BTS)"
(page 407)
Table 81
Replacements performed every ten years

the sheet
time

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
service
AC lightning S8000 45 minutes loss of service Section 6.2.67
protector Outdoor if there are not any "Replacement of
batteries the single-phase
AC lightning
protector (S8000
Outdoor BTS with
AC main box)"
(page 687)
Section 6.2.69
"Replacement of
the tri-phase AC
lightning protector
(S8000 Outdoor
BTS with AC main
box)" (page 700)
External alarm S8000 2h30 (full none Section 6.2.39
primary lightning Outdoor configuration) "Replacement of
protector an external alarm
primary lightning
protector (S8000
Outdoor BTS)"
(page 556)
External alarm S8000 15 minutes (full none Section 6.2.40
secondary Outdoor configuration) "Replacement
lightning of the external
protector alarm secondary
lightning protector
(S8000 Outdoor
BTS)" (page 560)
Lightning S8000 30 minutes none Section 6.2.50
protector of the Outdoor "Replacement
48 V box of the lightning
protectors of the
48 V box (S8000
Outdoor BTS)"
(page 613)
PCM lightning S8000 20 minutes none Section 6.2.51
protector Outdoor "Replacement of
a PCM lightning
protector (S8000
Outdoor BTS)"
(page 616)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Impact of the
On-site
the sheet
time
service
External alarm S8000 30 minutes none Section 6.2.64
secondary Indoor "Replacement
lightning of the external
protector alarm secondary
Note: The lightning protector
schedule is (S8000 Outdoor
reduced by BTS)" (page 682)
half in a severe none
S8003 30 minutes Section 6.2.64
environment.
Indoor "Replacement
of the external
alarm secondary
lightning protector
(S8000 Outdoor
BTS)" (page 682)
Thermostats S8000 4 hours none Section 6.2.68
Outdoor "Replacement of
the thermostats
(S8000 Outdoor
BTS)" (page 696)
Table 82
Replacement performed every fifteen years
Equipment S8000x BTS On-site Impact of Replacement sheet
intervention replacement
time on service
75 kit S8000 15 minutes none Section 6.2.72
Outdoor "Replacement of the 75
Ohms kit (S8000 BTS
Outdoor)" (page 717)
S8000 Section 6.2.71
Indoor "Replacement of the 75
Ohms kit (S8000 Indoor
BTS)" (page 713)
S8003 Section 6.2.71
Indoor "Replacement of the 75
Ohms kit (S8000 Indoor
BTS)" (page 713)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
5.1.4 Summary of the preventive maintenance schedule

The following tables summarize the preventive maintenance schedule of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS, the S8000 Indoor BTS, and the S8003 Indoor BTS.
5.1.4.1 S8000 Outdoor BTS schedule
Table 83
Summary of the preventive maintenance schedule of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Mandatory
Required test Replacement
Equipment replacement Test sheet
schedule sheet
schedule
AC lightning protector once a year every 10 Section Section 6.2.67
years 5.4.1 "Test "Replacement of
of the AC the single-phase
lightning AC lightning
protector protector (S8000
(S8000 Outdoor BTS
Outdoor with AC main
BTS)" (page box)" (page 687),
202) Section 6.2.69
"Replacement of
the tri-phase AC
lightning protector
(S8000 Outdoor
BTS with AC main
box)" (page 700)
ACU - every 5 - Section 6.2.14
years "Replacement of
an ACU climatic
unit (S8000
Outdoor BTS)"
(page 393)
ACU filter - twice a year - Section 6.2.15
"Replacement and
cleaning of the
ACU filter (S8000
Outdoor BTS)"
(page 404)
ACU gasket - every 5 - Section 6.2.16
the ACU or DACS
gasket (S8000
Outdoor BTS)"
(page 407)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Mandatory
schedule sheet
schedule
Standard or Low once a year every 6 Section 5.4 Section 6.2.20
Noise DACS years .13 "DACS "Replacement of
preventive the DACS climatic
maintenance system (S8000
" (page 293) Outdoor BTS)"
(page 426)
Standard or Low - once a year - Section 6.2.26
Noise DACS filter "Replacement of
the DACS filter
(S8000 Outdoor
BTS)" (page 478)
Standard or Low - every 6 - Section 6.2.16
Noise DACS gasket years "Replacement of
the ACU or DACS
gasket (S8000
Outdoor BTS)"
(page 407)
Door gasket or hood once a year every 4 Section Section 6.2.36
gasket years 5.4.5 "Test "Repair or
of the door replacement of
gasket or the door gaskets
hood gasket (S8000 Outdoor
(S8000 BTS)" (page
Outdoor 537),Section
BTS)" (page 6.2.47 "Repair
249) or replacement of
the hood gasket
(S8000 Outdoor
BTS)" (page 598)
External batteries once a year every 4 Section Section 6.2.41
years 5.4.3 "Test "Replacement
of the internal of the external
and external batteries (battery
batteries cabinet)" (page
(S8000 563)
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
227)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Mandatory
schedule sheet
schedule
External alarm once a year every 10 Section Section 6.2.39
primary lightning years 5.4.6 "Test "Replacement of
protector of the exte an external alarm
rnal alarm primary lightning
primary protector (S8000
lightning Outdoor BTS)"
protector (page 556)
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
257)
External alarm once a year every 10 Section Section 6.2.40
secondary lightning years 5.4.7 "Test "Replacement
protector of the exte of the external
rnal alarm alarm secondary
secondary lightning protector
lightning (S8000 Outdoor
protector BTS)" (page 560)
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
263)
Ground fault once a year every 5 Section Section 6.2.46
interrupter years 5.4.8 "Test "Replacement of
of the ground a ground fault
fault interrup interrupter (S8000
ter (S8000 Outdoor BTS with
Outdoor AC mains box)"
BTS)" (page (page 589)
266)
Internal batteries once a year every 4 Section Section 6.2.48
years 5.4.3 "Test "Replacement
of the internal of the internal
and external batteries (S8000
batteries Outdoor BTS)"
(S8000 (page 604)
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
227)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Mandatory
schedule sheet
schedule
Lightning protector of once a year every 10 Section 5.4 Section 6.2.50
the 48 V box years .9 "Test of "Replacement
the lightning of the lightning
protectors protectors of the
of the 48 V 48 V box (S8000
box (S8000 Outdoor BTS)"
Outdoor (page 613)
BTS)" (page
273)
PCM lightning once a year every 10 Section Section 6.2.51
protector years 5.4.10 "Test "Replacement of
of the PCM a PCM lightning
lightning protector (S8000
protectors Outdoor BTS)"
(S8000 (page 616)
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
278)
Thermostats - every 10 - Section 6.2.68
the thermostats
(S8000 Outdoor
BTS)" (page 696)
75 kit - every 15 - Section 6.2.71
the 75 Ohms kit
(S8000 Indoor BTS
and S8003 Indoor
BTS)" (page 713)
5.1.4.2 S8000 Indoor BTS schedule
Table 84
Summary of the preventive maintenance schedule of the S8003 Indoor BTS
Mandatory
schedule sheet
schedule
Door gasket once a year every 4 years Section 5.4.4 Section 6.2.35
Note: The "Test of the "Replacement of
schedule is door gasket the door gasket
reduced by (S8000 Indoor (S8000 Indoor

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Mandatory
schedule sheet
schedule
half in a severe
BTS and BTS and S8003
environment. S8003 Indoor Indoor BTS)"
244)
Fan filter - once a year - Section 6.2.44
Note: The "Replacement
schedule is of the fan filter
environment. 582)
Secondary alarm once a year every 10 years Section 5.4.1 Section 6.2.64
lightning protector Note: The Note: The 1 "Test of the "Replacement
schedule is schedule is external alarm of the external
reduced by reduced by secondary alarm secondary
half in a severe half in a severe lightning lightning
environment. environment. protectors protector (S8000
(S8000 Indoor Outdoor BTS)"
BTS and (page 682)
S8003 Indoor
BTS)" (page
283)
75 kit - every 15 years - Section 6.2.71
"Replacement of
the 75 Ohms kit
(S8000 Indoor
BTS and S8003
Indoor BTS)"
(page 713)
5.1.4.3 S8003 Indoor BTS schedule
Table 85
Summary of the preventive maintenance schedule of the S8003 Indoor BTS
Mandatory
schedule sheet
schedule
Door gasket once a year every 4 years Section 5.4.4 Section 6.2.35
Note: The "Test of the "Replacement of
schedule is door gasket the door gasket
reduced by (S8000 Indoor (S8000 Indoor

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Mandatory
schedule sheet
schedule
half in a severe
BTS and BTS and S8003
environment. S8003 Indoor Indoor BTS)"
244)
Air filter - every 6 months - Section 6.2.73
Note: The "Replacement
schedule is of the air filter
environment. 721)
Fans twice a year every 5 years Section Section 6.2.74
5.4.12 "Test "Replacement
of the fans of a fan (S8003
(S8003 Indoor Indoor BTS)"
290)
Secondary alarm once a year every 10 years Section 5.4.1 -
lightning protector Note: The Note: The 1 "Test of the
schedule is schedule is external alarm
reduced by reduced by secondary
half in a severe half in a severe lightning
environment. environment. protectors
(S8000 Indoor
BTS and
S8003 Indoor
BTS)" (page
283)
75 box - every 15 years - Section 6.2.71
"Replacement of
the 75 Ohms kit
(S8000 Indoor
BTS and S8003
Indoor BTS)"
(page 713)
5.1.5 Description of a preventive maintenance procedure sheet

A preventive maintenance procedure sheet is divided into the following
paragraphs:
• the title
• the main body composed of steps explaining how to test an item of
equipment
• the figure(s) if necessary

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
5.1.5.1 Main body of the sheet

The main body contains the following information:
• the product reference
• the range of application, which explains which item of equipment is
concerned by the test procedure
• the schedule, which reminds the operator how often the test procedure
must be performed
• the intervention time
• the tools required
• the impact of the test procedure:
— on the operation of the cabinet
— at the OMC-R
— on the service
• the location of the equipment to be tested

• the action, which contains the step-by-step actions of the test procedure.
These actions are summarized in a flowchart presented at the beginning
of the sheet.
5.1.5.2 Figures
The figures are provided to help the operator perform the actions. They
show the item of equipment schematically.
5.2 On-site checks

procedures
DANGER
Personnel safety rules
Personnel working on the cabinet must be authorized to work
according to the safety standards
CAUTION
ESDS handling precautions
Wear the antistatic bracelet when performing maintenance
procedures, especially when handling boards.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
5.2 On-site checks 199
DANGER
Electric shock
WARNING
Rain, Snow or High Humidity Weather Conditions
Make sure that there is no water trapped on the top of the door
gasket prior to opening doors. If water is present, wipe or sponge
off the water to avoid it from entering the BTS.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 63
S8003 Indoor BTS: Type F power supply cables safety measures

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
5.3 Check at the OMC-R 201

procedures
CAUTION
Working instructions
Once the preventive maintenance procedures are performed,
ensure that the hood key-locks are properly secured.
For all variants of the S8000 Outdoor BTS, check that the hood is properly
closed and locked:
• Visually check that the key lock is in the vertical position (straight up
and down).
• Try to lift the hood at the front left and right corners.
Specific verification for the EP2 and EP2+ variants of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS:
• Verify that the back of the hood is inserted under the back-panel pins
(one on each side).
Leave the premises clean and tidy.
5.3 Check at the OMC-R

procedures
Preventive maintenance procedures on equipment are performed only when
no alarms are present.
Before taking any action, check the "OMC-R Browser" browser windows at
the OMC-R, which provide a means of graphically monitoring the network.
When the graphical elements of the display are gray, no alarms are active.
The preventive maintenance procedures can be performed.

procedures
After performing the preventive maintenance procedures, check the network
has resumed its correct operation.
The graphical objects must appear without any alarm in the "OMC-R
Browser" browser windows at the OMC-R. The preventive maintenance
procedures are complete.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
If there are alarms on the graphical objects concerned, check the condition
of the site using the "Display all" command on the btsSiteManager object:
• If the operationalState is "enabled", clear the alarms to complete the
preventive maintenance procedures.
• If the operationalState is "disabled", set the btsSiteManager object to
"locked" and then back to "unlocked", and then perform the "Display
hardware information" command of the btsSiteManager object:
— If all equipment is operating, clear the active alarms. The preventive
maintenance procedures are complete.
— If certain items of equipment have failed, refer to the replacement
procedures.
5.4 Preventive maintenance procedure sheets

5.4.1 Test of the AC lightning protector (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product list :
• single-phase AC lightning protector type 1
in the single-phase AC box type 1 (NTQA90BA or NTQA90BB)
in the single-phase AC box type 2 (NTQA90BC)
in the single-phase AC box type 3 (NTQA90BE)
• split single-phase AC lightning protector type 1
in the split single-phase AC box type 1 (NTQA90AA)
in the split single-phase AC box type 2 (NTQA90AB)
in the split single-phase AC box type 3 (NTQA90AC)
• tri-phase AC lightning protector type 1
in the tri-phase AC box type 1 (NTQA90CA or NTQA90CB)
in the tri-phase AC box type 3 (NTQA90CC)
in the tri-phase AC box type 4 (NTQA90CD)
in the tri-phase AC box type 4 (NTQA90FA)
Range of application
This procedure applies to the AC lightning protector of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS for GSM 900, 1800, and 1900.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Schedule
Perform this test once a year.
Intervention time
According to the configuration, intervention time is approximately 45
minutes.
Tools required
• Screwdriver
• Box-spanner
• Adhesive isolate tape
• Joslyn tester: Surge Protector Test Set Model 4010-01
Impact of the test on the service
DANGER
The test is prohibited during thunderstorm conditions.
CAUTION
Service interruption
The BTS does not remain supplied with the mains power supply.
CAUTION
The BTS operates on batteries if they are present. To perform
the procedure without interruption, check the batteries before
performing a lightning protector test. Due to the limited autonomy
of batteries (see Section 3.2.3.3 "Discharge times of the
batteries" (page 144)) check battery discharge times.
If the batteries do not exist, there is a loss of service.
Location
The AC lightning protector is located in the AC box (see Figure 64 "Location
of the AC lightning protector of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with ACUs" (page
204) and Figure 65 "Location of the AC lightning protector of the S8000
Outdoor BTS with DACS" (page 205)).
Procedure

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Refer toFigure 66 "Flowchart of the test procedure of the AC lightning

protector of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 206) for a flowchart of the
procedure.
Figure 64
Location of the AC lightning protector of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with ACUs

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 65
Location of the AC lightning protector of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with DACS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 66
Flowchart of the test procedure of the AC lightning protector of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Step Action
1 Switch off the AC switch

• If the mains power supply is single-phase or split single-phase,
perform the following actions.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
1. Check the battery circuit breaker, if any, is in the I" position

(see Figure 67 "Single-phase AC box (GSM 900/1800)
of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 213), Figure 71 "Split
single-phase AC box (GSM 1900) of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS" (page 217) and Figure 74 "Tri-phase AC box (GSM
900/1800) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 220)).
2. Put the main breaker in the "O" position.
3. Switch off the mains power supply on the operator box.
• If the mains power supply is tri-phase, perform the following

actions.
1. Check the battery circuit breaker, if any, is in the I" position
(see Figure 74 "Tri-phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 220)).
2. Press the general stop button.
2 Open the AC box

1. Disconnect the alarm cable C01 from the AC box and the
rectifier cable.
2. Undo the seven or eight securing screws no.4 on the
AC box side and remove the small cover (see Figure 67
"Single-phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS" (page 213)).
3. In the case of the AC box type 1, disconnect the input AC
cable by unscrewing the screws no.3 on the terminal block
and the nut on the ground connection (see Figure 69 "View
of the single-phase AC lightning protector type 1 of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 215) for the single-phase AC
box or Figure 72 "View of the split single-phase AC lightning
protector type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 218) for
the split single-phase AC box).
In the case of the AC box type 2 or type 3, disconnect the
input AC cable by removing the nuts from the filters and the
nut on the ground connection (see Figure 70 "View of the
single-phase AC lightning protector type 2 or type 3 of the
4. Remove the input AC cable gland by unscrewing the large
nut (see Figure 67 "Single-phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) of

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 213) and Figure 69 "View of

the single-phase AC lightning protector type 1 of the S8000
Outdoor BTS" (page 215)).
• If the mains power supply is tri-phase one, perform the following

actions.
1. Disconnect the alarm cable C01 located on top of the
tri-phase AC box and the rectifier cable (see Figure 74
"Tri-phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS" (page 220)).
2. Undo the seven or eight securing screws no.4 on the box
side and remove the small cover.
3. Locate the following wires:
• three phases
• neutral ground
• ground
4. Make a note of the wire positions.

5. Locate the four lightning protector wires.
6. Disconnect the four lightning protector wires.
7. In the case of the AC box type 1, disconnect the input AC
cable gland by removing the four nuts on the filter and the
nut on the ground connection (see Figure 75 "View of the
tri-phase AC lightning protector type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS" (page 221)).
In the case of the AC box type 2 or type 3, disconnect the
input AC cable gland by removing the nuts from the filters
and the nut on the ground connection (see Figure 76 "View
of the tri-phase AC lightning protector type 2, type 3 or type 4
of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 222)).
8. Remove the AC input cable gland by unscrewing the large
nut.
3 Perform the visual test of the AC lightning protector

• If the cabinet contains the AC lightning protector type 1,
Check for signs of burns or damage to the case, cover, board
and terminal blocks.
— If there is no damage, go to step 4
— If there is damage, go to step 7

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
• If the cabinet contains the AC lightning protector type 2, type 3

or type 4, perform the following actions.
1. Check for signs of burns or damage to the case, cover and
terminal blocks.
2. Check for signs of burns to the cables.
3. Check the state of the indicator of each plug-in module:
• If it is white, the lightning protector is correct. Go to step 5.
• If it is white and red, the lightning protector is not correct
and the corresponding plug-in module must be changed.
Go to step 8.
• If it is red, the lightning protector is not correct and the
corresponding plug-in module must be changed. Go to
step 8.
4 Perform the electrical test of the AC lightning protector.

• If the cabinet contains the single-phase AC lightning protector
type 1, perform the following actions (there is not any electrical
test of the AC lightning protectors type 2 and type 3).
Observe the operating instructions for the Joslyn tester.
1. Mark and disconnect the two wires (Phase and Neutral)
of the AC lightning protector (see Figure 69 "View of the
single-phase AC lightning protector type 1 of the S8000
Outdoor BTS" (page 215)). from the terminal block.
2. Isolate the two lugs with the adhesive tape.
3. Connect the red wire of the tester to the varistor nut (black
wire).
4. Connect the black wire of the tester to the other varistor nut
(white wire).
5. Push the test button of the tester. The test value is maintained
on the display until the test button is released.
6. Note the value:
• If the value is above 420 V, go to step 5.
• If the value is below 420 V, go to step 7.
• If the cabinet contains the split single-phase AC lightning

protector type 1, type 2 or type 3, perform the following actions.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

1. Mark and disconnect the three wires (Phase L1, Phase L2,
and Neutral) of the AC lightning protector (see 3.8). from
the terminal block.
2. Isolate the three lugs with the adhesive tape.
3. Connect the red wire of the tester to the first varistor nut
(black wire).
(white wire).
6. Note the first value.
7. Disconnect the red wire of the tester and connect it to the
other varistor nut (the other black wire).
9. Note the second value.
• If both values are above 210 V, go to step 5.
• If at least one of both values is below 210 V, go to step 7.
• If the cabinet contains the tri-phase AC lightning protector

type1, perform the following actions (there is not any electrical
test of the tri-p hase AC lightning protectors type 2, type 3
and type 4).
1. Mark and disconnect the four wires (Phase L1, Phase L2,
Phase L3 and Neutral) of the AC lightning protector (see
Figure 75 "View of the tri-phase AC lightning protector type 1
of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 221)). from the terminal
block.
2. Isolate the four lugs with the adhesive tape.
3. Connect the red wire of the tester to the first varistor nut
(black wire).
(white wire).
6. Note the first value.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

second varistor nut (the second black wire).
9. Note the second value.
third varistor nut (the third black wire).
12. Note the third value.
• If the three values are above 420 V, go to step 5.
• If at least one of the three values is below 420 V, go to
step 7.
5 Close the AC box

1. Install the input AC cable gland and tighten the large nut
(see Figure 67 "Single-phase AC box (GSM 900/1800)
of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 213), Figure 71 "Split
single-phase AC box (GSM 1900) of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS" (page 217)).
2. In the case of the AC box type 1, connect the input AC cable
on the terminal block and the nut on the ground connection.
In the case of the AC box type 2 or type 3, screw the nuts on
the filters and the nut on the ground connection.
3. Connect the two or three AC lightning protector wires on the
terminal block (see Figure 67 "Single-phase AC box (GSM
900/1800) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 213), Figure
71 "Split single-phase AC box (GSM 1900) of the S8000
4. Insert the small cover.
5. Tighten the seven or eight screws no.4 on the AC box side.
6. Connect the rectifier cable.
7. Connect the alarm cable to the AC box.

actions.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
1. Install the input AC cable gland and tighten the large nut (see
Figure 74 "Tri-phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) of the S8000
2. In the case of the AC box type 1, connect the input AC cable
on the terminal block and the nut on the ground connection.
In the case of the AC box type 2, type 3 or type 4, screw the
nuts on the filters an the nut on the ground connection.
3. Connect the four AC lightning protector wires on the terminal
block (see Figure 74 "Tri-phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) of
6 Switch on the AC switch

1. Switch on the mains power supply on the operator box.
2. Put the main circuit breaker of the AC box in the "I" position.
3. Go to step 9.

actions.
1. Switch on the mains power supply on the operator box.
2. Put all the circuit breakers of the AC box in the "I" position.
3. Go to step 9.
7 Replace the AC lightning protector

Replace the AC lightning protector according to the replacement
procedure (see Section 6.2.67 "Replacement of the single-phase
AC lightning protector (S8000 Outdoor BTS with AC main box)"
(page 687) for the (split) single-phase AC lightning protector and
Section 6.2.69 "Replacement of the tri-phase AC lightning protector
(S8000 Outdoor BTS with AC main box)" (page 700) for the tri-phase
one).
8 Replace the faulty plug-in module of the AC lightning protector
Replace the plug-in module according to the replacement procedure
(see Section 6.2.67 "Replacement of the single-phase AC lightning
protector (S8000 Outdoor BTS with AC main box)" (page 687) for
the (split) single-phase AC lightning protector and Section 6.2.69
"Replacement of the tri-phase AC lightning protector (S8000 Outdoor
BTS with AC main box)" (page 700) for the tri-phase one).
9 The procedure is complete.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
—End—
Figure 67
Single-phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 68
Side covers of the AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 69
View of the single-phase AC lightning protector type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 70
View of the single-phase AC lightning protector type 2 or type 3 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 71
Split single-phase AC box (GSM 1900) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 72
View of the split single-phase AC lightning protector type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 73
View of the split single-phase AC lightning protector type 2 or type 3 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 74
Tri-phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 75
View of the tri-phase AC lightning protector type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 76
View of the tri-phase AC lightning protector type 2, type 3 or type 4 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
5.4.2 Test of the AC lightning protectors (battery cabinet)

Product reference
Equipment PEC codes CPC codes

phase plug-in protection A0773606
module
neutral plug-in protection A0773608
module
This procedure applies to the AC lightning protector of the battery cabinet.
Schedule
DANGER
Electric shock
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 10 minutes.
Required tool(s)
• Phillips screwdriver
• Surge protector tester

None.
Location
The AC lightning protection modules are located in the AC box (see Figure
78 "Location of the AC lightning protector (battery cabinet)" (page 226)).
Warning
DANGER

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 77
Flowchart of the AC lightning protector test procedure (battery cabinet)
Procedure
Step Action
Refer to Figure 77 "Flowchart of the AC lightning protector test procedure
(battery cabinet)" (page 224) for a flowchart of the procedure.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
1 Check the "DC" breaker of the battery cabinet is in the "I" position.
2 Switch off the battery cabinet "AC" breaker.
3 SWITCH OFF THE MAINS (battery cabinet breaker only) AT THE

OPERATOR BOX LEVEL.
4 Open the AC box.

Undo the four screws and remove the cover.
5 Perform the visual test of the AC box
a. Check on signs of burns or damage to the cover, case, terminals
or cables.
b. Check the indicator state of each plug-in module.
• If it is white and red or completely red, the protector is not
correct. The corresponding plug-in module must be changed.
• If the indicator is white, the lightning protector is still good.
6 Perform the electrical test of the AC lightning protector

Use the surge protector tester to check the operational state of the
modules. Any lightning protector which doesn’t work properly must
be changed.
7 Close the c-AC box

Screw back the cover.
8 Turn on the mains power supply at the operator box
9 Switch on the battery cabinet "AC" breaker

10 The procedure is complete
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 78
Location of the AC lightning protector (battery cabinet)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
5.4.3 Test of the internal and external batteries (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
Equipments PEC codes CPC codes

Internal batteries SBS40 NTQA36FA A0758427
External batteries SBS60 NTQA36GA A0758428
SBSC11 NTQA92EA A0809688
This procedure applies to the batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS for GSM
850, 900, 1800, and 1900.
Schedule
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 45 minutes for the internal batteries.
The intervention time is approximately 45 minutes per string for the external
batteries.
Tools required
• Special Benning Accutest: ref. 7511501030, scale 100 A (or equivalent)
• DC clamp ammeter with a scale of 10 or 20 A: ref. PAC10 (Chauvin &
Arnoux)
• 10 mm wrench
• Torque wrench with socket
• Cloth
• Rubber gloves
• Adhesive isolate tape
• Set of four new batteries ready for use
• Emery cloth
DANGER
Electric shock
The BTS remains supplied with the mains power supply, so take
care while handling the equipment.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
Risk of loss of service.
Feedback of alarms to the OMC-R.
The operationalState of the btsSiteManager object is "enabled".

Location
CAUTION
To ensure that the hood key-locks are properly secured, refer to
Section 5.2.2 "Final checks after having performed preventive
maintenance procedures" (page 201).
The internal batteries are located below the hood (see Figure 79 "Location
of the internal batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with ACUS" (page 229)
and Figure 80 "Location of the internal batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
with DACS" (page 230)).
The external batteries are located in the external battery cabinet (see
Figure 81 "External battery cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (NTQA36GA
batteries)" (page 231) to Figure 83 "External battery cabinet of the S8000
Outdoor BTS (SBS C11 batteries)" (page 233)).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 79
Location of the internal batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with ACUS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 80
Location of the internal batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with DACS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 81
External battery cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (NTQA36GA batteries)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 82
External battery cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (SBS 60 batteries)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 83
External battery cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (SBS C11 batteries)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 84
Flowchart of the test procedure of the batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
DANGER
If the skin or clothing is splashed by the sulphuric acid during
a test, wash it thoroughly with water and consult a doctor if
necessary.
Wear rubber gloves for all test operations.
CAUTION
Before visiting the site, check for a mains power failure on the site
within the last 48 hours.
After a mains power failure, the cabinet must operate on the mains
for at least 24 hours to reload the batteries.
DANGER
Never short-circuit the batteries.
Never try to open a battery.
DANGER
Environment protection
Never throw a battery into the fire.
Procedure
Step Action
Refer to Figure 84 "Flowchart of the test procedure of the batteries of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 234) for a flowchart of the procedure.
1 Access the batteries

• If the internal batteries are being tested, perform the following
actions:
1. Open the doors.
2. Open the hood (see Figure 85 "View of the internal batteries
3. Open the cover and attach it with the safety cable on the
hood.
• If the external batteries are being tested, perform the following

action.
411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Open the door.
2 Check the charge
DANGER
The personnel performing this check must wear rubber
gloves and must be isolated form the ground.
The check of the external batteries must be performed string by

string.
Ensure the batteries are not being charged. To do so, use the clamp
ammeter located next to the battery connector (see Figure 85 "View
of the internal batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 240)
or Figure 86 "External battery cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
(NTQA36GA batteries)" (page 241)) to check the battery residual
charge current is below 200 mA.
• If the battery charge current is below 200 mA, go to step 3.
• If the battery charge current is over 200 mA, the batteries are
being charged. Go to step 8.
3 Perform the servicing
DANGER
Electric shock
The BTS remains supplied with the mains power supply,
so take care while handling the equipment.
CAUTION
Risk of loss of service.
Feedback of alarms to the OMC-R.
a. Preliminary operations
Internal batteries
1. Switch off the battery circuit breaker.
External batteries (check string by string)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
2. Unscrew the nuts no.1 connecting the black and gray (if any)
wires and isolate them with the adhesive tape (see Figure
86 "External battery cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
(NTQA36GA batteries)" (page 241)).
3. Unscrew the nut no.2 connecting the blue wire and isolate it
with the adhesive tape.
b. Cleaning
1. Clean the batteries with a damp cloth.
2. Do not use corrosive detergents or oil.
c. Corrosion check (visual inspections)

1. Remove the plastic cover on the screws and check for the
presence of corrosion on the terminals of a string.
2. If there are traces of corrosion on the terminals:
• Unscrew the nuts no.1 connecting the black and gray
wires and isolate them with the adhesive tape (see Figure
85 "View of the internal batteries of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS" (page 240)).
• Unscrew the nut no.2 connecting the blue wire and isolate
it with the adhesive tape.
• Mark the three black inter-battery cables.
• Unscrew the six nuts connecting the inter-battery cables.
• Clean the cable and the battery terminals with an emery
cloth, then with a damp cloth.
• Reconnect the three inter-battery cables.
CAUTION
Tightening torques
Use the torque wrench. The terminal
tightening torque must be 3.9 N-m.
3. If there is no trace of corrosion on the terminals, go to step 4.
CAUTION
Tightening torques
Use the torque wrench. The terminal tightening
torque must be 3.9 N-m.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
4 Perform the electrical test

a. Definition of the test criteria
In addition to the systematic replacement of a set of batteries
(every four years) there are three electrical criteria for the
preventive test of batteries:
• the open-circuit voltage: Vo
— Vo is the open circuit voltage measured with the Benning
accutest (ref. 7511501030, scale open or 0 A).
— The voltages measured are Vo1, Vo2, Vo3, Vo4.
— The voltages are expressed in Volts.
• the load voltage: VL

— VL is the loaded voltage measured with the Benning
accutest (ref. 7511501030, scale 100 A).
— The voltages measured are VL1, VL2, VL3, VL4.
— The voltages are expressed in Volts.
• the difference between the two extreme open-circuit voltages:

dVo
The definition is dVo=Vmax-Vmin,
where Vmax=Vmax[Vo1, Vo2, Vo3, Vo4] and Vmin=Vmin[Vo1, Vo2,
Vo3, Vo4].
dVo is in fact an image of the open-circuit unbalance of the
batteries.
DANGER
The personnel performing this check must wear
rubber gloves and must be isolated from the
ground.
b. Electrical test
2. Disconnect the batteries (see Figure 85 "View of the internal
batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 240) and Figure
86 "External battery cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
(NTQA36GA batteries)" (page 241)):
• Unscrew the nuts no.1 connecting the black and gray (if
any) wires and isolate them with the adhesive tape.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
• Unscrew the nut no.2 connecting the blue wire and isolate
it with the adhesive tape.
3. Measure the open-circuit voltages Vo1, Vo2, Vo3 and Vo4 with
the Benning accutest.
4. Measure the four load voltages VL1, VL2, VL3 and VL4 with
the Benning accutest.
DANGER
Electric shock
There is a risk of sparks during the test, so take
5. Fill in the table below, which is given as an example:
Open-circuit Open-
Recommended Test Load voltages
voltages [in circuit
periodicity date [in Volt]
Volt] difference
V V V dVo
- - Vo1 Vo2 Vo3 Vo4 VL3
L1 L2 L4
Initial
values
1 year
2 years
3 years
4 years

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 85
View of the internal batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 86
External battery cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (NTQA36GA batteries)
6. To fill in the "Open-circuit difference" column on the right,

calculate the open-circuit difference dV0 (see step 4.a).
7. Reconnect the batteries and turn the battery breaker to the
On position.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
Tightening torques
Use the torque wrench. The terminal tightening
torque must be 3.9 N-m.
• Screw the nut no.1 connecting the black wire and the
gray (if any) wire.
• Screw the nut no.2 connecting the blue wire.
5 Analyze the results using the table below:
Limit conditions for each battery

of under 4 years old Condition of the Maintena
open-circuit open-circuit complete set of nce
load voltages batteries action
voltages difference
VL [1,2,3,4]
Vo [1,2,3,4] dVo
> 12.5 V > 11 V < 0.5V ==> operational Case 1
< 12.5V x x ==> not operational
x < 11 V x ==> not operational Case 2
x x >0.5V ==> not operational
Set of batteries more than 4 years old ==> not operational Case 3
The analysis of the acceptance criteria for a set of batteries may

be resumed as follows:
Case 1
If the three criteria below are met, the batteries are operational:
• open-circuit voltage Vo > 12.5 V
• load voltage VL > 11 V
• the difference between the two extreme open-circuit voltages
dVo < 0.5 V
Go to Step 6.
Case 2
If any one of these three criteria is not met, the batteries are not
operational:
• Replace the complete set. Go to step 7.
Case 3

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
When the four batteries are over four years old, the whole set must
be replaced. Go to step 7.
The batteries must therefore be systematically replaced every four
years.
6 Close the door or the cover and the hood
CAUTION
To ensure that the hood key-locks are properly secured,
refer to Section 5.2.2 "Final checks after having
performed preventive maintenance procedures" (page
201).
• If the internal batteries were tested, perform the following actions.

1. Detach the safety cable and close the battery cover.
2. Close the hood.
3. Go to step 8.
• lf the external batteries were tested, perform the following

actions.
1. Close the door.
2. Go to step 8.
7 Replace the batteries
CAUTION
In the case of a replacement, the whole set must be
changed.
The four batteries in the same set must be identical
(brand, date-code, reference number-NMC).
The condition of the batteries must also be monitored in time.

In order to monitor them, the four batteries are individually marked: it
is therefore forbidden to invert the batteries within a same set.
Replace the batteries according to the replacement procedure (refer
to Section 6.2.48 "Replacement of the internal batteries (S8000
Outdoor BTS)" (page 604) for the internal batteries and Section
6.2.41 "Replacement of the external batteries (battery cabinet)"
(page 563) for the external batteries).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
—End—
5.4.4 Test of the door gasket (S8000 Indoor BTS and S8003 Indoor BTS)
Product reference

Door gasket
(for S8000 Indoor BTS):
the base cabinet

- R0118061
Door gasket
the BCF cabinet

- R0118060
Door gasket
2 vertical gaskets - P0603947
2 horizontal gaskets - P0603948
1 partition gasket - P0603949
This procedure applies to the door gasket of the S8000 Indoor BTS for GSM
900, 1800, and 1900, or the BCF cabinet, if any, and of the S8003 Indoor
BTS for GSM 900 and 1800.
Schedule
Perform this procedure once a year.
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 10 minutes for each gasket.
Tools required
None

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
DANGER
Electric shock

Location
The door gasket is located on the cabinet of:
• the S8000 Indoor BTS (see Figure 87 "Location of the door gasket on
the cabinet or the BCF cabinet of the S8000 Indoor BTS" (page 246))
• the S8003 Indoor BTS (see Figure 88 "Location of the door gasket on
the cabinet (S8003 Indoor BTS)" (page 247))

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 87
Location of the door gasket on the cabinet or the BCF cabinet of the S8000 Indoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 88
Location of the door gasket on the cabinet (S8003 Indoor BTS)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 89
Flowchart of the test procedure of the door gasket (S8000 Indoor BTS and S8003 Indoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Procedure
Step Action
Refer to Figure 89 "Flowchart of the test procedure of the door gasket
(S8000 Indoor BTS and S8003 Indoor BTS" (page 248) for a flowchart
of the procedure.
1 Open the door

2 Perform the visual test for each gasket
a. Check the areas visually (see Figure 87 "Location of the door
gasket on the cabinet or the BCF cabinet of the S8000 Indoor
BTS" (page 246)).
b. Check for correct suppleness of the gasket on the door.
c. Check the compression is correct.
• If the gasket is correct, go to step 3.
• If the gasket is damaged, go to step 4.
3 Close the door

• Go to step 5.
4 Replace the door gasket
ATTENTION
If a door gasket of the S8003 Indoor BTS is damaged, you must replace
the five gaskets.
Replace all the door gaskets according to the replacement procedure

(see Section 6.2.35 "Replacement of the door gasket (S8000
Indoor BTS and S8003 Indoor BTS)" (page 530)).
—End—
5.4.5 Test of the door gasket or hood gasket (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference

Left door gasket NTQA31MA A0789131
Right door gasket NTQA31NA A0789133
Left door gasket EP4 - P0991756

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

Right door gasket EP4 - P0991757
Environmental gasket - R0117842
ACU exhaust gasket - P0870315
EMI gaskets for the - R0117841
bulkhead
This procedure applies to the door gaskets or the hood gasket of the S8000
Outdoor BTS for GSM 900, 1800, and 1900.
Schedule
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 5 minutes for each gasket.
Tools required
Stepladder
DANGER
Electric shock
care while using the equipment.

Location
In the case of a cabinet with two ACUs (see Figure 90 "Location of the
door gaskets or the hood gasket of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the ACUs"
(page 251)), the door gaskets are located on the cabinet or on the doors
and the hood gaskets on the cabinet hood, behind the ACUs.
In the case of a cabinet with a DACS (see Figure 91 "Location of the door
gaskets of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the DACS" (page 252)), the door
gaskets are located on the doors, but there is no hood gasket.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 90
Location of the door gaskets or the hood gasket of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the ACUs

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 91
Location of the door gaskets of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the DACS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 92
Flowchart of the test procedure of the door gaskets of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Procedure for the door gaskets

Step Action
Refer to Figure 92 "Flowchart of the test procedure of the door gaskets of
the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 253) and Figure 93 "Flowchart of the test
procedure of the hood gasket of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 256) for
flowcharts of the procedure.
1 Open the doors

2 Perform the first visual test
Check the entire length of the gaskets for their condition: pinch along
the length of each gasket to check that it is stuck securely to the
metal frame that faces the doors of the BTS.
• If the gasket is stuck securely, go to step 3.
• If less than 20 cm of the gasket does not adhere to the metal
frame, go to step 5.
• If more than 20 cm of the gasket does not adhere to the metal
frame, go to step 7.
3 Perform the second visual test

Check the condition of the gasket corners.
• If the gasket corners are correct, go to step 4.
• If there is a visible gap in a gasket corner (possibly caused by
misaligned or improperly cut gaskets, or a lack of silicone), go to
step 6
• If a hole appears when a finger is lightly pressed on each side of
the pre-cut gasket, go to step 6
4 Close the doors

• Go to step 8.
5 Repair the gasket length

a. Repair the gasket according to the repair procedure (see Section
6.2.36.1 "Repair of the door gaskets" (page 537)).
b. Go to step 3.
6 Repair the gasket corner
Repair the gasket according to the repair procedure (see Section
6.2.36.1 "Repair of the door gaskets" (page 537)).
7 Replace the gasket

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Replace the gasket according to the replacement procedure (see

Section 6.2.36.2 "Replacement of the door gaskets" (page 545)).
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 93
Flowchart of the test procedure of the hood gasket of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Procedure for the hood gasket

Step Action
In the case of a BTS with two ACU climatic units, the gaskets located behind
the ACUs can be mounted on the hood.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
1 Open the hood
2 Perform the visual test

a. Climb up a stepladder.
b. Pinch each gasket along its length to check its adherence to the
hood of the BTS.
• If the gasket is well stuck, go to step 3.
• If the gasket is not well stuck, go to step 4.
• If the gasket needs to be replaced, go to step 5.
3 Close the hood
CAUTION
201).
• Go to step 6.
4 Repair the gasket

Repair the gasket according to the repair procedure (see Section
6.2.47.1 "Repair of the hood gasket (procedure applicable on site
and in the warehouse)" (page 598)).
5 Replace the gasket
Replace the gasket according to the replacement procedure (see
Section 6.2.47.2 "Replacement of the hood gasket" (page 599)).
—End—
5.4.6 Test of the external alarm primary lightning protector (S8000

Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
CPC code: A0666945
This procedure applies to the external alarm primary lightning protectors of
the S8000 Outdoor BTS for GSM 900, 1800, and 1900.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Schedule
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 10 minutes for one lightning protector.
Tools required
• 10 mm torque wrench
• Flat screwdriver (6.5 x 150)
DANGER
Electric shock

Location
The external alarm primary lightning protectors are located at the plinth or
the kit according to the site configuration.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 94
Test procedure of the external alarm primary lightning protectors of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Procedure
Step Action
Refer to Figure 94 "Test procedure of the external alarm primary lightning
protectors of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 259) for a flowchart of the
procedure.
1 Open the plinth or the kit according to the site configuration.

2 Perform the visual test of the external alarm primary lightning
protectors
Check for signs of burns or damage to the case, cover, board and
terminal blocks.
• If there is no damage, go to step 3.
• If there is damage, go to step 5.
3 Perform the electrical test of a lightning protector

a. Disconnect the two wires of the lightning protector to be tested
(see Figure 95 "View of the external alarm primary lightning
protectors of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 262)).
b. Connect the red wire of the tester to the lightning protector wire
no.1.
c. Connect the black wire of the tester to the ground.
d. Push the button of the tester to read the test value (which is
maintained on the display until the test button is released).
e. Note the first value.
f. Connect the red wire of the tester to the lightning protector wire
no.2.
g. Push the button of the tester to read the test value (which is
h. Note the second value.
i. After the electrical measures:
• If at least one of both values are below 300 V, go to step 5.
j. Test another lightning protector until the full configuration.
4 Close the plinth or the kit

a. Close the plinth or the kit according to the site configuration.
b. Go to step 6.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
5 Replace a lightning protector

Replace a lightning protector according to the replacement
procedure (see Section 6.2.39 "Replacement of an external alarm
primary lightning protector (S8000 Outdoor BTS)" (page 556)).
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 95
View of the external alarm primary lightning protectors of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
5.4.7 Test of the external alarm secondary lightning protector (S8000

Outdoor BTS)
Product reference

ALPRO board NTQA1102 A0652933
This procedure applies to the external alarm secondary lightning protector
of the S8000 Outdoor BTS for GSM 900, 1800, and 1900.
Schedule
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
DANGER
Electric shock

Location
The external alarm secondary lightning protector is located at the plinth or
the kit according to the site configuration.
• the S8000 Outdoor BTS cabinet (see Figure 137 "Side view of the
tri-phase AC box type 2, type 3, type 4 or 5 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS"
(page 385)
• the S8003 Indoor BTS cabinet (seeFigure 135 "Tri-phase AC box (GSM
900/1800) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 383)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 96
Test procedure of the external alarm secondary lightning protectors of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Procedure
Step Action
Refer toFigure 94 "Test procedure of the external alarm primary lightning
procedure.

2 Perform the visual test of the external alarm lightning protector
terminal blocks.
• If there is no damage, go to 3.
3 Close the plinth or the kit according to the site configuration.

• Go to step 5.
4 Replace the external alarm secondary lightning protector

Replace the external alarm secondary lightning protector according
to the replacement procedure (see Section 6.2.40 "Replacement
of the external alarm secondary lightning protector (S8000 Outdoor
BTS)" (page 560)).
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 97
View of the external alarm secondary lightning protectors of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
5.4.8 Test of the ground fault interrupter (S8000 Outdoor BTS)

Product reference
CPC codes:
A0772600 for the single-phase AC box NTQA90BA and NTQA90BB

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
A0736729 for the single-phase AC box NTQA90BC and NTQA90BE

A0682000 for the tri-phase AC box NTQA90CA, NTQA90CB, NTQA90CC,
NTQA90CD, and NTQA90FA
A0693143 for the single-phase AC box NTQA90AA, NTQA90AB, and
NTQA90AC
This procedure applies to the ground fault interrupter of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS for GSM 900, and 1800.
Schedule
Intervention time
Tools required
• Differential tester
• Inspection light
• One chronometer
DANGER
Electric shock
The BTS remains supplied with the remains power supply, so take

Location
The ground fault interrupter is located in the AC box (see Figure 98
"Location of the ground fault interrupter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the
ACUs" (page 268) and Figure 99 "Location of the ground fault interrupter of
the S8000 Outdoor BTS with DACS" (page 269)).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 98
Location of the ground fault interrupter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the ACUs

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 99
Location of the ground fault interrupter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with DACS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 100
Flowchart of the test procedure of the ground fault interrupter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Procedure
Step Action
Refer to Figure 100 "Flowchart of the test procedure of the ground fault
interrupter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 270) for a flowchart of the
procedure.
1 Perform the electrical test

a. Connect the inspection light on the electrical outlet no.1 (see
Figure 101 "View of the single-phase ground fault interrupter
of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 272) and Figure 102 "View
of the tri-phase ground fault interrupter of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS" (page 273)).
b. Check for the inspection light being on.
c. Push the test button "T" of the differential tester.
d. Check the for the inspection light to be off.
2 Replace the ground fault interrupter

Replace the ground fault interrupter according to the replacement
procedure (see Section 6.2.46 "Replacement of a ground fault
interrupter (S8000 Outdoor BTS with AC mains box)" (page 589)).
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 101
View of the single-phase ground fault interrupter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 102
View of the tri-phase ground fault interrupter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
5.4.9 Test of the lightning protectors of the 48 V box (S8000 Outdoor

BTS)
Product reference
CPC code: A0681776

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
This procedure applies to the lightning protectors of the 48 V box of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS for GSM 900, 1800, and 11900.
Schedule
Intervention time
Tools required
• Flat screwdriver
• Box spanner
• Joslyn tester: Surge protector Test Set Model 4010-01
DANGER
Electric shock
The BTS remains supplied with the main power supply, so take
The 48 V Box does not remain supplied.

Location
The lightning protectors of the 48 V box are located at the plinth or the kit of
the BTS according to the site configuration.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 103
Flowchart of the test procedure of the 48 V box lightning protector of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Procedure
Step Action
Refer to Figure 105 "Flowchart of the test procedure for the pcm lightning
procedure.
1 Open the plinth or the kit

a. Remove the fuse F08 (0.25 A - 250 V AC - slow) from the user
interconnection panel.
b. Open the plinth or the kit according to the site configuration.
2 Perform the visual test of the 48 V box lightning protectors

Check for signs of burns or damage to the case, cover and terminal
blocks.
• If there is damage, go to step 5 .
3 Perform the electrical test of the 48 V box lightning protectors

a. Unscrew the cover fixing screw.
b. Disconnect all the wires connected on the lightning protectors.
c. Connect the red wire of the tester to an input.
d. Connect the black wire of the tester to the other input.
e. Push the test button to read the the test value (which is
f. Note the value and compare it to the supplier value.
• If the value is equal to 68 V +/- 10%, go to step 4.
• If the value is not equal to 68 V +/- 10%, go to step 5.
4 Close the plinth or the kit

a. Close the plinth or the kit according to the site configuration.
b. Reinsert the fuse F08 (0.25 A - 250 V AC - slow) on the user
interconnection panel.
c. Go to step 6.

Replace the lightning protectors according to the replacement
procedure (see Section 6.2.50 "Replacement of the lightning
protectors of the 48 V box (S8000 Outdoor BTS)" (page 613)).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
—End—
Figure 104
View of the 48 V box lightning protectors of the S8000 Ou tdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
5.4.10 Test of the PCM lightning protectors (S8000 Outdoor BTS)

Product reference
CPC code: A0666945
This procedure applies to the PCM lightning protectors of the S8000
Outdoor BTS for GSM 900, 1800, and 11900.
Schedule
Intervention time
Tools required
DANGER
Electric shock

Location
The PCM lightning protectors are located at the plinth or the kit according to
the site configuration.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 105
Flowchart of the test procedure for the pcm lightning protectors of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
procedure
Step Action
Refer to Figure 105 "Flowchart of the test procedure for the pcm lightning
procedure.

2 Perform the visual test of the PCM lightning protectors
terminal blocks.
3 Perform the electrical test of a lightning protector

a. Disconnect the two wires of a lightning protector which is tested
(see Figure 106 "View of the PCM lightning protectors of the
b. Connect the red wire of the tester to the lightning protector wire
no.1.
c. Connect the black wire of the tester to the ground.
d. Push the button of the tester (the test value is maintained on the
display until the test button is released).
e. Note the first value.
f. Connect the red wire of the tester to the lightning protector wire
no.2.
g. Push the button of the tester to read the the test value (which is
h. Note the second value.
i. After the electrical measures:
• If at least one of both values is below 300 V, go to step 5.
j. Test another lightning protector until the full configuration.
4 Close the plinth or the kit according to the site configuration.

• Go to step 6.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Replace a lightning protector according to the replacement

procedure (see Figure 106 "View of the PCM lightning protectors of
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 106
View of the PCM lightning protectors of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
5.4.11 Test of the external alarm secondary lightning protectors (S8000

Indoor BTS and S8003 Indoor BTS)
Product reference
This procedure applies to the external alarm secondary lightning protectors
of the S8000 Indoor BTS 900, 1800, and 1900, and of the S8003 Indoor
BTS 900 and 1800.
Schedule
Perform this procedure once a year.
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 15 minutes (for each board).
Tools required
• Two flat screwdrivers
• One tubular socket wrench size 6
• One screw driver for recessed-head screws
• One stepladder (not useful for the S8003 Indoor BTS)
DANGER
Electric shock
The BTS remains supplied by the mains power supply, so take

Location
The external alarm secondary lightning protectors are located at the top of:
• the S8000 Indoor BTS cabinet (see Figure 108 "Location of the external
alarm secondary lightning protectors (ALPRO board) of the S8000
Indoor BTS" (page 287))
• the S8003 Indoor BTS cabinet (see Figure 109 "Location of the external
alarm secondary lightning protectors (ALPRO board) of the S8003
Indoor BTS" (page 288))

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 107
Test procedure for the external alarm secondary lightning protectors (S8000 and S8003 Indoor
BTS)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Procedure
Step Action
Refer to Figure 107 "Test procedure for the external alarm secondary
lightning protectors (S8000 & S8003 Indoor BTS)" (page 284) for a
flowchart of the procedure.
1 Remove the ALPRO board

a. Remove the two connectors (no.1, see Figure 110 "View of the
external alarm secondary lightning protector (ALPRO board) of
the S8000 Indoor BTS" (page 289)).
b. Undo the four nuts of the external alarm secondary lightning
protector cover.
c. Undo the two screws of the connector no.2.
d. Undo the four cross-head screws.
e. Undo the ground screw.
f. Remove the board.
2 Perform the visual test

terminal blocks.
• If there is damage, go to step 4
3 Insert the board

a. Insert the board (see Figure 110 "View of the external alarm
secondary lightning protector (ALPRO board) of the S8000
Indoor BTS" (page 289)).
b. Tighten the ground screw.
c. Tighten the four cross-head screws.
d. Tighten the two screws of the connector no.2.
e. Insert the two connectors no.1.
f. Tighten the four nuts of the external alarm secondary lightning
protector cover.
g. Go to step 5.
4 Replace the external alarm secondary lightning protector

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
. Replace the external alarm secondary lightning protector according

to the replacement procedure (see Section 6.2.64 "Replacement
of the external alarm secondary lightning protector (S8000 Outdoor
BTS)" (page 682)).
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 108
Location of the external alarm secondary lightning protectors (ALPRO board) of the S8000
Indoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 109
Location of the external alarm secondary lightning protectors (ALPRO board) of the S8003
Indoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 110
View of the external alarm secondary lightning protector (ALPRO board) of the S8000 Indoor
BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
5.4.12 Test of the fans (S8003 Indoor BTS)
Product reference
Fan S8003 Indoor NTE682AA A0512639
This procedure applies to the four fans of the S8003 Indoor BTS for GSM
900.
Schedule
Perform this test every six months.
Intervention time
Intervention time is approximately 5 minutes.
Tools required
Phillips, cross-head screwdrivers
The service is not lost.
DANGER
Electric shock

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 111
Flowchart of the test procedure of the S8003 Indoor fans

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 112
Extraction of the fan tray from the S8003 Indoor BTS cabinet
Location
The four fans are located in the fan tray of the cabinet (see Figure 112
"Extraction of the fan tray from the S8003 Indoor BTS cabinet" (page 292)).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
procedure
Step Action
Refer to Figure 111 "Flowchart of the test procedure of the S8003 Indoor
fans" (page 291) for a flowchart of the procedure.
1 Open the door.

2 Test the fans:
a. Partially extract the fan tray as follows:
• Undo the two screws securing the fan tray on the cabinet.
• Pull the fan tray forward, without unplugging the PS
connector, until view the four fans.
b. Check for the four fans rotating:

• In case of failure, note the position of the faulty fan(s),
re-insert the tray in its slot, and replace the faulty fans (see
Section 6.2.74 "Replacement of a fan (S8003 Indoor BTS)"
(page 724)).
• Otherwise, re-insert the tray in its slot.
c. Tighten the two screws securing the fan tray on the cabinet.
3 Close the doors.

—End—
5.4.13 DACS preventive maintenance

The following checks represent the minimal acceptable maintenance
procedures; failure to carry them out on a regular basis may invalidate the
warranty.
If proper maintenance is not performed on the DACS and Low Noise DACS,
the units can fail prematurely which in turn results in loss of service of the
BTS in cold weather.
DACS preventive maintenance is best performed before the onset of cold
weather.
Intervention time

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Tools required
• Philips Screwdriver
• Flathead Screwdriver
• Multimeter
• 8 MM or possibly deep 10MM well socket (or deep well socket for older
units)
• Ratchet
• 40cm or 5/32" Allen Wrench
• Needle nose pliers
• Torque wrench for 40 Inch Pounds or 4.5 Newton meters use
CAUTION
If the ambient air temperature is below 38 degrees F or 3.3
degrees C, the following procedure is not recommended. Opening
the DACS lid (cover) in low temperature conditions may result
in system outage.
CAUTION
Mechanical cabinet integrity is essential to ensure proper climatic
operations in high and low temperature conditions. If the filter is
not a Nortel Networks recommended filter, and/or there are voids
within the cabinet, (missing circuit packs, missing fillers of any
kind, and/or bulk head plates missing or not properly secured) this
may cause climatic inefficiency within the BTS, which can impact
proper system operations and cause potential service disruption.
DANGER
Electric shock
Isolate all supplies to the unit before removing the lid. Lethal
voltages are present when the unit is operating.
Procedure
Step Action
1 Turn off the power (see Section 5.4.13.1 "Turning off power" (page
296)).
2 Check for internal and external clutch release (see Section 5.4.13.2
"Modulating motor and linkages - checking for clutch release" (page
299)).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
3 Check the brass bushings on the linkage for wear, and replace if
necessary.
4 Check the control board (see Section 5.4.13.3 "Checking the

control board" (page 301)).
5 Check the blowers (see Section 5.4.13.4 "Checking the blowers"
(page 302))
6 Turn on the power (see Section 5.4.13.5 "Turning on power" (page

303))
7 Check the damper alignment (see Section 5.4.13.6 "Checking
damper alignment" (page 303)) and realign it if necessary (see
Section 5.4.13.7 "Realigning the damper" (page 304))
8 Check damper timing (see Section 5.4.13.8 "Checking damper

timing" (page 305)).
9 Check the heater (see Section 5.4.13.9 "Checking the heater"
(page 305)).
10 Reconnect P1 to the control board. All LEDs on the control board

should be illuminated.
11 Adjust the control board.
Connect a test meter to positions TP1 and TP2 on the control board.
Verify the output is 24 Vdc. If the measurement is not correct, adjust
REG1 until 24 Vdc is measured.
12 Align the damper/heater thermistor (see Section 5.4.13.10 "Aligning
the damper/heater thermistor" (page 307)).
13 Check the operation of the blowers (see Section 5.4.13.11

"Checking blower operation" (page 307)).
14 Verify the damper/heater and motor speed thermistors (see
Section 5.4.13.12 "Verifying the damper/heater and motor speed
thermistors" (page 307)).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
—End—
5.4.13.1 Turning off power
CAUTION
Turning off DC and AC power inputs
Always turn off the DC power before the AC power, to avoid
damaging the DACS control card.
Turn off the inputs in the following order:

• Turn the DC power input to the DACS to the OFF position.
• Turn the AC power input to the DACS to the OFF position.
CAUTION
Removing the DC and AC inputs will turn off the DACS fans.
The loss of air flow when the heater is still working may cause
the DACS Heater Thermostat to trip. If this occurs, reset the
thermostat as described in Section 8.2.1.11 "Heater thermostat"
(page 779).
• For systems with Phillips/Cherokee/Mitra rectifier shelves, turn the DC

power OFF on the rectifier shelf marked "Fan" (see below).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
• For systems that have Helios/APS rectifier shelves, turn the DACS circuit
breaker (CB2) on the rectifier shelf to the OFF position (see below).
• For cabinets that have an AC main, turn the DACS AC power OFF (the
blue switch at the top of the AC Main marked Cooling Unit) (see below).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
• For cabinets that have GIPS:

— Turn the DC power breaker to the OFF position. It is the bottom left
switch on the DCU, marked DACS (see below).
— Turn the AC power switch to the OFF position. It is the bottom switch
on the ADU (see below).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
5.4.13.2 Modulating motor and linkages - checking for clutch

release
You should check release of both the internal and external clutch, as
described below.
Internal clutch
CAUTION
Always set the DC and AC power inputs to off before performing
this procedure, to avoid damaging the DACS control card. See
Section 5.4.13.1 "Turning off power" (page 296).
Loosen the screw on the backside of the actuator cover and remove the
plastic cover (see below).
Depress the clutch release and check for the smooth operation of the
damper (see below).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
• Check that the motor rotation is not limited by the mechanical end stops
on the motor. If motor rotation is limited by the mechanical end stops,
realign the damper as described in Section 5.4.13.7 "Realigning the
damper" (page 304).
• Ensure the actuator arm linkage is securely attached to the actuator
arm. If it is not, replace the actuator as described in Section 6.2.21
"Replacement of the DACS actuator (S8000 Outdoor BTS)" (page 433).
• Replace the plastic actuator motor cover.
External clutch
CAUTION
Depress the clutch release button (circled in the picture below) and check
for smooth operation of the damper.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
• Check that the motor rotation is limited by the damper position stops
and not by the end stops on the motor. If motor rotation is limited by
the damper position stops, realign the damper as described in Section
5.4.13.7 "Realigning the damper" (page 304).
• Ensure the actuator arm linkage is securely attached to the actuator
arm. If it is not, replace the actuator as described in Section 6.2.21
"Replacement of the DACS actuator (S8000 Outdoor BTS)" (page 433).
5.4.13.3 Checking the control board
CAUTION
• Examine the control board for excessive deposits of dust/salts: if

necessary, remove the board to clean it.
• Examine the board for signs of excessive heat or cracking on any
components. Examine the connecting plugs for signs of heat or
cracking. If any evidence of overheating or cracking is found, replace the
control board (see Section 6.2.24 "Replacement of the DACS control
assembly (S8000 Outdoor BTS)" (page 445)).
• If you have removed the control board, reassemble it to its location within
the DACS and reconnect all the plugs to the board. (For details of how
to replace the control board, see parts of Section 6.2.24 "Replacement
of the DACS control assembly (S8000 Outdoor BTS)" (page 445).)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
5.4.13.4 Checking the blowers
CAUTION
• Inspect the fan impellers and remove any debris.

• Check that the fan impellers are securely mounted on the fan shafts.
• Rotate the impellers and ensure freedom of movement.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
5.4.13.5 Turning on power

Turn on the power in the following order to avoid tripping the DC breaker:
• Power on the AC breaker, which is on the right side of the cabinet for
all types.
• Power on the DC breaker, which is on the left hand side of the rectifier
shelf.
5.4.13.6 Checking damper alignment
ATTENTION
Power to the unit must be turned on to perform this action. See Section 5.4.13.5
"Turning on power" (page 303).
Disconnect plug P1 from the DACS control board.
ATTENTION
This action will also energize the heater, therefore it should not be prolonged.
Ensure that the damper fully closes. Short the two pins of P1 together:
the damper will begin to open. When the damper is fully open remove the
short between the two pins on P1. The damper will close. If the damper
does not fully close by the time the actuator position indicator contacts its
stop, realign the damper as described in Section 5.4.13.7 "Realigning the
damper" (page 304).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
5.4.13.7 Realigning the damper
ATTENTION
Realign the damper only if it is not correctly aligned: see Section 5.4.13.6
"Checking damper alignment" (page 303) for details of how to check the alignment.
CAUTION
If the damper is not correctly aligned, realign it as follows:

• Loosen the two M5 nuts securing the damper linkage to the actuator.
• Position the indicator at the third mark (see picture below).
• Keeping the damper closed by hand (see picture below), use a torque
tool to tighten the nuts on the damper linkage to 40 inch pounds or 4.5
NM.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
• Apply power as described in Section 5.4.13.5 "Turning on power"

(page 303), and recheck the damper alignment as described in Section
5.4.13.6 "Checking damper alignment" (page 303). If the damper
alignment is still not correct (closed and open positions) align the
damper again as described in this section.
5.4.13.8 Checking damper timing

To perform the action, turn on the power. See Section 5.4.13.5 "Turning
on power" (page 303).
If the damper’s opening time is <10s or its closing time is >30s, the actuator
may malfunction prior to the next scheduled maintenance interval (i.e. within
1 year). If this is the case and the system is located in a geographical region
in which winter temperatures fall below 14 degrees F or -10 degrees C, it
is recommended that you replace the actuator motor to avoid a possible
operation impact during extreme cold temperatures.
5.4.13.9 Checking the heater

Before checking the heater, disconnect plug P1 from the DACS control
board.
While P1 is disconnected, the heater circuit will be enabled: ensure the
yellow LED is illuminated. If the LED is not illuminated, isolate the defective
part of the heater circuit:
• For manual resetting heater thermostats:
— Ensure that the thermostat is set (to set the thermostat depress the
RED button). If it is set, measure across the leads to ensure it is not
open. If it is found to be defective replace the heater thermostat

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
(see Section 6.2.30 "Replacement of the DACS thermostat (S8000

Outdoor BTS)" (page 492)).
— Measure the resistance of the heater coil. The coil should measure
21 . If it does not measure the correct value, replace the heater
coil (see Section 6.2.28 "Replacement of the DACS heater (S8000
Outdoor BTS)" (page 485)) or the DACS (see Section 6.2.20
"Replacement of the DACS climatic system (S8000 Outdoor BTS)"
(page 426)).
— If the heater thermostat and heater are found to be good, replace
the control board (see Section 6.2.24 "Replacement of the DACS
control assembly (S8000 Outdoor BTS)" (page 445)).
• For auto resetting heater thermostats:

— Measure across the leads to ensure it is not open. If it is found to
be defective replace the heater thermostat.
ATTENTION
If performing this activity in cold weather conditions or for an extended
period of time, the thermostat may trip which causes the yellow LED to go
out. This can be verified at the NOC if they see a DACS Fail minor alarm.
If it is tripped, the heater coil cannot be measured and the heater check
cannot be completed until the thermostat has reset.
— Measure the resistance of the heater coil. The coil should measure
21 +/- 2 . If it does not measure the correct value, replace the
heater coil (see Section 6.2.28 "Replacement of the DACS heater
(S8000 Outdoor BTS)" (page 485)) or the DACS (see Section
6.2.20 "Replacement of the DACS climatic system (S8000 Outdoor
BTS)" (page 426)).
— If the heater thermostat and heater are found to be good, replace
the control board (see Section 6.2.24 "Replacement of the DACS
control assembly (S8000 Outdoor BTS)" (page 445)).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
5.4.13.10 Aligning the damper/heater thermistor

Ensure the damper/heater thermistor is correctly positioned. The bottom of

the thermistor should be positioned to be centered in the sensor window on
the left side of the DACS. If the sensor is out of position, carefully reposition
the sensor. If the sensor is not seen and cannot be repositioned, the DACS
unit should be removed to access the thermistor and reposition or replace
the DACS unit.
5.4.13.11 Checking blower operation

Check that the blowers are running smoothly and that the bearings are not
making excessive noise. On the Low Noise DACS, NTQA97BA, NTQA97AB
and NTU440AA, remove P7. The blower should increase to a higher speed.
If a motor does not increase in speed, swap the motor input cables to verify
the fault is either the control board or the motor. Reconnect P7. Blowers
deemed faulty should be replaced (see Section 6.2.33 "Replacement of a
DACS twin blower (S8000 Outdoor BTS)" (page 503)).
5.4.13.12 Verifying the damper/heater and motor speed

thermistors

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
The Damper/Heater Thermistor samples the internal cabinet temperature,

and the Motor Speed Thermistor samples the air temperature of the ambient
air entering the DACS Unit. The resistance of each thermistor varies with
temperature: to verify the thermistors, measure the resistance of each
sensor. The chart below indicates the temperature to resistance values.
Table 86
Thermistors Characteristics - Rt vs. T
T (deg Rt (k Rt (k Rt (k
T (deg C) T (deg C)
C) Ohm) Ohm) Ohm)
0 32.65
1 31.03 16 15.00 31 7.721
2 29.50 17 14.32 32 7.402
3 28.05 18 13.68 33 7.097
4 26.69 19 13.05 34 6.807
5 25.39 20 12.49 35 6.650
6 24.17 21 11.94 36 6.266
7 23.02 22 11.42 37 6.014
8 21.92 23 10.92 38 5.774
9 20.88 24 10.45 39 5.544
10 19.90 25 10.00 40 5.325
11 18.97 26 9.572 41 5.116
12 18.09 27 9.165 42 4.915
13 17.26 28 8.777 43 4.724
14 16.46 29 8.408 44 4.541
15 15.71 30 8.056 45 4.367
The temperature, for any given Rt, may be calculated from the following
equation:
T = 1 / [A +B(ln(Rt)) + C(ln(Rt))3] - 273.15 C
where, for the thermistors used, the constants A, B & C are:

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
A = 1.129241 x 10-3 ; B = 2.341077 x 10-4 ; C = 8.775468 x 10-8
Table 87
DACS Parts Cross Reference Table
DACS PEC Item could be found at Site Replac
ement
NTQA97 NTU44 Item LIEBE CPC PEC PEC Order
BA 0AA RT Code Type
NTQA9
& P/N
7AA
NTQA97
AB
X Not Appli Not Blowe L24326 A0723 NTQA9 NTQA FRU
cable Applic r -00 137 8BA 98EB
able (kit)
..
X X X Blowe L28564 A0832 NTQA9 NTQA9 FRU

r with -00 107 802 01 802
Speed
Contr
ol
X X X Blowe L40028 A0832 NTQA9 NTQA9 FRU
r with -00 107 802 02 802
Speed
Contr
ol
X X Not Blowe L29690 A0784 NTQA9 NTQA9 SRU
Applic r Cabl -01 516 803 803
able e Ada
ptater
X Not Appli Not Transf L24348 A0724 QTK71 NTQA9 FRU
cable Applic ormer -00 332 0BH 8DB
able
X X X Transf L24349 A0785 NTQA9 NTQA9 FRU
ormer -00 383 8DB 8DB
X X X Actuat L24325 A0724 NTQA9 NTQA9 FRU
or -00 282 8DA 8DA
X Not Appli Not Contr L24312 A0723 NTQA9 NTU49 FRU
cable Applic ol Ass -00 751 8EA 8AA
able embly

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
DACS PEC Item could be found at Site Replac

ement
NTQA97 NTU44 Item LIEBE CPC PEC PEC Order
BA 0AA RT Code Type
NTQA9
& P/N
7AA
NTQA97
AB
X Not Contr L28569 A0785 NTQA9 NTU49 FRU
Applic ol Ass -00 386 801 8AA
able embly
X with
Speed
Contr
ol
X X Contr L84140 A0994 NTU49 NTU49 FRU
ol Ass -00 379 8AA 8AA
embly
X with
Speed
Contr
ol
X X X Capac L24334 A0723 NTQA9 NTQA9 SRU
itor -00 678 8GA 8GA
X X X air filte L24304 A0724 NTQA9 NTQA9 FRUP
r -00 343 8AA 8AA
X X X thermi L24337 A0723 NTQA9 NTQA9 SRU
stor -00 679 8FA 8FA
Not App X X thermi L28565 A0785 NTQA9 NTQA9 FRU
licable stor -00 385 8FB 8FB
X X X filter A0724 NTQA9 NTQA9 SRU
switch 338 8HA 01 804 (kit)
X X X filter A0724 NTQA9 NTQA9 SRU
switch 338 8HA 02 804 (kit)
X X X Heate L24305 A0724 NTQA9 NTQA9 SRU
r -00 340 8JA 8JA
X X X Therm L24338 A0724 NTQA9 NTQA BP
ostat -00 335 8KA 81AA
(kit)
X X X Therm H-0451 A0520 NTQA8 NTQA8 SRU
ostat 118 111 111
(auto
reset)
X X X bush L24328 P0877 NTQA9 NTQA9 SRU
brass -00 667 8LA 8LA

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Items in the list with order type ’FRU’ should be supported by the Repair
and Return organization. To obtain other types, contact the Nortel Networks
sales engineer for your account or the Nortel Networks customer service
representative.
Figure 113
DACS or Low Noise DACS unit

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 114
DACS or Low Noise DACS unit in the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
313
Chapter 6
Replacement procedures
6.1 Introduction
6.1.1 Presentation
This chapter contains the replacement procedures applicable to the S8000
BTS and to the S8003 BTS. The operator must refer the figures to locate the
items of equipment (boards and modules) concerned by the replacement
procedures.
The structure of a replacement procedure sheet is described below.
CAUTION
BTS outage is possible
Maintenance operations may take longer than the battery’s
capacity, so BTS outage is possible. Advise the OMC-R supervisor
that alarms may occur.
6.1.2 Description of a replacement procedure sheet

A replacement procedure sheet is divided into the following paragraphs:
• the title
• four types of operation to be executed to replace an item of equipment
• the figure(s)
6.1.2.1 Main body of the procedure sheet

The main body contains the following information:
• the product reference(s)
• the intervention time
• the tools required
• the location of the item of equipment to be replaced
• the procedure which contains the following steps:

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
314 Chapter 6 Replacement procedures
— the safety instructions

— the removal operations
— the reinsertion operations
— the additional operations, which include the return to service of the
replaced item of equipment, and additional on-site checks on the
state of the replaced item of equipment
6.1.2.2 Figures
The figures are provided to help the operator perform the actions. They
show the item of equipment schematically.
6.1.3 Preliminary operations

The operations on the S8000 BTS or the S8003 BTS cabinet do not require
equipment shutdown.
DANGER
The personnel working on the cabinet must be authorized to work
according to the safety standards.
CAUTION
Wear the antistatic bracelet when performing maintenance
procedures, especially when handling boards.
CAUTION
After performing the replacement procedures, ensure that the
hood key-locks are properly secured.
DANGER
Electric shock

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 115
S8003 Indoor BTS: Type F power supply cables safety measures
6.1.4 Final checks after having performed replacement procedures

For all variants of the S8000 Outdoor BTS, check that the hood is properly
closed and locked:
• Visually check that the key lock is in the vertical position (straight up
and down).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
• Try to lift the hood at the front left and right corners.
Specific verification for the EP2 and EP2+ variants of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS:
• Verify that the back of the hood is inserted under the back-panel pins
(one on each side).
6.1.5 Tools
• Extraction tool P0850747 (inside the cabinet door)
• Screwdrivers
• Electrician’s knife
• Wrenches
• Wrenches for hexagonal head
• Tie-wraps
• Crimping tool
• Wire stripper
• Toolbox
• Adhesive tape
• Stepladder (not necessary for S8003 Indoor BTS)
6.2 Replacement procedure sheets

The re placement procedure sheets are given in the following pages. The
table below gives the numbers of the replacement sheets concerning each
item of equipment.
S8003
S8000 BTS
BTS
Replaceme
Equipment Indo
Outdoor Indoor nt sheet
or
BCF CBCF BCF CBCF CBCF
ALCO board x x Section
6.2.1 "Re
placement
of the ALCO
board" (page
335)
CMCF boards x x x Section
6.2.2 "Repl
acement of a
CMCF board

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
S8003
S8000 BTS
BTS
Replaceme
Equipment Indo
or
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS, S8000
Indoor BTS,
and S8003
Indoor BTS)"
(page 338)
CPCMI boards x x x Section
6.2.3 "Re
placement
of a CPCMI
board (S80
00 Outdoor
BTS, S8000
Indoor BTS,
and S8003
Indoor BTS)"
(page 343)
CSWM boards x x Section
6.2.4 "Re
placement
of a CSWM
board" (page
346)
DSC boards x x Section
6.2.5 "Repl
acement of a
DSC board"
(page 349)
GTW boards x x Section
6.2.6 "Repl
acement of a
GTW board"
(page 353)
PCMI boards x x Section
6.2.7 "Repl
acement of a
PCMI board"
(page 356)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
S8003
S8000 BTS
BTS
Replaceme
Equipment Indo
or
PSCMD board x x Section
6.2.8 "Re
placement of
the PSCMD
board" (page
359)
RECAL board x x x Section
6.2.9 "Re
placement of
the RECAL
board (S80
00 Outdoor
BTS, S8000
Indoor BTS,
and S8003
Indoor BTS)"
(page 362)
SYNC boards x x Section
6.2.10 "Re
placement
of a SYNC
board" (page
365)
AC box circuit x x Section
breakers 6.2.11 "Re
placement
of an AC
box circuit
breaker
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
368)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
S8003
S8000 BTS
BTS
Replaceme
Equipment Indo
or
ADU circuit x x Section
breaker 6.2.12
"Replacem
ent of the
ADU circuit
breaker
(S8000
Outdoor BTS
with GIPS)"
(page 390)
AC breaker x x Section
(battery 6.2.13 "Re
cabinet) placement
of the AC
breaker
(battery
cabinet)"
(page 391)
ACU climatic x x Section
unit 6.2.14 "Re
placement
of an ACU
climatic
unit (S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
393)
ACU filter x x Section
6.2.15 "Re
placement
and cleaning
of the ACU
filter (S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
404)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
S8003
S8000 BTS
BTS
Replaceme
Equipment Indo
or
ACU or DACS x x Section
gasket 6.2.16 "Re
placement
of the ACU
or DACS
gasket (S8
000 Outdoor
BTS)" (page
407)
Base cabinet x x Section
fan 6.2.17 "Rep
lacement of a
base cabinet
fan (S8000
Indoor BTS)"
(page 412)
BCF cabinet x Section
fan 6.2.18 "Rep
lacement of a
BCF cabinet
fan (S8000
Indoor BTS)"
(page 415)
BCF power x x Section
supply 6.2.19 "Rep
lacement of
a FANICO
board (S800
0 Indoor BTS
with BCF)"
(page 419)
DACS climatic x x Section
system 6.2.20 "Re
placement
of the DACS
climatic syst
em (S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
426)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
S8003
S8000 BTS
BTS
Replaceme
Equipment Indo
or
DACS actuator x x Section
6.2.21 "Rep
lacement of
the DACS
actuator
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
433)
DACS brass x x Section
bushing 6.2.22 "
Replacem
ent of the
DACS brass
bushing
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
438)
DACS capacit x x Section
or 6.2.23 "Rep
lacement of
the DACS
capacitor
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
441)
DACS control x x Section
assembly 6.2.24 "Rep
lacement of
the DACS
control
assembly
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
445)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
S8003
S8000 BTS
BTS
Replaceme
Equipment Indo
or
DACS filter x x Section
6.2.26 "Re
placement
of the DACS
filter (S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
478)
DACS or x x Section
Low Noise 6.2.27 "Rep
DACS air inlet lacement of
clogged switch the DACS air
inlet clogged
switch (S80
00 Outdoor
BTS)" (page
481)
DACS heater x x Section
6.2.28
"Replacem
ent of the
DACS heater
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
485)
DACS thermis x x Section
tor 6.2.29 "Re
placement
of the DACS
thermistor
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
489)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
S8003
S8000 BTS
BTS
Replaceme
Equipment Indo
or
DACS thermo x x Section
stat 6.2.30 "Re
placement
of the DACS
thermostat
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
492)
Auto-reset x x Section
DACS heater 6.2.28
thermostat "Replacem
ent of the
DACS heater
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
485)
DACS (ex x x Section
tended) 6.2.32 "Re
transformer placement
of the DACS
(extended)
transformer
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
499)
DACS twin x x Section
blowers 6.2.33 "Re
placement
of a DACS
twin blower
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
503)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
S8003
S8000 BTS
BTS
Replaceme
Equipment Indo
or
Low Noise x x Section
DACS ambient 6.2.34 "Re
thermistor placement
of the Low
Noise DACS
ambient
thermistor
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
525)
Door gasket x x x Section
6.2.35
"Replacem
ent of the
door gasket
(S8000
Indoor BTS
and S8003
Indoor BTS)"
(page 530)
Door gaskets x x Section
6.2.36
"Repair or
replacement
of the door
gaskets
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
537)
Door gasket x x Section
(battery 6.2.37
cabinet) "Replacem
ent of the
door gasket
(battery
cabinet)"
(page 549)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
S8003
S8000 BTS
BTS
Replaceme
Equipment Indo
or
DRX modules x x x x x Section
6.2.38 "Rep
lacement of a
DRX module
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS, S8000
Indoor BTS,
and S8003
Indoor BTS)"
(page 550)
External x x Section
alarm primary 6.2.39 "Rep
lightning lacement of
protectors an external
alarm prima
ry lightning
protector
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
556)
External alarm x x Section
secondary 6.2.40 "Rep
lightning lacement of
protectors the external
alarm secon
dary lightning
protector
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
560)
External batt x x Section
eries (battery 6.2.41 "Rep
cabinet) lacement of
the external
batteries
(battery
cabinet)"
(page 563)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
S8003
S8000 BTS
BTS
Replaceme
Equipment Indo
or
External x x Section
battery circuit 6.2.42 "Rep
breaker lacement of
the external
battery circuit
breaker
(Battery
cabinet NTQ
A36AA)"
(page 575)
DC breaker x x Section
(battery 6.2.43 "Re
cabinet) placement
of the DC
breaker
(battery
cabinet)"
(page 579)
Fan filter x x Section
6.2.44 "Re
placement
of the fan
filter (S8000
Indoor BTS)"
(page 582)
F-type convert x x x x x Section
er 6.2.45 "Re
placement
of an F-type
converter
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS, S8000
Indoor BTS
and S8003
Indoor BTS)"
(page 585)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
S8003
S8000 BTS
BTS
Replaceme
Equipment Indo
or
Ground fault x x Section
interrupter 6.2.46 "Rep
lacement of a
ground fault
interrupter
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS with AC
mains box)"
(page 589)
Hood gasket x x Section
6.2.47
"Repair or
replacement
of the hood
gasket (S80
00 Outdoor
BTS)" (page
598)
Internal x x Section
batteries 6.2.48 "Rep
lacement of
the internal
batteries
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
604)
Internal battery x x Section
circuit breaker 6.2.49 "Rep
lacement of
the internal
battery circuit
breaker
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
608)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
S8003
S8000 BTS
BTS
Replaceme
Equipment Indo
or
Lightning x x Section
protectors of 6.2.50 "Rep
the 48V box lacement of
the lightning
protectors
of the 48 V
box (S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
613)
PCM lightning x x Section
protectors 6.2.26 "Re
placement
of the DACS
filter (S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
478)
AC lightning x x Section
protector 6.2.52 "Re
(battery placement
cabinet) of the AC
lightning
protector
(battery
cabinet)"
(page 619)
PA, ePA or x x x x x Section
HePA modules 6.2.53 "Re
placement
of a power
amplifier
module
(S8000 Out
door &
Indoor BTS
and S8003
Indoor BTS)"
(page 625)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
S8003
S8000 BTS
BTS
Replaceme
Equipment Indo
or
HePA modules x x x Section
6.2.53 "Re
placement
of a power
amplifier
module
(S8000 Out
door &
Indoor BTS
and S8003
Indoor BTS)"
(page 625)
Power supply x x Section
rack of the 6.2.54 "Re
seven-rectifier placement
type of the power
supply rack
of the sev
en-rectifier
type (S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
632)
Power supply x x Section
rack of the 6.2.55
six-rectifier "Replacem
type ent of the
power supply
rack of the
six-rectifier
type (S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
638)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
S8003
S8000 BTS
BTS
Replaceme
Equipment Indo
or
Rectifiers of a x x Section
seven-rectifier 6.2.56 "Rep
type (500W lacement of
rectifier) a rectifier of
the seven-
rectifier
type (500W
rectifier
module)
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
648)
Rectifiers of x x Section
a six-rectifier 6.2.57 " Rep
type (600W lacement of a
rectifier) rectifier of the
six-rectifier
type (600W
rectifier
module)
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
652)
GIPS x x Section
6.2.58 "
Replacem
ent of the
GIPS (S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
654)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
S8003
S8000 BTS
BTS
Replaceme
Equipment Indo
or
Rectifiers of x x Section
the GIPS (680 6.2.59 " Rep
W rectifier) lacement of a
rectifier of the
GIPS (680W
rectifier
module)
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
659)
ADU x x Section
6.2.60 "
Replaceme
nt of the AC
Distribution
Unit (ADU)
(S8000
Outdoor BTS
with GIPS)"
(page 661)
Remote x x Section
tunable cavity 6.2.61 "
combiner Replaceme
nt of a (CC8)
remote tun
able cavity
combiner
(S8000
Indoor BTS)"
(page 663)
RF-combiner x x x x x Section
modules 6.2.62 " Rep
lacement of a
RF-combiner
module
(S8000 Out
door &
Indoor BTS,
and S8003
Indoor BTS)"
(page 667)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
S8003
S8000 BTS
BTS
Replaceme
Equipment Indo
or
Rx-splitters x x x x x Section
6.2.63 "Rep
lacement of
a Rx-splitter
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS, S8000
Indoor BTS,
and S8003
Indoor BTS)"
(page 677)
Secondary x x x Section
lightning 6.2.64 "Rep
protectors lacement of
the external
alarm secon
dary lightning
protector
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
682)
ADU AC surge x x Section
protector 6.2.65 "Re
placement
of the ADU
AC surge
protector
(S8000
Outdoor BTS
with GIPS)"
(page 684)
User AC plug x x Section
6.2.66 "Rep
lacement of
the user AC
plug (S8000
Outdoor BTS
with GIPS)"
(page 685)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
S8003
S8000 BTS
BTS
Replaceme
Equipment Indo
or
Single-phase x x Section
AC lightning 6.2.67
protector "Replacem
ent of the
single-phase
AC lightning
protector
(S8000
Outdoor BTS
with AC main
box)" (page
687)
Thermostats x x Section
6.2.68
"Replacem
ent of the
thermostats
(S8000
Outdoor
BTS)" (page
696)
Tri-phase x x Section
AC lightning 6.2.69 "Rep
protector lacement of
the tri-phase
AC lightning
protector
(S8000
Outdoor BTS
with AC main
box)" (page
700)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
S8003
S8000 BTS
BTS
Replaceme
Equipment Indo
or
Tx-filter x x x x x Section
modules 6.2.70 "Re
placement
of a Tx-filter
module (TX
-F) (S8000
Outdoor
BTS, S8000
Indoor BTS
and S8003
Indoor BTS)"
(page 708)
75 kit (S8000 x x x Section
Indoor) 6.2.71 "Rep
lacement of
the 75 Ohms
kit (S8000
Indoor BTS
and S8003
Indoor BTS)"
(page 713)
75 kit (S8000 x x Section
Outdoor) 6.2.72 "Re
placement
of the 75
Ohms kit
(S8000 BTS
Outdoor)"
(page 717)
S8003 Air filter x Section
6.2.73 "Re
placement
of the air
filter (S8003
Indoor BTS)"
(page 721)
S8003 Fans x Section
6.2.74 "Rep
lacement of
a fan (S8003
Indoor BTS)"
(page 724)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
S8003
S8000 BTS
BTS
Replaceme
Equipment Indo
or
BTS Sin x x Section
gle-phase 6.2.74 "Rep
AC lightning lacement of
protector a fan (S8003
Indoor BTS)"
(page 724)
BTS Three x x Section
-phase AC 6.2.76 "Inst
lightning allation of the
new S8000
Outdoor
BTS AC
three phase
lightning
protector"
(page 733)
6.2.1 Replacement of the ALCO board

Product reference
PEC code: NTQA21AA
CPC code: A0647420
Intervention time
Tools required
• Cross-head screwdriver
Impact of the replacement on service
CAUTION
The service is no longer supervised.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Location
The ALCO board is located on Figure 7 "Maximum equipment of an
S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with the BCF" (page 53) and Figure 32
"Overview of an S8000 Indoor BTS with the BCF cabinet" (page 102).
Procedure
Step Action
1 Safety instructions
CAUTION
Wear the antistatic bracelet when performing the
maintenance procedure described below, especially when
handling boards.
2 Removal of the ALCO board

a. Disconnect the connectors on the front panel (PWR, EXT NP,
INT, O&M IN, PCM, PCM OUT, EXT P) and separate them from
the board in order to make access to the board easier.
b. Undo the four fixing screws on the front panel of the board (see
Figure 116 "ALCO board" (page 337)).
c. Extract the board with the extraction tool and remove it.
3 Reinsertion of the ALCO board
a. Check the correctness of the PROM numbers and the position of
the straps according to the current release of the system.
b. Put the board in place by pushing on the top and bottom edges.
c. Position the board into the slot guides with the extraction tool.
d. Tighten the four fixing screws.
e. Reconnect the connectors on the front panel (EXT NP, INT, O&M
IN, PCM, PCM OUT, EXT P, PWR).
Check the state of the LEDs on the board. With the power on, the
LEDs are on. Now review the following states:
• "BIST" LED: off (on during self-test)
• "+5 V" LED: on
• "RDY" LED: on

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
—End—
Figure 116
ALCO board

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
6.2.2 Replacement of a CMCF board (S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor

BTS, and S8003 Indoor BTS)
The following tables contain product reference information for the S8000
BTS and the S8003 BTS.
Table 88
Produce reference for S8000 BTS
CMCF board Type1 NTQA66CA A0680711
CMCF board Type 2 NTQA66CB A0779822
Table 89
Product reference for S8003 BTS
Equipment PEC code CPC code
CMCF board Type 2 NTQA66CB A0779822
Intervention time
Tools required
CAUTION
If there is only one CMCF board, the service is lost.
If there is another working CMCF board, there is no impact on
the service.
If EDGE is used, you must not have a mix of Type 1 and Type 2
CMCF boards on the BTS.
If the secured loop is activated into BTS, the secured loop
supervision must disable at OCM level.
Using EDGE, CMCF Type 2 / Type 1 replacement

If EDGE is being used, the BTS must not have a mix of Type1 and Type 2
CMCF boards (see the Caution above). Also replace a CMCF Type 1 by a
CMCF Type 1 and replace a CMCF Type 2 by a CMCF Type 2.
Location for S8000 BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
The CMCF boards are located on Figure 8 "Maximum equipment of an

S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with the CBCF" (page 54) and Figure 33
"Overview of an S8000 Indoor BTS with the CBCF" (page 103).
The CMCF boards are located on Figure 42 "S8003 Indoor BTS: view of the
cabinet (H2D coupling)" (page 131).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
2 Preliminary operations
Locate the defective board.
3 Removal of a CMCF board

a. Undo the two fixing screws on the front panel of the board (see
Figure 117 "CMCF board" (page 342)).
b. Extract the board with the extraction tool and remove it.
c. Switch S1 on CMCF has four ON/OFF microswitches:

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
• Micro-Switch 1: Watchdog Enabled/Disabled (ON for WD

enabled, OFF for WD disabled)
— WD enabled (micro-switch 1 ON),
• Micro-Switch 2: Normal/Maintenance mode (ON for

Maintenance, OFF for Normal)
— Normal mode (micro-switch 2 OFF),
• Micro-Switch 3: Simplex/Duplex mode (ON for Simplex, OFF

for Duplex)
— 1 CMCF = Simplex conf. (micro-switch 3 ON),
— 2 CMCF = Duplex conf. (micro-switch 3 OFF),
• Micro-Switch 4: Secured Loop mode (ON if SL, OFF if no SL)

— No Secured Loop (micro-switch 4 OFF).
4 Reinsertion of a CMCF board

a. Ensure the hardware version number of the element is correct
and coincides with the system release.
b. Position the board into the slot guides.
c. Tighten the two fixing screws.
Check the state of the LEDs. With the power on, the LEDs are on.
Now review the following states:
• “BIST” LED: off (on during self--test)
• “+5 V” LED: on
• “RDY” LED: on
• “ON” LED: on (when the board is the active one)
• “ABIS” LED: off
• “RUN” LED: off
• One of these LEDs (on clock number):
— “CLK0”
— “CLK1”
— “CLK2”
• “OVEN” LED: on
• “LOCKED” LED: on when the board is the passive one

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
• “HLDVR” LED: off

• “LNK” LED: on
• “COL” LED: off
• RX” LED: off
• “TX” LED: off
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 117
CMCF board

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
6.2.3 Replacement of a CPCMI board (S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor

Table 90
E1 CPCMI board NTQA66BA A0680710
T1 CPCMI board NTQA66AA A0680709
Table 91
E1 CPCMI board NTQA66BA A0680710
Intervention time
Tools required
• Screwdriver
CAUTION
If there is only one CPCMI board, the service is lost.
If there is another working CPCMI board, there is no impact on
the service.

The CPCMI boards are located on Figure 8 "Maximum equipment of an
The CPCMI boards are located on Figure 42 "S8003 Indoor BTS: view of
the cabinet (H2D coupling)" (page 131).
Procedure
Step Action

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
handling boards.
3 Removal of a CPCMI board

Figure 118 "E1 CPCMI board (S8000 Outdoor/Indoor BTS and
S8003 Indoor BTS)" (page 345) and Figure 119 "T1 CPCMI
board" (page 346)).
b. Extract the board with the extraction tool and remove it.
4 Reinsertion of a CPCMI board

according to the current release of the system.
• "+5 V" LED: on
• "RDY" LED: on
• "SKP" LED: off
• "LFA" LED: off
• "NOS" LED: off (if the PCM link between the BSC and the BTS
is correct)
• "RRA" LED: off
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 118
E1 CPCMI board (S8000 Outdoor/Indoor BTS and S8003 Indoor BTS)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 119
T1 CPCMI board
6.2.4 Replacement of a CSWM board

Product reference
PEC code: NTQA09AA
CPC code: A0652927

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
CAUTION
If there is only one CSWM board, the service is lost.
If there is another working CSWM board, there is no impact on
the service.
Location
The CSWM boards are located on Figure 7 "Maximum equipment of an
S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with the BCF" (page 53), Figure 31
"Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS BCF cabinet" (page 101)
and Figure 32 "Overview of an S8000 Indoor BTS with the BCF cabinet"
(page 102).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
3 Removal of a CSWM board

a. Disconnect the Ethernet cable.
b. Undo the two fixing screws on the front panel of the board (see
Figure 120 "CSWM board" (page 349)).
c. Unlock the two extractors.
d. Remove the board.
4 Reinsertion of a CSWM board

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

and coincides with the current system release.
b. Position the new board into the slot guides.
c. Relock the extractors by pressing on it.
d. Tighten the two fixing screws.
e. Connect the Ethernet cable.
• "+5 V" LED: on
• "RDY" LED: on
• "O & M" LED: flashes during the communication between BCF
boards and O & M bus
• "ABIS" LED: off
• "ON" LED: on when the board is active
• "WDG" LED: on if self-tests have been OK (watchdog armed)
• "MRQ" LED: on after watchdog armed
• "SERV" LED: on if the board is on service
• One of the "H0", "H1", "H2" LEDs on (clock number)
• "LC" LED: off (on, it indicates a local clock)
• "TX" LED: off
• "RX" LED: off
• "LNK" LED: on
• "COL" LED: off
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 120
CSWM board
6.2.5 Replacement of a DSC board

Product reference
PEC code: NTQA05AA
CPC code: A0652323

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
CAUTION
If there is only one DSC board, the service is lost.
If there is another working DSC board, there is no impact on the
service.
Location
The DSC boards are located on Figure 7 "Maximum equipment of an S8000
Outdoor BTS base cabinet with the BCF" (page 53), Figure 31 "Maximum
equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS BCF cabinet" (page 101) and Figure 32
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
3 Removal of a DSC board

Figure 121 "DSC board" (page 352)).
b. Unlock the two extractors.
c. Remove the board.
4 Reinsertion of a DSC board

a. Ensure the PROM numbers are correct and coincide with the
system release.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

Check the state of the LEDs on the board. When powering on, the
LEDs turn on. Now review the following states:
• "+5 V" LED: on
• "RDY" LED: on
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 121
DSC board

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
6.2.6 Replacement of a GTW board

Product reference
GTW PCBA NTQA06AA*

GTW Edge ready NTQA06BA
* Do not use GTW board NTQA06AA on EDGE Network.
Prom Numbers
Table 92
Prom Numbers on GTW Board
Board Prom
NTQA06AA V02B1E04
NTQA06BA V02B2E08
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
CAUTION
When replacing a GTW board, the service is lost even if there
is another GTW board.
Location
The GTW boards are located on Figure 7 "Maximum equipment of an S8000
Outdoor BTS base cabinet with the BCF" (page 53),Figure 31 "Maximum
Procedure
Step Action

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
handling boards.
3 Removal of a GTW board

Figure 122 "GTW board" (page 355)).
4 Reinsertion of a GTW board
a. Ensure the PROM numbers (see Table 92 "Prom Numbers on
GTW Board" (page 353)) and the position of the microswitches
are correct and coincide to the system release.
Check the state of the LEDs. When powering on, the LEDs turn on.
• "+5 V" LED: on
• "RDY" LED: on
• "ON" LED: on if the board is the active one
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 122
GTW board

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
6.2.7 Replacement of a PCMI board

Product reference

E1 PCMI board NTQA04BA A0658887
T1 PCMI board NTQA04AA A0651431
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
CAUTION
If there is only one PCMI board, the service is lost.
If there is another working PCMI board, there is no impact on the
service.
Location
The PCMI boards are located on Figure 7 "Maximum equipment of an S8000
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
3 Removal of a PCMI board

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 123 "E1 PCMI board" (page 358) and Figure 124 "T1
PCMI board" (page 359)).
4 Reinsertion of a PCMI board
a. Ensure the PROM numbers and the position of the straps are
correct and coincides with the system release.
• "BIST" LED: off (on during self-test and initialization period)
• "+5 V" LED: on
• "RDY" LED: on
• "LFA" LED: off
• "AIS" LED: off
• "RRA" LED: off
• "NOS" LED: off (if the pcm link between the BSC and the BTS
is correct)
• "FE" LED: off
• "SKP" LED: off
• "CRC" LED: off
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 123
E1 PCMI board

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 124
T1 PCMI board
6.2.8 Replacement of the PSCMD board

Product reference
PEC code: NTQA08AA
CPC code: A0652929

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
CAUTION
The service is lost.
Location
The PSCMD board is located on Figure 7 "Maximum equipment of an S8000
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
Locate the faulty board.
3 Removal of the PSCMD board

a. Put the switch of the faulty board in the "O" position (see Figure
125 "PSCMD board" (page 362)).
b. Undo the two fixing screws on the front panel of the board.
c. Unlock the two extractors.
d. Remove the board.
e. Note the position of the micro-switches (TEI value).
4 Reinsertion of the PSCMD board

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
a. Check the position of the microswitches.

e. Put the switch of the new board in the "I" position.
• "PSU0" LED: on
• "PSU1" LED: on
• "PSU2" LED: on
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 125
PSCMD board
6.2.9 Replacement of the RECAL board (S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000

Indoor BTS, and S8003 Indoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA66DA

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CPC code: A0680712

Intervention time
Tools required
CAUTION
The service is not supervised.

The RECAL board is located on Figure 8 "Maximum equipment of an
The RECAL board is located on Figure 42 "S8003 Indoor BTS: view of the
cabinet (H2D coupling)" (page 131)
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
2 Removal of the RECAL board

a. Disconnect the following connectors on the front panel PWR,
EXT NP, INT, PCM, PCM OUT, EXT P (see Figure 126 "RECAL
board" (page 365)) and separate them from the board in order
to make the access to the board easier.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
b. Undo the four fixing screws on the front panel of the board.
c. Extract the board with the extraction tool and remove it.
3 Reinsertion of the RECAL board

a. Position the board into the slot guides.
b. Tighten the four fixing screws.
c. Reconnect the connectors on the front panel (EXT NP, INT, PCM,
PCM OUT, EXT P, PWR).
Check the state of the LEDs on the board. When powering on, the
LEDs turn on. Now review the following states:
• "BIST" LED off: (on during self-test)
• "+5 V" LED: on
• "RDY" LED: on
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 126
RECAL board
6.2.10 Replacement of a SYNC board

Product reference
PEC code: NTQA03AA
CPC code: A0651429

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Intervention time
Tools required
TML
CAUTION
If there is only one SYNC board, the service is lost.
If there is another working SYNC board, there is no impact on
the service.
Location
The SYNC boards are located on Figure 7 "Maximum equipment of an
"Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS BCF cabinet" (page 101)
and Figure 32 "Overview of an S8000 Indoor BTS with the BCF cabinet"
(page 102).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
a. Connect the TML on the front panel of the CSWM board.
b. Do the command "Disconnection SYNC0". For more information,
refer to NTP < 51 >.
3 Removal of a SYNC board
Figure 127 "SYNC board" (page 368)).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
4 Reinsertion of a SYNC board

and coincide with the system release.
a. With the TML, do the command "Connection SYNC0" then the
command "Connection SYNC1". For more information, refer
to NTP < 51 >.
b. Check the state of the LEDs. In the power on cycle, the LEDs
turn on and flash. Now review the following states:
• "ALARM" LED: off
• "MASTER" LED: on, if the module is the master one
• "UNLOCK" LED: off
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 127
SYNC board
6.2.11 Replacement of an AC box circuit breaker (S8000 Outdoor BTS)

This procedure applies to the following breakers:
• main circuit breaker

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
• rectifier breaker
• climatic system breaker
Product references
CPC codes of the circuit breakers:
type 1 type 2 type 3 type 4/5

single-phase AC NTQA90BA/BB NTQA90BC NTQA90BE
box:
• main circuit • A0683009 • A0733470 • A0733470
breaker
• climatic system • A0656712 • A0733469 • A0785933
breaker
• rectifier breaker • A0656712 • A0733469 • A0733469
split single-phase NTQA90AA NTQA90AB NTQA90AC
AC box:
• main circuit • A0683009 • A0733470 • A0733470
breaker
• climatic system • A0656712 • A0733469 • A0785933
breaker
• rectifier breaker • A0656712 • A0733469 • A0733469
tri-phase AC box: NTQA90CA/CB NTQA90CC NTQA90CD NTQA90FA
• climatic system • A0681956 • A0734025 • A0786049 • A0812352
breaker
• rectifier breaker • A0681956 • A0734025 • A0734025 • A0805796
WARNING
AC Box Type 3 must not be used on any ACU cabinet.
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately one hour.
Tools required
• Screwdriver
• Wrench

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
DANGER
Electric shock
The cabinet is operating on its battery power supply, if any,
otherwise the cabinet does not remain supplied with the mains
power supply.
In the case of batteries, perform the procedure without interruption,
due to the limited autonomy of the batteries.
Location
The AC circuit breakers are located on Figure 15 "Single-phase AC box
(GSM 900/1800) type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 61) to Figure 22
"Tri-phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) type 2 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS"
(page 68).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
• For a single-phase or split single-phase main power supply,
1. Ensure the battery circuit breaker is in the "I" position.
2. Put the main circuit breaker in the "O" position.
3. Turn OFF the Rectifier switch CB02 located just above the
rectifier cable.
4. Turn OFF the Cooling system switch CB03 located above the
Main Breaker switch.
5. Switch off the main power supply of the cabinet from the
operator box.
• For a tri-phase main power supply, perform the following actions.

1. Ensure the battery circuit breaker is in the "I" position.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
3. Switch off the main power supply of the cabinet from the
operator box.
3 Removal of an AC box
• For a single-phase or split single-phase AC box, perform the
following actions.
1. Disconnect the alarm cable C01 from the AC box and the
rectifier cable (see Figure 128 "Single-phase AC box (GSM
900/1800) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 376) and Figure
132 "Split single-phase AC box (GSM 1900) of the S8000
2. Undo the seven or eight securing screws no.4 on the AC box
side and remove the small cover.
3. For an AC box type 1, disconnect the input AC cable by
unscrewing the screws no.3 on the terminal block and the nut
on the ground connection (see Figure 129 "Side view of the
single-phase AC box type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page
377) and Figure 133 "Side view of the split single-phase AC
box type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 381)).
For an AC box type 2 (see Figure 130 "Side view of the
single-phase AC box type 2 or type 3 of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS" (page 378) and Figure 134 "Side view of the split
single-phase AC box type 2 or type 3 of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS" (page 382)), disconnect the input AC cable by removing
the nuts from the filters and the nut on the ground connection.
For an AC box type 2 or type 3 (see Figure 130 "Side view
of the single-phase AC box type 2 or type 3 of the S8000
Outdoor BTS" (page 378) and Figure 134 "Side view of the
split single-phase AC box type 2 or type 3 of the S8000
Outdoor BTS" (page 382)), unplug the input AC cable.
4. Remove the flange nut from the input ac cable flange by
unscrewing the large nut.
5. Undo the two securing screws no.1 and no.2 on the AC
box top and on the front panel of the AC box (see Figure
128 "Single-phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) of the S8000
Outdoor BTS" (page 376) and Figure 132 "Split single-phase
AC box (GSM 1900) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 380)).
6. Disconnect the ground cable by removing the nut.
7. Disconnect and remove the C02 rectifier cable by unscrewing
8. Remove the AC box.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
9. Undo all the screws on the left side cover of the AC box (see
Figure 131 "Side covers of the AC box of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS" (page 379)).
• For a tri-phase AC box, perform the following actions.

1. Disconnect the alarm cable C01 located on top of the
tri-phase AC box and the rectifier cable (see Figure 135
BTS" (page 383)).
2. Remove the seven or eight screws no.4 on the side of the
tri-phase AC box and remove the small cover.
• three phases
• neutral ground
• ground

7. For a tri-phase AC box type 1, disconnect the input AC cable
by unscrewing the screws no.3 on the terminal block (see
Figure 136 "Side view of the tri-phase AC box type 1 of the
For a tri-phase AC box type 2, remove the nuts from the
filters and disconnect the AC input cable by removing the
four nuts on the filter and the nut on the ground terminal (see
Figure 137 "Side view of the tri-phase AC box type 2, type 3,
type 4 or 5 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 385)).
For a tri-phase AC box type 3 or type 4, unplug the input AC
cable.
8. Remove the AC input cable gland by unscrewing the large
nut.
9. Undo the two securing screws no.1 and no.2 located on the
AC box top and on the front panel of the AC box.
11. Undo the lug located on top of the small part of the AC box.
13. Undo all the screws on the left side covers of the AC box.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
4 Removal of a circuit breaker

• If a main circuit breaker must be replaced, perform the following
actions.
1. Locate and disconnect the circuit breaker cables (see Figure
138 "Main circuit breaker of the (split) single-phase AC box of
the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 386)) by removing the four
nuts at the back of the circuit breaker.
2. Remove the two screws on the front of the circuit breaker.
3. Remove the circuit breaker.
• If a cooling system circuit breaker must be replaced, perform

the following actions.
1. Locate and disconnect the cables of the climatic system
breaker (see Figure 139 "Climatic system breaker of the
(split) single-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS"
(page 387) and Figure 140 "Climatic system breaker of the
tri-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 388)) by
removing the four or five screws no.1 located at the back
of the circuit breaker.
2. Remove the two screws no.2 located on the front of the
circuit breaker.
• If a rectifier circuit breaker must be replaced, perform the

following actions.
1. Locate and disconnect the cables of the rectifier circuit
breaker (see Figure 141 "Rectifier circuit breaker of the (split)
single-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 389)
and Figure 142 "Rectifier circuit breaker of the tri-phase AC
box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 390)) by removing
the four or five screws no.1 located at the back of the circuit
breaker.
2. Remove the two screws no.2 located on the front of the
circuit breaker.
5 Reinsertion of a circuit breaker

a. Connect all the previously marked wires on the new breaker by
tightening the four or five screws no.1 or nuts at the back of the
breaker.
b. Install the breaker.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
c. Tighten the two securing screws on the breaker front panel.
6 Reinsertion of an AC box
• For a single-phase or split single-phase AC box, perform the
following actions.
1. Tighten the screws fastening the side plate of the AC box
(see Figure 131 "Side covers of the AC box of the S8000
2. Put the AC box in its place.
3. Tighten the two screws no.1 and no.2 (see Figure 128
"Single-phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS" (page 376) and Figure 132 "Split single-phase AC box
(GSM 1900) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 380)).
4. Screw the lug located on top of the small part of the AC box.
5. Connect the rectifier cable and the alarm cable.
6. Connect the ground cable by tightening the nut.
7. Put back the flange nut of the AC input cable on by tightening
the large nut.
8. Connect the AC input cable to the terminal block by tightening
the screws no.3 and the nut on the ground connection.
9. Connect the ground cable to the ground terminal.
10. Put the small cover back on and tighten the seven or eight
no.4 screws.

1. Tighten the screws fastening the side plate of the AC box
(see Figure 131 "Side covers of the AC box of the S8000
2. Put the AC box in its place.
3. Tighten the two screws no.1 and no.2 (see Figure 135
BTS" (page 383)).
4. Screw the lug located on top of the small part of the AC box.
5. Connect the rectifier cable and the alarm cable.
6. Connect the ground cable by tightening the nut.
7. Put back the gland of the AC input cable by tightening the
large nut.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
8. Place the four wires of the tri-phase AC box lightning

protector on the filter.
9. Connect the AC input cable by tightening the four nuts on the
filter and the nut on the ground terminal.
10. Put the small cover back on and tighten the seven or eight
screws.
• For a single-phase or split single-phase main power supply,
1. Switch on the main power supply from the operator box.
2. Check the climatic system breaker, the rectifier circuit breaker
and the battery circuit breaker are in the "I" position.
3. Put the main circuit breaker in the "I" position.
• For a tri-phase main power supply, perform the following actions.

1. Switch on the main power supply from the operator box.
2. Check the battery circuit breaker is in the "I" position.
3. Put the circuit breakers of the AC box in the "I" position.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 128
Single-phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 129
Side view of the single-phase AC box type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 130
Side view of the single-phase AC box type 2 or type 3 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 131
Side covers of the AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 132
Split single-phase AC box (GSM 1900) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 133
Side view of the split single-phase AC box type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 134
Side view of the split single-phase AC box type 2 or type 3 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 135
Tri-phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 136
Side view of the tri-phase AC box type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 137
Side view of the tri-phase AC box type 2, type 3, type 4 or 5 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 138
Main circuit breaker of the (split) single-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 139
Climatic system breaker of the (split) single-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 140
Climatic system breaker of the tri-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 141
Rectifier circuit breaker of the (split) single-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 142
Rectifier circuit breaker of the tri-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6.2.12 Replacement of the ADU circuit breaker (S8000 Outdoor BTS

with GIPS)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
This procedure applies to the following breakers:

• rectifier breaker of the ADU
• DACS circuit breaker of the ADU
Product reference
ADU for S8000 (GIPS)
• PEC code: NTQA19AA
• CPC code: A0504894
Procedure
In case of rectifier breaker or DACS circuit breaker failure, replace the

ADU module of the GIPS. (See Section 6.2.60 " Replacement of the AC
Distribution Unit (ADU) (S8000 Outdoor BTS with GIPS)" (page 661)).
6.2.13 Replacement of the AC breaker (battery cabinet)

Product reference
CPC code: A0682963
Intervention time
Required tool(s)

None, provided the BTS can be battery-operated in case of AC failure.
Location
See Figure 143 "Internal view of the AC box (battery cabinet)" (page 393) to
locate the "AC" breaker in the AC box of the battery cabinet.
Warning
DANGER
Electric shock

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Procedure
Step Action
a. Ensure the battery cabinet "dc" breaker is in the "I" position.
b. Switch off the mains at the battery cabinet level ("AC" breaker
to "0").
c. SWITCH OFF THE MAINS (battery cabinet breaker only) AT
THE OPERATOR BOX LEVEL.
2 Open the battery cabinet AC box
3 Replace the AC breaker

a. Unscrew the breaker from the front of the AC box.
b. Disconnect the AC cables from the faulty breaker, two by two,
and connect them, in the same way, to the new breaker.
c. Disconnect the two alarm wires and reconnect them to the new
breaker.
d. Screw the new "AC" breaker to the AC box.
4 Close the battery cabinet AC box

Screw back the AC box cover.
a. Switch on the mains at the operator box level.
b. Switch on the mains at the battery cabinet level ("AC" breaker).
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 143
Internal view of the AC box (battery cabinet)
6.2.14 Replacement of an ACU climatic unit (S8000 Outdoor BTS)

Product reference
PEC code: NTQA95AB
CPC code: A0661992

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately two hours.
Tools required
• Screwdriver
• Ty-wraps
• Electrician knife
• 10 mm tubular hexagon box spanner (with an extension tool)
• Stepladder
DANGER
Electric shock
DANGER
Heavy lifting
An ACU is very heavy ( 40 kg).
DANGER
Location
The ACU climatic unit is located on Figure 7 "Maximum equipment of an
"Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with the
CBCF" (page 54).
Procedure
Step Action

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
handling boards.
The ACU unit can be replaced either by another ACU or by a DACS:

• To replace the climatic unit with another ACU, refer to Section
6.2.14 "Replacement of an ACU climatic unit (S8000 Outdoor
BTS)" (page 393).
• To replace the climatic unit with a DACS, refer to Section
6.2.14 "Replacement of an ACU climatic unit (S8000 Outdoor
BTS)" (page 393) to remove the ACU, and to Section 6.2.20
"Replacement of the DACS climatic system (S8000 Outdoor
BTS)" (page 426) to install the DACS.
a. Lift the ACU hood.
b. Put the climatic unit circuit breaker in the "O" position (on the
AC box).
c. Turn off the climatic unit fans (L2/CB2 circuit breaker on the PCU
front panel in the "O" position).
3 Remove the climatic unit

a. Remove the cover of the interconnection box located between
the climatic units.
b. Disconnect all the cables leading to the failed climatic unit and
take care to mark them (see Figure 144 "ACU climatic units of
the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 398) and Figure 145 "Climatic
unit interconnection box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 399)):
For a single-phase or split single-phase mains power supply
, perform the following actions.
1. on TB3: ACU0 (for left ACU) and/or ACU1 (for right ACU)
2. on TB2: PH1, PH2 and GND for the faulty ACU
3. on TB1: -48 V and RTN for the faulty ACU
For a tri-phase mains power supply, perform the following

actions.
1. on TB3: ACU0 (for left ACU) and/or ACU1 (for right ACU)
2. on TB2: ACU0, ACU1, N, and GND
3. on TB1: -48 V and RTN (for the faulty ACU)
411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
c. Put back the cover of the interconnection box.

d. Put the climatic unit circuit breaker in the "I" position.
e. Power on the climatic unit fans (L2/CB2 circuit breaker on the
PCU front panel in the "I" position).
f. Unscrew the six fixing screws of the failed climatic unit (three on
the right side and three on the left side).
g. Remove the drain tube from the left side of the climatic unit.
h. Lift up the climatic unit to avoid damage on the gasket behind
the ACU base.
i. Remove the climatic unit.
CAUTION
Equipment damage
Be careful when handling the ACUs. Do not turn them
upside down.
4 Reinsert the climatic unit

The ACU climatic units are delivered to be placed on the right in
the cabinet.
CAUTION
Equipment damage
Be careful when handling the ACUs. Do not turn upside
down them. See the labels "HAUT" (top) and "BAS"
(bottom).
The procedure below explains how to prepare these ACUs to put

them on the left of the cabinet.
a. Remove the right plate by unscrewing the screws.
b. Cut the Ty-wrap of the yellow ground wire.
c. Put the gray cables (48 V, 220 V) behind the pump (see Figure
146 "Cable exit of an ACU of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page
400)).
d. Put the big gray cable (220 V) through the low hole.
e. Put the small gray cable (48 V) and the yellow cable through
the top hole.
f. Insert the plate by tightening the screws.
g. Let an about 65 cm length of the cables exceed.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
h. Insert two washers on the plate.

i. Wind the remaining yellow cable inside the ACU, then put a
Ty-wrap and put another Ty-wrap 10 cm from the wire exit.
j. Cut the exhaust pipe 18,4 mm from the kit.
1. Fix a bend on the exhaust pipe.
2. Fix the exhaust pipe on the ACU exit pipe.
k. Isolate the lugs.
CAUTION
Equipment damage
Be careful when handling the ACUs. Do not turn
upside down them.
l. Glue the gasket.
5 Reinsertion of the left and right ACUs

a. Put back the replacement climatic unit.
b. Screw and tighten the six fixing screws.
c. Power off the climatic unit fans (circuit breaker L2/CB2 on the
PCU front panel).
d. Put the climatic unit circuit breaker in the "O" position.
e. Remove the cover of the interconnection box.
f. Connect all the cables reaching the climatic unit.
g. Put back the cover of the interconnection box.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 144
ACU climatic units of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 145
Climatic unit interconnection box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 146
Cable exit of an ACU of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6 Programming of the ACUs.

The following table should be used with sub-step a item 3below.
P01 C (the displaying of the temperature is in Celsius

degrees)
P02 nor (the control mode is set by thresholds)
P03 off (the external probe is put into the ‘out of use’ state)
P04 on
P05 on
P06 off

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
P07 off
P08 off
P09 off
P10 off
P11 off
The following table must be used for sub-step b item 2 below.
P01 40 (temperature threshold for triggering the refrigeration

if T>P01)
P02 37 (temperature threshold for shutting down the
refrigeration if T<P02)
P03 10 (temperature threshold for shutting down the heating
if T>P03)
P04 5 (temperature threshold for triggering the heating if
T<P04)
P05 to P08 are non accessible variables
P09 65 (upper temperature threshold =3D> alarm if T>P09)
P10 0 (lower temperature threshold =3D> alarm if T<P10)
P11 120 (time delay)
P12 600 (time delay before an alarm is set off, when the
temperature is above the upper temperature threshold,
in seconds)
P13 600 (time delay before an alarm is set off, when the
temperature is below the lower temperature threshold,
in seconds)
P14 0 (non modifiable data)
P15 0 (non modifiable data)
The P01 and P02 variables can be displayed only if the P02 variable
of PROGRAM #2 is initialized with the " nor " value.
CAUTION
The parametrizing of each ACU must be respected.
Perform the various actions of PROGRAM #2 in the correct order,

and then those of PROGRAM #1.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
a. PROGRAM #2
1. Step 1: Press the PROG key (see Figure 147 "Different sides
of an ACU of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 403)) and hold
it down for approximately 3 seconds until the Pr1 mnemonic
is displayed. Keep the PROG key pressed down for another
3 seconds until the Pr2 mnemon ic is displayed. Release the
key. The P01 characters are displayed.
2. Step 2: Press the PROG key again to display the initial value
of the P01 variable. To modify the value of P01, use the [^]
and [v] arrows, and choose from the possible values.
3. Step 3: Carry out these operations for the parameters P01
to P11 while taking into consideration:
• pressing the PROG key the first time displays the name
of the variable ; press a second time the PROG key to
display the initial value of the variable.
• to change the value of variable, use the [^] and [v] arrows.
The variables must be initiated with the following values:

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 147
Different sides of an ACU of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
4. Step 4: Bring PROGRAM #2 to an end by pressing the

PROG key and keeping it down until the End characters are
displayed. Then the controller displays the temperature (in
Celsius degrees) of the internal air circulation in the BTS.
b. PROGRAM #1
1. Step 5: Press the PROG key and keep it down approximately
3 seconds until the Pr1 mnemonic is displayed. Release the
key. The P01 characters are displayed.
2. Step 6: Proceed as for PROGRAM #2, regarding the P01 to
P15 variables (refer to the step 3).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
The variables must be initiated with the values shown at the

beginning of this step.
3. Step 7: Bring PROGRAM #1 to an end by pressing the
PROG key and keeping it down until the End characters are
displayed. Then the controller displays the temperature, in
Celsius degrees.
CAUTION
201)
a. Pull down the ACU hood.

b. Turn on the climatic unit fans (circuit breaker L2/CB2 on the
PCU front panel).
c. Put the climatic unit circuit breaker in the "I" position.
—End—
6.2.15 Replacement and cleaning of the ACU filter (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
CPC code: A0669490
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 5 minutes for the replacement and
5 minutes for the cleaning.
Tools required
• RP Super filter coat spray (ZERO Mc Lean reference 52-6064-03,
Research Products reference 412)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
DANGER
Electric shock

Location
The ACU filter is located on Figure 148 "View of the ACU filter of the S8000
Outdoor BTS" (page 407).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
Open the hood.
3 Removal of the ACU filter

a. Undo the filter screw (see Figure 148 "View of the ACU filter of
b. Lift the filter high enough for bottom to clear the lower filter
retainer.
c. Pull the bottom of the filter forward pressing downward until the
top of the filter clears the upper filter retainer.
d. Carefully remove the filter if the unit is in operation. This is to
ensure dirt from the filter does not enter the air intake opening.
4 Reinsertion of the ACU filter
a. Insert the old filter cleaned beforehand or a new filter by sliding
the filter top into the upper retainer.
b. Push the filter against the unit and slide the filter bottom into
the lower retainer.
c. Tighten the filter screw in the upper retainer.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
201).
Close the hood.

6 Cleaning of an ACU filter
Once removed, the filter can be cleaned on site or it can be taken
back to the warehouse and cleaned. The filter cleaned can be used
the next time a filter is dirty.
a. Flush the filter with warm water from the exhaust side to the
intake side. DO NOT USE CAUSTICS.
b. Place the filter so one of its corners is pointing down, allowing
for complete drainage.
c. Recoat the filter with the RP Super Filter Coat spray by spraying
liberally from both sides, avoid any excessive application which
causes running and dripping.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 148
View of the ACU filter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6.2.16 Replacement of the ACU or DACS gasket (S8000 Outdoor BTS)

Product reference

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CPC codes:
• gasket between the cabinet and the ACUs R0117928

• gasket between the cabinet and the DACS P0875234
• gasket between the cabinet and the DACS P0991757
EP4
• DACS environmental gasket (length 0,956m) R0117842
• ACU environmental gasket (length 4,24m) R0117842
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 30 minutes per gasket.
Tools required
• Lint free cloth
• Solvents MEK or Acetone IPA
• Knife
• Quick set adhesive Permabond 105
• Roller hand 3/4″ wide 60 durometer
• Rubber gloves talcum free
• Safety glasses
DANGER
Electric shock
For a BTS with ACUs, the BTS remains supplied with the mains
power supply, so take care while handling the equipment.
For a BTS with a DACS, the BTS does not remain supplied with
the mains power supply.

Location
The ACU or DACS gaskets are located between the cabinet and the ACUs
or DACS.
Procedure
Step Action

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
handling boards.
Remove the ACU or the DACS (see Section 6.2.14 "Replacement
of an ACU climatic unit (S8000 Outdoor BTS)" (page 393) and
Section 6.2.20 "Replacement of the DACS climatic system (S8000
3 Removal of a gasket
a. Remove the old gasket from the aluminum surface.
DANGER
Wear gloves and safety glasses for protection against
ejection.
b. Clean the surface as follows:

1. Use a lint free cloth applicator moistened with solvents
MEK or Acetone IPA to wash the aluminum surface until the
pressure sensitive adhesive is removed.
2. Continue cleaning until all the traces of the pressure sensitive
adhesive and the film residue are removed.
3. Let the surface dry for five minutes at ambient temperature.
c. Determine the length of the gasket required and cut it with a knife
to the size with a 45 angle at each extremity.
4 Reinsertion of a gasket
a. Remove the release liner three to four inches at a time.
b. Put the gasket adhesive in place by pressing firmly on the
surface (see Figure 149 "View of the ACU gasket of the S8000
Outdoor BTS" (page 411) and Figure 150 "View of the DACS
gasket of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 412)).
c. Roll the gasket with a moderate pressure to glue it with a rubber
roller 3/4″ wide.
d. Repeat the last operation this time with enough force to collapse
the ’D’ portion of the gasket. This pressure will ensure a full

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
contact of the pressure sensitive adhesive to the aluminum

surface.
CAUTION
Equipment damage
Ensure the alignment of the roller to the top of the
gasket surface. This rolling of the gasket shall be done
at least two times on the entire length of the gasket.
e. Achieve a full adhesive strength of the bond within 12 hours.

f. Join the corners by using a quick set adhesive (Permabond 105).
g. Inspect visually if the unbounded areas of the gasket are
remaining.
Reinstall the ACU or the DACS (see Section 6.2.14 "Replacement
of an ACU climatic unit (S8000 Outdoor BTS)" (page 393) and
Section 6.2.20 "Replacement of the DACS climatic system (S8000
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 149
View of the ACU gasket of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 150
View of the DACS gasket of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6.2.17 Replacement of a base cabinet fan (S8000 Indoor BTS)

Product reference
PEC code: not applicable
CPC code: A0682272

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Intervention time
Tools required
Cross-head screwdriver
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The fan is located on Figure 32 "Overview of an S8000 Indoor BTS with the
BCF cabinet" (page 102) and Figure 33 "Overview of an S8000 Indoor BTS
with the CBCF" (page 103).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
a. Push down or up the two locks of the fan unit.
b. Remove the cover.
c. Locate the defective fan.
d. Check the fuse on the front panel of the faulty fan:
• If the fuse is faulty, replace it (Shop Replaceable Unit).
• If the fuse is correct, replace the fan (Field Replaceable Unit).
e. After the replacement of the fuse, the associated fan should be

turning. Otherwise, replace the fan.
3 Removal of a fan

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
a. Disconnect the fan power lead.

b. Undo the four fixing screws on the front panel of the fan (see
Figure 151 "Base cabinet ventilation rack of the S8000 Indoor
BTS" (page 415)).
c. Extract the fan and remove it.
4 Reinsertion of a fan
a. Insert the fan into the ventilation rack.
c. Reconnect the fan power lead.
a. Reinsert the cover.
b. Push the cover.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 151
Base cabinet ventilation rack of the S8000 Indoor BTS
6.2.18 Replacement of a BCF cabinet fan (S8000 Indoor BTS)

Product reference
CPC code: A0682269
Intervention time

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

Tools required
• head screwdriver
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The fan is located on Figure 31 "Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor
BTS BCF cabinet" (page 101).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 152
BCF cabinet ventilation of the S8000 Indoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 153
Top view of the BCF cabinet of the S8000 Indoor BTS
a. Locate the defective fan owing to the hand.
b. Check the fuse on the front panel of the faulty fan:
• If the fuse is faulty, replace it.
• If the fuse is correct, replace the fan.
c. After the replacement of the fuse, the associated fan should be

turning. Otherwise, replace the fan.
3 Removal of a fan
a. Disconnect the fan power lead.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
b. Undo the two "quarter turn" on the front panel of the BCF cabinet
and move forward the plate of the FANICO board (see Figure
152 "BCF cabinet ventilation of the S8000 Indoor BTS" (page
417)) with a screwdriver.
c. Undo the sixteen screws on the BCF cabinet protection grid.
d. Remove the protection grid.
e. Undo the four fan screws.
f. Extract the fan and remove it.
CAUTION
Equipment damage
Be careful nothing falls in the hole.
4 Reinsertion of fan
a. Insert the fan.
b. Tighten the four fan nuts.
c. Replace the protection grid.
d. Tighten the sixteen screws on the BCF cabinet protection grid.
e. Replace the plate of the FANICO board and tighten the two
"quarter turn" on the front panel of the BCF cabinet
f. Reconnect the fan power lead.
—End—
6.2.19 Replacement of a FANICO board (S8000 Indoor BTS with BCF)

Product reference
PEC code: NTQA6545
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
Location
The FANICO board is located on Figure Figure 143 "Internal view of the AC
box (battery cabinet)" (page 393)
Procedure
Step Action
a. Power off the BCF cabinet. If necessary, refer to section 3.
2 Removal of the FANICO board
a. Unplug the three wires between the FANICO board and the
three fans.
b. Undo the two “quarter turn” on the plate of the FANICO board
(see the front panel of the BCF cabinet).
c. Move the plate of the FANICO board slantwise, as the FANICO
board is still connected to its power lead on the left side.
d. Disconnect the FANICO board power lead.
e. Unscrew the five fixing screws on the FANICO board.
f. Slide the FANICO board horizontally under the three 800mA
fuses to remove it from the BCF cabinet.
3 Reinsertion of the FANICO board
a. Slide the FANICO board horizontally under the three 800mA
fuses to insert it inside the BCF cabinet.
b. Tighten the five fixing screws on the FANICO board.).
c. Reconnect the FANICO board power lead.
d. Plug the three wires between the FANICO board and the three
fans.
e. Redo the two “quarter turn” on the plate of the FANICO board
a. Power on the BCF cabinet. If necessary, refer to section 3.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
—End—
Replacement of a FANICO board (S8000 Indoor BTS with CBCF)

Product reference
PEC code: NTQA6545
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
Cross-head screwdriver
None
Location
The FANICO board is located behind the ventilation rack at the bottom of
the base cabinet (refer to Figure 1--19 in NTP 63).
Procedure
Step Action
a. Put the FANS switch (located in the DC compartment) in the “O”
position to switch off the ventilation unit. (See Figure 154 "View
of the S8000 Indoor BTS with CBCF ventilation unit" (page 422)).
2 Removal of the FANICO board
a. Push down or up the two locks of the ventilation grid.
b. Remove the ventilation grid.
c. Undo the four screws of the ventilation rack.
d. Remove the ventilation rack.
e. Unscrew the five fixing screws on the FANICO board.
f. Disconnect the FANICO board power lead.
g. Unplug the three wires between the FANICO board and the
three fans.
h. Remove the FANICO board.
3 Reinsertion of the FANICO board

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
a. Insert the FANICO board.

b. Tighten the five fixing screws on the FANICO board.
c. Connect the FANICO power lead.
d. Plug the three wires between the FANICO board and the three
fans.
e. Replace the ventilation rack.
f. Tighten the four screws of the ventilation rack.
g. Replace the ventilation grid and click on the two locks.
4 Additional operations. Put the FANSswitch (located in the
DCcompartment) in the “I” position to switch on the ventilation unit.
—End—
Figure 154
View of the S8000 Indoor BTS with CBCF ventilation unit
Replacement of a BCF power supply

Product reference
PEC code: NTQA02CA
CPC code: A0665540

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
None
Location
The BCF power supplies are located on Figures:
• Figure 7 "Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet
with the BCF" (page 53)
• Figure 8 "Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet
with the CBCF" (page 54)
• Figure 31 "Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS BCF cabinet"
(page 101),
• Figure 32 "Overview of an S8000 Indoor BTS with the BCF cabinet"
(page 102)
• Figure 33 "Overview of an S8000 Indoor BTS with the CBCF" (page 103)
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
a. Locate the defective module.
b. Put the switch of the BCF power supply in the “O” position.
3 Removal of the BCF power supply

a. Undo the two fixing screws on the front panel.
b. Extract the module by pulling the two extraction handles forward
(see Figure 155 "BCF power supply" (page 425)).
4 Reinsertion of the BCF power supply

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
a. Insert the power supply into the cabinet.

b. Secure the module by pressing on the two front--panel extraction
handles.
5 Additional operations. Put the switch of the BCF power supply in
the “I” position.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 155
BCF power supply

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
6.2.20 Replacement of the DACS climatic system (S8000 Outdoor BTS)

Product reference

DACS climatic system NTQA97AA A0687115
DACS Low Noise upgrade kit NTQA97AB A0744781
Low Noise DACS climatic system NTQA97BA A0758314
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 1 hour.
Tools required
• Allen wrench
• Wrench for M6 hexagonal head
CAUTION
DANGER
Heavy lifting
A DACS is very heavy ( 42kg).
DANGER
The operationalState of the btsSiteManager object is "disabled".

Location

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
The DACS climatic system is located on Figure 7 "Maximum equipment of

an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with the BCF" (page 53) and Figure
8 "Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with the
CBCF" (page 54).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
• In the case of a power supply rack of the six-rectifier type,
1. Open the hood and doors of the cabinet.
2. In the case of a single-phase or split single-phase AC box,
put the main circuit breaker in the "O" position.
In the case of a tri-phase AC box, press the general stop
button.
3. Put the L2 circuit breaker of the PCU in the power supply
rack.
• In the case of a power supply rack of the seven-rectifier type,

1. Open the hood and doors of the cabinet.
button.
3. Remove the PCU cover from the power supply rack by
removing the four cover screws.
4. Put the CB2 circuit breaker on the PCU power supply rack
in the "I" position.
5. Put the PCU cover on the power supply rack.
6. Tighten the four screws on the PCU cover.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
• In the case of a GIPS, perform the following actions.

1. Put the battery circuit breaker of the DCU of the GIPS in the
"OFF" position.
2. Put the two rectifier circuit breakers of the ADU of the GIPS
in the "OFF" position.
3. Put the DACS circuit breaker of the DCU of the GIPS in the
"OFF" position.
4. Put the DACS circuit breaker of the ADU of the GIPS in the
"OFF" position.
3 Removal of the DACS climatic system

a. Remove the four quarter turns from the access filter plate (see
Figure 156 "DACS climatic system of the S8000 Outdoor BTS"
(page 430)).
b. Remove the access filter plate.
c. Remove the filter.
d. Remove the four quarter turns from the large cover.
e. Lift the large cover and remove the ground wire on the right side.
f. Remove the large cover.
g. Disconnect all wires related to the climatic system from the
interconnection box.
In the case of a single-phase mains power supply, locate the
following items of equipment.
• On TB1: there are three input wires, one Phase sector, one
Neutral, and one Ground input wire
• One alarm connector
• Two battery wires: one black "+0 V" and one blue "-48 V".
In the case of a tri-phase mains power supply, locate the

following items of equipment.
• On TB1: there are four sector input wires, two Phases, one
Neutral, and one Ground
• One alarm connector
• Two battery wires: black "+0 V" and blue "-48 V"
1. Remove the two nuts fastening the battery wires.

2. Disconnect the three or four "Faston" lugs of the sector input
wires.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
3. Disconnect the alarm connector.
h. Unscrew the two cruciform screws on the left side of the

protective plastic plate.
i. Remove the protective plastic plate.
j. Remove the five hexagon screws from the following location in
the bottom of the DACS:
1. three screws under the filter on the front of the DACS
2. two screws, each located on opposite ends at the back of
the DACS.
k. Cut the two alarm wires of the cabinet hood.

l. Raise the climatic system to avoid damaging the watertight and
airtight seal located below it.
m. Remove the climatic system.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 156
DACS climatic system of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 157
DACS interconnection box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
4 Reinsertion of the DACS climatic system

a. Place a climatic system (DACS) nearby.
b. Tighten the two cruciform screws from the plastic protective plate.
c. Remove the plastic protective plate.
d. Tighten the five hexagon screws at the bottom of the climatic
system (DACS).
e. Install the plastic protective plate.
f. Tighten the two screws.
g. Plug in the alarm connector.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
h. Connect the three or four sector "Faston" lugs for the wires.
i. Tighten the two nuts holding the battery wires.
j. Move the two cabinet hood alarm wires to the left out of the
climatic system (DACS).
k. Expose the extremities of the following wires:
1. the two cabinet hood alarm wires
2. the two wires exiting the climatic system (DACS).
l. Use the side of the lug to crimp an exposed DACS wire extremity.
m. Use the other side of the lug to crimp the second exposed DACS
wire extremity.
n. Crimp the two cabinet hood alarm wires on the second lug link.
o. Install the large cover by fastening the right side of the ground
bar.
p. Tighten the four quarter turns of the large cover.
q. Insert the filter.
r. Install the access filter plate.
s. Tighten the four quarter turns of the access filter plate.
CAUTION
201)
• In the case of a power supply rack of the six-rect ifier type,

1. Put the L2 circuit breaker on the PCU power supply rack in
the "I" position.
put the main circuit breaker in the "I" position.
button.
3. Close the hood and the doors of the cabinet.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
• In the case of a power supply rack of the seven-rectifier type,

1. Remove the PCU cover screws from the power supply rack
and remove the PCU cover.
button.
3. Put the CB2 circuit breaker on the PCU power supply rack
4. Put the PCU cover on the power supply rack.
5. Tighten the four PCU cover screws.
• In the case of a GIPS, perform the following actions.

"ON" position.
"ON" position.
in the "ON" position.
"ON" position.
—End—
6.2.21 Replacement of the DACS actuator (S8000 Outdoor BTS)

Product reference
PEC code: NTQA98DA
CPC code: A0724282
Intervention time
Tools required
• Stepladder

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
• Allen wrench
CAUTION
Location
The DACS actuator is located on Figure 274 "DACS or Low Noise DACS
unit" (page 763)
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
a. Open the hood and the doors of the cabinet.
b. In the case of an AC mains box, perform the following actions.
1. Put the battery circuit breaker in the "O" position.
3. In the case of a tri-phase AC box, press the general stop
button.
4. Put the circuit breaker "FAN" on the PCU of the rectifier shelf
in the "O" position.
5. Unscrew the four quarter turn fasteners of the DACS cover
and remove it cautiously.
c. In the case of a GIPS, perform the following actions.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
"OFF" position.
"OFF" position.
"OFF" position.
3 Removal of the actuator

a. Loosen the nut holding on the actuator cover and remove the
cover.
b. Disconnect the connector from the actuator.
c. Push in the clutch: the damper can be positioned where it is
easiest to work on.
d. Loosen the two flanged hex nuts no.1 on the actuator.
e. Remove the hex lock nut no.2 and the flat washer from the
actuator arm.
f. Slide out the actuator arm from the actuator, also remove the
brass bushing.
g. Remove the three Philips head screws.
4 Reinsertion of the actuator
a. Tighten the three Philips head screws.
b. Insert the brass brushing, and insert the actuator arm in the
actuator.
c. Tighten the two flanged hex nuts no.1 on the actuator.
d. Insert the flat washer and the hex lock nut no.2.
e. Connect the connector to the actuator.
f. Insert the cover and tighten the screw holding the actuator cover.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
201).
a. Insert the DACS cover and screw its eight 1/4 turn fasteners.
1. Put the breaker "FAN" on the PCU of the rectifier shelf in
the "I" position.
In the case of a tri-phase AC box, put all the circuit breakers
3. Put the battery circuit breaker in the "I" position.
4. Close the doors and the hood of the cabinet.

"ON" position.
"ON" position.
"ON" position.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 158
View of the DACS of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 159
DACS actuator of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6.2.22 Replacement of the DACS brass bushing (S8000 Outdoor BTS)

Product reference
PEC code: NTQA98LA
CPC code: P0877667

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Intervention time
Tools required
• Stepladder
• Allen wrench
CAUTION
Location
The DACS brass bushing is located on Figure 274 "DACS or Low Noise
DACS unit" (page 763)
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
button.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.


"OFF position.
"OFF" position.
"OFF" position.
3 Removal of the brass bushing

a. Remove the nut and the flat washer from the linkage.
b. Slide off the linkage.
c. Remove the brass bushing.
4 Reinsertion of the brass bushing
a. Insert a new brass bushing.
b. Insert the linkage.
c. Insert the nut: do not overtighten it since the linkage must rotate.
CAUTION
201).
the "I" position.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.


"ON" position.
"ON" position.
"ON" position.
—End—
6.2.23 Replacement of the DACS capacitor (S8000 Outdoor BTS)

Product reference
PEC code: NTQA98GA
CPC code: A0723678
Intervention time
Tools required
• Stepladder
• Allen wrench
CAUTION

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Location
The DACS capacitor is located on Figure 274 "DACS or Low Noise DACS
unit" (page 763)
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
button.

"OFF" position.
"OFF" position.
"OFF" position.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
3 Removal of the capacitor

a. Unscrew the two cruciform screws to remove the plastic piece.
b. Identify and clearly label each capacitor lead.
c. Remove all the leads.
d. Unscrew the screw no.1.
e. Remove the capacitor.
4 Reinsertion of the capacitor

a. Insert the capacitor and tighten the screw no.1.
b. Connect all the leads.
c. Put the plastic piece in place.
d. Tighten the two screws.
CAUTION
201).
the "I" position.

"ON" position.
"ON" position.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
"ON" position.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 160
DACS capacitor of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6.2.24 Replacement of the DACS control assembly (S8000 Outdoor BTS)

The DACS control assembly can be replaced either by another DACS
control assembly or by using a DACS control kit. However the customer can
only put in an order for a DACS control kit.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 161
Control Board NTU498AA
Performing this procedure implies the identification of the DACS type

(Standard DACS or Low Noise DACS) before some actions.
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
Location
The DACS control assembly is located in the Standard DACS or in the Low
Noise DACS (see Figure 274 "DACS or Low Noise DACS unit" (page 763)).
The Figure 162 "DACS filter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 448) shows
the old control board and the figure above displays the current control board.
The Low Noise DACS is located on Figure 162 "DACS filter of the S8000
Outdoor BTS" (page 448)
Identification of the DACS type
To identify the type of DACS, perform the following actions:
Step Action

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
handling boards.
2 Open the hood and the doors of the cabinet.
3 Remove the filter to check the presence of an ambient thermistor:

a. remove the four quarter turns from the access filter plate (see
Figure 162 "DACS filter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 448)),
b. remove the access filter plate,
c. remove the filter,
d. check the presence of an ambient thermistor (see Figure 274
"DACS or Low Noise DACS unit" (page 763) and Figure 162
"DACS filter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 448)),
e. insert the filter,
f. install the access filter plate,
g. tighten the four quarter turns of the access filter plate.
4 If the ambient thermistor is missing, the DACS is a Standard DACS.
5 If the ambient thermistor is present, the DACS is a Low Noise DACS.
—End—
The three following paragraphs describe the replacement of a DACS control
assembly by the DACS control board NTU498AA.
It is always possible to use the old version (NTQA9801) of the DACS control
board. The required position of the switch SW1 is the same as for the
NTU498AA in the configurations detailed below.
Each paragraph corresponds to a possible configuration of the DACS on site:
• Low Noise DACS,
• Standard DACS without transfer board,
• Standard DACS already including a transfer board.
Choose the corresponding procedure among the three paragraphs.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
ATTENTION
The other items of the DACS control kit can be used to replace their existing
equivalent. However it is recommended to replace them once the replacement
of the DACS control assembly has been completed.
Figure 162
DACS filter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
6.2.24.1 Replacement for a Low Noise DACS

Product reference
PEC code: NTU498AA: DACS control board
CPC code: A0994379: DACS control board
Intervention time
Tools required
• Stepladder
• Allen wrench
CAUTION
Location
The DACS control assembly is located on Figure 274 "DACS or Low Noise
DACS unit" (page 763) (see item ‘Printed circuit assembly (PCA) for control
and distribution power’ on this figure).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
a. Open the hood and the doors of the cabinet if not done yet.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

button.
4. Unscrew the four quarter turn fasteners of the Low Noise
DACS cover and remove it cautiously.

"OFF" position.
"OFF" position.
"OFF" position.
3 Removal of the DACS control assembly

a. Identify and clearly label all the connectors on the DACS control
assembly (see Figure 163 "Control assembly of the Low Noise
DACS & DACS control kit of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page
471)).
b. Remove all the connectors from the DACS control assembly.
c. Lift the DACS control assembly off from the four plastic standoffs.
4 Reinsertion of the DACS control assembly by using a DACS control

kit
a. Insert the DACS control assembly included in the DACS control
kit on the four plastic standoffs (the transfer board of the DACS
control kit is not used).
b. Insert and connect all the connectors on the DACS control
assembly (see Figure 164 "Wiring for the Low Noise DACS"
(page 472) for the DACS control assembly and "P7" connectors
wiring indications).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
c. Ensure that dip switches "H1" "SW1" and "SW2" (see Figure 163
"Control assembly of the Low Noise DACS & DACS control
kit of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 471)) are set as follows:
• H1 in position 2
• SW2: ’1’ = ON, ’9’ = ON and all others OFF.
• SW1: ’1’ = OFF, ’2’ = ON and ’3’ = OFF.
CAUTION
201).
a. Insert the Low Noise DACS cover and screw its eight 1/4 turn
fasteners.
the "I" position.

"ON" position.
"ON" position.
"ON" position.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
—End—
6.2.24.2 Replacement for a Standard DACS without transfer

board
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA9803 DACS BLOWER CABLE ADAPTER
CPC code: A0784516 DACS BLOWER CABLE ADAPTER
Intervention time
Tools required
• Stepladder
• Allen wrench
CAUTION
Location
DACS unit" (page 763) (see item ‘Printed circuit assembly (PCA) for control
Procedure
Step Action

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
handling boards.
button.

"OFF" position.
"OFF" position.
"OFF" position.

assembly.
If the DACS control assembly includes "P4A" and P4B" three-pin
connectors, indications of the existing wiring of those ones are
given on Figure 165 "Wiring for the Standard DACS without
DACS control kit nor DACS multispeed blower kit" (page 473).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
If the DACS control assembly includes "P4A" and "P4B" five-pin

given on Figure 167 "Wiring for the standard DACS with a control
assembly and two multispeed blowers" (page 475).
4 Reinsertion of the DACS control assembly and possibly insertion of
a transfer board by using a DACS control kit
kit on the four plastic standoffs.
If the DACS control assembly previously removed includes "P4A"
and "P4B" five-pin connectors, the transfer board of the DACS
control kit is not used.
and "P4B" three-pin connectors, the transfer board of the DACS
control kit is used. The transfer board is located on Figure 166
"DACS transfer board of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 474)
b. If the DACS control assembly previously removed includes
"P4A" and "P4B" five-pin connectors, insert and connect all the
connectors on the DACS control assembly (see Figure 167
"Wiring for the standard DACS with a control assembly and two
multispeed blowers" (page 475) for DACS control assembly
c. If the DACS control assembly previously removed includes "P4A"
and "P4B" three-pin connectors:
1. unscrew the M5 nut of the earthing wires and remove the
earthing wires (see Figure 166 "DACS transfer board of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 474))
2. insert the transfer board of the DACS control kit
3. reinsert the earthing wires and screw the M5 nut
4. insert and connect all the connectors on the DACS control
assembly (see Figure 169 "Wiring for the standard DACS
with the control kit" (page 477) for DACS control assembly
wiring indications)
5. insert and connect all the connectors on the transfer board
by using the appropriate wires included in the DACS control
kit (see Figure 169 "Wiring for the standard DACS with the
control kit" (page 477) for the transfer board wiring)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
d. Ensure that dip switches "H1" "SW1" and "SW2" (see Figure 163
• SW2: ’1’ = ON, ’9’ = ON and all others OFF.
• SW1: ’1’ = OFF, ’2’ = ON and ’3’ = ON.
CAUTION
201).
the "I" position.

"ON" position.
"ON" position.
"ON" position.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
—End—
6.2.24.3 Replacement for a Standard DACS already including a

transfer board
Product reference
Intervention time
Tools required
• Stepladder
• Allen wrench
CAUTION
Location
DACS unit" (page 763), (see item ’Printed circuit assembly (PCA) for control
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
3. In the case of a tri-phase AC box, press the general stop
button.

"OFF" position.
"OFF" position.
"OFF" position.
3 Removal of the DACS control assembly and possibly of the transfer

board
assembly.
If the DACS control assembly includes "P4A" and "P4B" three-pin
given on Figure 168 "Wiring for the Standard DACS with one
multispeed blower kit (for FAN B)" (page 476) (example in the
case of one twin blower for "FAN A" and one multispeed blower
for "FAN B").
given on Figure 169 "Wiring for the standard DACS with the
control kit" (page 477) (case of two twin blowers) and Figure 170
"Wiring for the Standard DACS with a DACS control kit and one

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
DACS multispeed blower (FAN A)" (page 478) (example in the

case of one twin blower for "FAN B" and one multispeed blower
for "FAN A").
d. If the replacement of the transfer board is needed:
1. identify and clearly label all the connectors on the transfer
board
2. remove all the connectors from the transfer board
4. remove the transfer board
4 Reinsertion of the DACS control assembly and possibly of the

transfer board by using a DACS control kit
b. If the reinsertion or the replacement of the transfer board is
needed:
1. reinsert the transfer board or insert the transfer board
included in the DACS control kit
2. reinsert the earthing wires (see Figure 166 "DACS transfer
board of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 474)) and screw
the M5 nut
by using the existing wires or the appropriate wires included
in the DACS control kit. See indications below for the transfer
board wiring
c. Insert and connect all the connectors on the DACS control

assembly, and on the transfer board if not done yet.
and "P4B" three-pin connectors, indications of the DACS control
assembly and of the transfer board wirings are given on Figure
170 "Wiring for the Standard DACS with a DACS control kit and
one DACS multispeed blower (FAN A)" (page 478) (example
in the case of one twin blower for "FAN B" and one multispeed
blower for "FAN A").

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

and "P4B" five-pin connectors, indications of the DACS control
169 "Wiring for the standard DACS with the control kit" (page
477) (case of two twin blowers) and on Figure 170 "Wiring for
the Standard DACS with a DACS control kit and one DACS
multispeed blower (FAN A)" (page 478) (example in the case
of one twin blower for "FAN B" and one multispeed blower for
"FAN A").
d. Ensure that dip switches "H1" "SW1" and "SW2" (see Figure 163
• SW2: "1" = ON, "9" = ON and all others OFF.
• SW1: "1" = OFF, "2" = ON and "3" = ON.
CAUTION
201).
the "I" position.

"ON" position.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
"ON" position.
"ON" position.
—End—
6.2.25 Replacement of the DACS control assembly (Control board

NTQA98KB with S8000 Outdoor BTS)
The DACS control assembly can be replaced either by another DACS
control assembly or by using a DACS control kit. However the customer can
only put in an order for a DACS control kit.
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA98KB
CPC code: A0784515
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
Location
The DACS control assembly is located in the Standard DACS or in the Low
Noise DACS (see Figure 274 "DACS or Low Noise DACS unit" (page 763)).
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

"DACS or Low Noise DACS unit" (page 763) and see Figure 162
"DACS filter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 448)),
—End—
The three following paragraphs describe the replacement of a DACS control
assembly by using a DACS control kit.
• Low Noise DACS,
Choose the corresponding procedure among the three paragraphs.
ATTENTION
The other items of the DACS control kit can be used to replace their existing
equivalent. However it is recommended to replace them once the replacement
of the DACS control assembly has been completed.

Product reference
PEC code: NTQA98KB (DACS control kit)
CPC code: A0784515 (DACS control kit)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Intervention time
Tools required
• Stepladder
• Allen wrench
CAUTION
Location
The DACS control assembly is located on Figure 163 "Control assembly
of the Low Noise DACS & DACS control kit of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS" (page 471) (see item ’Printed circuit assembly (PCA) for control and
distribution power’ on this figure).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
b. Put the battery circuit breaker in the "O" position.
c. In the case of a single-phase or split single-phase AC box, put
the main circuit breaker in the "O" position.
In the case of a tri-phase AC box, press the general stop button.
d. Put the circuit breaker "FAN" on the PCU of the rectifier shelf

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
e. Unscrew the four quarter turn fasteners of the Low Noise DACS
cover and remove it cautiously.

assembly (see Figure 163 "Control assembly of the Low Noise
DACS & DACS control kit of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page
471)).
4 Reinsertion of the DACS control assembly by using a DACS control

kit
kit on the four plastic standoffs (the transfer board of the DACS
control kit is not used).
b. Insert and connect all the connectors on the DACS control
assembly (see Figure 164 "Wiring for the Low Noise DACS"
(page 472) for the DACS control assembly and "P7" connectors
c. Ensure that dip switch "SW1" (see Figure 163 "Control assembly
of the Low Noise DACS & DACS control kit of the S8000
Outdoor BTS" (page 471)) is set to : "1" = OFF, "2" = ON and
"3" = OFF, "SW2" is set to: "1" = ON, "9" = ON, all others OFF
and "H1" is in position 2.
CAUTION
To ensure that the hood key-locks are properly locked,
201).
fasteners.
b. Put the breaker "FAN" on the PCU of the rectifier shelf in the
"I" position.
the main circuit breaker in the "I" position.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
d. Put the battery circuit breaker in the "I" position.

e. Close the doors and the hood of the cabinet.
—End—

board
Product reference
Intervention time
Tools required
• Stepladder
• Allen wrench
CAUTION
Location
DACS unit" (page 763) (see item ’Printed circuit assembly (PCA) for control
Procedure
Step Action

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
handling boards.
e. Unscrew the four quarter turn fasteners of the DACS cover and
remove it cautiously.
assembly.
given on Figure 165 "Wiring for the Standard DACS without
DACS control kit nor DACS multispeed blower kit" (page 473).
4 Reinsertion of the DACS control assembly and possibly insertion of

a transfer board by using a DACS control kit
and "P4B" five-pin connectors, the transfer board of the DACS
control kit is not used.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

and "P4B" three-pin connectors, the transfer board of the DACS
control kit is used. The transfer board is located on Figure 166
"DACS transfer board of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 474).
b. If the DACS control assembly previously removed includes
"P4A" and "P4B" five-pin connectors, insert and connect all the
connectors on the DACS control assembly (see Figure 167
"Wiring for the standard DACS with a control assembly and two
multispeed blowers" (page 475) for DACS control assembly
c. If the DACS control assembly previously removed includes "P4A"
and "P4B" three-pin connectors:
2. insert the transfer board of the DACS control kit
3. reinsert the earthing wires and screw the M5 nut
4. insert and connect all the connectors on the DACS control
assembly (see Figure 169 "Wiring for the standard DACS
with the control kit" (page 477) for DACS control assembly
wiring indications)
kit (see Figure 169 "Wiring for the standard DACS with the
control kit" (page 477) for the transfer board wiring)
d. Ensure that the dip switch "SW1" (see Figure 163 "Control
assembly of the Low Noise DACS & DACS control kit of
the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 471)) is set to : ’1’ = OFF, ’2’ =
ON and ’3’ = OFF, "SW2" is set to: ’1’ = ON, ’9’ = ON, all others
OFF and "H1" is in position 2.
CAUTION
201).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
"I" position.
—End—

transfer board
Product reference
Intervention time
Tools required
• Stepladder
• Allen wrench
CAUTION
Location
DACS unit" (page 763) (see item ’Printed circuit assembly (PCA) for control
Procedure

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
e. Unscrew the four quarter turn fasteners of the DACS cover and
remove it cautiously.
3 Removal of the DACS control assembly and possibly of the transfer

board
assembly.
given on Figure 168 "Wiring for the Standard DACS with one
multispeed blower kit (for FAN B)" (page 476) (example in the
case of one twin blower for "FAN A" and one multispeed blower
for "FAN B").
given on Figure 169 "Wiring for the standard DACS with the
control kit" (page 477) (case of two twin blowers) and Figure 170
"Wiring for the Standard DACS with a DACS control kit and one
DACS multispeed blower (FAN A)" (page 478) (example in the
case of one twin blower for "FAN B" and one multispeed blower
for "FAN A").

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
d. If the replacement of the transfer board is needed:

board
4 Reinsertion of the DACS control assembly and possibly of the

transfer board by using a DACS control kit
needed:
included in the DACS control kit
the M5 nut
in the DACS control kit. See indications below for the transfer
board wiring
c. Insert and connect all the connectors on the DACS control

assembly, and on the transfer board if not done yet.
and "P4B" three-pin connectors, indications of the DACS control
170 "Wiring for the Standard DACS with a DACS control kit and
one DACS multispeed blower (FAN A)" (page 478) (example
in the case of one twin blower for "FAN B" and one multispeed
blower for "FAN A").
and "P4B" five-pin connectors, indications of the DACS control
169 "Wiring for the standard DACS with the control kit" (page
477) (case of two twin blowers) and on Figure 170 "Wiring for
the Standard DACS with a DACS control kit and one DACS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
multispeed blower (FAN A)" (page 478) (example in the case

of one twin blower for "FAN B" and one multispeed blower for
"FAN A").
d. Ensure that the dip switch "SW1" (see Figure 163 "Control
assembly of the Low Noise DACS & DACS control kit of
the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 471)) is set to : ’1’ = OFF, ’2’ =
ON and ’3’ = ON,"SW2" is set to: ’1’ = ON, ’9’ = ON, all others
OFF and "H1" is in position 2.
CAUTION
201).
"I" position.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 163
Control assembly of the Low Noise DACS and DACS control kit of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 164
Wiring for the Low Noise DACS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 165
Wiring for the Standard DACS without DACS control kit nor DACS multispeed blower kit

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 166
DACS transfer board of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 167
Wiring for the standard DACS with a control assembly and two multispeed blowers

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 168
Wiring for the Standard DACS with one multispeed blower kit (for FAN B)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 169
Wiring for the standard DACS with the control kit

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 170
Wiring for the Standard DACS with a DACS control kit and one DACS multispeed blower (FAN A)
6.2.26 Replacement of the DACS filter (S8000 Outdoor BTS)

Product reference
PEC code: NTQA98AA
CPC code: A0724343

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Intervention time
Tools required
Screwdriver
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The DACS filter is located on Figure 274 "DACS or Low Noise DACS unit"
(page 763).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
Open the hood and the doors of the cabinet.
3 Removal of the filter
a. Remove the four quarter turns from the access filter plate (see
Figure 171 "DACS filter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 481)).
b. Remove the access filter plate.
c. Remove the filter.
4 Reinsertion of the filter

a. Insert a new filter.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
Equipment damage
Using Nortel filters is mandatory to avoid risks to the
damage or DACS components and BTS equipment.
b. Install the access filter plate.

c. Tighten the four quarter turns of the access filter plate.
CAUTION
201).
Close the doors and the hood of the cabinet.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 171
6.2.27 Replacement of the DACS air inlet clogged switch (S8000

Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA98HA

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CPC code: A0724338

Intervention time
Tools required
• Stepladder
• Allen wrench
CAUTION
Location
The DACS air inlet clogged switch is located on Figure 274 "DACS or Low
Noise DACS unit" (page 763).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
b. For an AC mains box, perform the following actions.
2. For a single-phase or split single-phase AC box, put the
main circuit breaker in the "O" position.
For a tri-phase AC box, press the general stop button.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
c. For a GIPS, perform the following actions.

"OFF" position.
"OFF" position.
"OFF" position.
3 Removal of the air inlet switch

a. Identify and clearly label each wire.
b. Disconnect the two wires.
c. Remove the rubber or plastic tube.
d. Drill out the rivets.
e. Remove the air inlet switch.
4 Reinsertion of the air inlet switch
a. Insert a new air inlet switch.
b. Replace the old rivets with 1/8 inch closed end aluminum rivets.
c. Insert the rubber or plastic tube.
d. Connect the two wires.
CAUTION
201).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

the "I" position.
main circuit breaker in the "I" position.
For a tri-phase AC box, put all the circuit breakers in the
"I" position.

"ON" position.
"ON" position.
"ON" position.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 172
DACS air inlet switch of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6.2.28 Replacement of the DACS heater (S8000 Outdoor BTS)

Product reference
PEC code: NTQA98JA
CPC code: A0724340

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Tools required
• Stepladder
• Allen wrench
CAUTION
Location
The DACS heater is located on Figure 274 "DACS or Low Noise DACS
unit" (page 763).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

"OFF" position.
"OFF" position.
"OFF" position.
3 Removal of the heater

a. Remove the DACS unit from the cabinet (see Section 6.2.20
BTS)" (page 426)).
b. Remove the two leads and the heat shrink from the ends of the
heater.
c. Unscrew the large hex nut and slide this end of the heater back
through the hole.
d. Drop this end down to pull the other end of the heater (if the
heater is oriented correctly, the other end can be pulled out more
easily).
4 Reinsertion of the heater

a. Insert a new heater: be careful to orient it correctly.
b. Tighten the large hex nut.
c. Insert the heat shrink to the ends of the heater.
d. Connect the two leads.
e. Reinsert the DACS unit in the cabinet (see Section 6.2.20
BTS)" (page 426)).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
201).
the "I" position.
"I" position.

"ON" position.
"ON" position.
"ON" position.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 173
DACS heater of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6.2.29 Replacement of the DACS thermistor (S8000 Outdoor BTS)

Product reference
PEC code: NTQA98FA
CPC code: A0723679

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Tools required
• Stepladder
• Allen wrench
CAUTION
Location
The DACS thermistor is located on Figure 274 "DACS or Low Noise DACS
unit" (page 763).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

"OFF" position.
"OFF" position.
"OFF" position.
3 Removal of the thermistor

a. Remove the DACS unit from the cabinet (see Section 6.2.20
BTS)" (page 426)).
b. Remove the connector "P1" from the DACS control assembly.
c. Remove the probe from the clips located underneath the
sheetmetal where the DACS control assembly is mounted.
d. Pull the thermistor probe up through the washer and remove it.
4 Reinsertion of the thermistor

a. Insert the thermistor probe.
b. Insert the probe on the clips located underneath the sheetmetal.
c. Insert the connector "P1" on the DACS control assembly.
d. Insert the DACS unit in the cabinet (see Section 6.2.20
BTS)" (page 426)).
CAUTION
201).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

the "I" position.
"I" position.

"ON" position.
"ON" position.
"ON" position.
—End—
6.2.30 Replacement of the DACS thermostat (S8000 Outdoor BTS)

Product reference
PEC code: NTQA8111
CPC code: A0520118
Intervention time
Tools required
• Stepladder
• Allen wrench

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
Location
The DACS thermostat is located on Figure 274 "DACS or Low Noise DACS
unit" (page 763).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.

"OFF" position.
"OFF" position.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
"OFF" position.
3 Removal of the thermostat

a. Identify and label each wire.
b. Disconnect the two leads from the thermostat.
c. Unscrew the two cross-head screws.
d. Remove the thermostat.
4 Reinsertion of the thermostat
a. Insert a new thermostat.
b. Tighten the two cross-head screws.
c. Connect the two leads to the thermostat.
CAUTION
201).
the "I" position.
"I" position.

"ON" position.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
"ON" position.
"ON" position.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 174
DACS thermostat of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6.2.31 Replacement of the auto-reset DACS heater thermostat (S8000

Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code: part of the kit NTQA81AA

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Intervention time
Tools required
• Stepladder
• Allen wrench
CAUTION
Location
The DACS thermostat is located on Figure 274 "DACS or Low Noise DACS
unit" (page 763).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
ESDS handling precautions and mandatory
operations
handling boards.
To ensure personnel safety and network live traffic,
mandatory preliminary operations must be respected on
each onsite intervention. The operations are described
below.
2 Mandatory Preliminary operations

a. Perform the intervention, as much as possible, during the most
appropriate weather and network traffic condition, i.e. cool
weather and low traffic periods.
b. Limit the ventilation cut-off to the strict minimum if possible and
especially on highly equipped BTSs.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
c. Leave the doors open during the operation period.

d. Call the Network Operation Center and ensure that no DACS
alarm is detected before the intervention and that the intervention
can proceed as planned.
e. Replace dirty filters. When done and to allow a correct air flow,
wait for 30 minutes of ventilation before replacing the DACS
thermostat. DACS hood is closed.
f. Check the damper position. Make sure that it reflects the
following weather conditions:
• Low temperature (-40 C (-40 F)) < Tcab < 15C (59F))
The heater is energized and the damper is closed.
• Medium temperature (15C (59 F) < Tcab < 40C (104F))
The heater is switched off, the damper remains closed.
• Normal temperature (Tcab = 40 C (104F))
The actuator modulating motor controls the damper position
automatically.
• High temperature (Tcab > 40 C (104 F))
The damper is fully open.
If the damper position does not match the above weather
conditions, manually open it and let the air circulate
for 30 minutes before performing the DACS thermostat
replacement. DACS hood is closed.
g. Check that the ventilation starts automatically when the operation

is finished.
3 Removal of the thermostat

a. Power off DACS main supply and select "Climatic System Circuit
Breaker".
b. Power off the fan breaker.
c. Identify and label each wire.
d. Disconnect the two leads from the thermostat.
e. Unscrew the two cross-head screws.
f. Remove the thermostat.
4 Reinsertion of the thermostat
a. Insert a new thermostat.
b. Tighten the two cross-head screws.
c. Connect the two leads to the thermostat.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
a. Before powering up the DACS, check the thermistor, heater,
actuator, damper. All these verifications are described in Chapter
5 Preventive Maintenance Procedures, paragraph 5.4.15.
CAUTION
Equipment damage
Any repair or replacement is forbidden at this stage of
the thermostat replacement process. If any additional
operation is required on the DACS, 30 minutes of
ventilation time is necessary to avoid the risk of
over-heating the BTS and creating an outage.
b. Proceed to the labelling of the updated DACS parts.

c. Power on all breakers and verify that the air flow is restored to
the normal operation.
—End—
6.2.32 Replacement of the DACS (extended) transformer (S8000

Outdoor BTS)
The transformer can be replaced by another transformer or by an extended
transformer. However the customer can only put in an order for an extended
transformer.
An extended transformer can be replaced only by another extended
transformer. If necessary, a transformer can be replaced by an extended
transformer.
Table 93
DACS (extended) transformer (S8000 Outdoor BTS) product reference
Transformer QTK710BH A0724332
Extended transformer NTQA98DB A0785383
Intervention time
Tools required
• Stepladder

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
• Allen wrench
CAUTION
Location
The DACS transformer is located on Figure 274 "DACS or Low Noise DACS
unit" (page 763).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
"OFF" position.
"OFF" position.
"OFF" position.
3 Removal of the transformer

a. Remove the hex head bolt, the flat washer and the lock washer.
b. Clearly identify each lead and label them.
c. Remove the cover from the plastic wire tray, by lifting up and
pulling out the cover top.
d. Disconnect the two leads connected to the rectifier bridge BR1.
e. Disconnect the other two leads (bullet connectors) which are
connected in the wire tray.
f. Remove the transformer.
4 Reinsertion of the transformer

a. Insert a new transformer.
b. Connect the two leads connected to the rectifier bridge BR1.
c. Connect the other two leads.
d. Insert the cover on the plastic wire tray.
e. Tighten the lock washer, the flat washer and the hex head bolt.
CAUTION
201).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

the "I" position.
"I" position.

"ON" position.
"ON" position.
"ON" position.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 175
DACS transformer of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6.2.33 Replacement of a DACS twin blower (S8000 Outdoor BTS)

The DACS twin blower can be replaced either by another DACS twin blower
or by using a DACS multispeed blower kit. However the customer can only
put in an order for a DACS multispeed blower kit.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

Tools required
Flat screwdriver
Location
The DACS twin blower is located in the Standard DACS (see Figure 274
"DACS or Low Noise DACS unit" (page 763)) or in the Low Noise DACS
(see Figure 274 "DACS or Low Noise DACS unit" (page 763)).
The Standard or Low Noise DACS is located on Figure 273 "DACS or Low
Noise DACS unit in the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 762).
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.

"DACS or Low Noise DACS unit" (page 763)),


411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
—End—
The three following paragraphs describe the replacement of a DACS twin
blower by using a DACS multispeed blower kit.
• Low Noise DACS,
ATTENTION
The other items of the DACS multispeed blower kit can be used to replace
their existing equivalent. However, it is recommended to replace them once
the replacement of the DACS twin blower has been completed.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 176

Product reference
PEC code: NTQA98EB (DACS multispeed blower kit)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CPC code: A0785384 (DACS multispeed blower kit)

Intervention time
Tools required
• Stepladder
• Allen wrench
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The DACS twin blowers are located on Figure 184 "DACS twin blowers of
the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 525) and on Figure 274 "DACS or Low
Noise DACS unit" (page 763) (see item ‘Twin blowers’ on this figure).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

"OFF" position.
"OFF" position.
"OFF" position.
3 Removal of a DACS twin blower

a. Unscrew the four screws which fix the bracket to the base
sheetmetal.
b. Remove the cover from the plastic wire tray, by lifting up and
pulling the cover top out.
c. Remove the connector labeled "P4B" for the right blower or the
connector labeled "P4A" for the left blower (see Figure 177
"Wiring for the Low Noise DACS" (page 518)).
d. Remove the blower.
4 Reinsertion of a DACS twin blower by using the DACS multispeed
blower kit
a. Insert the DACS twin blower included in the DACS multispeed
blower kit (the transfer board of the DACS multispeed blower
kit is not used).
b. Connect the connector labeled "P4B" to the right blower or
the connector labeled "P4A" to the left blower (see Figure 177
"Wiring for the Low Noise DACS" (page 518)).
c. Insert the cover on the plastic wire tray.
d. Tighten the four screws attaching the bracket to the base
sheetmetal.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
201).
the "I" position.
"I" position.

"ON" position.
"ON" position.
"ON" position.
—End—

board
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA9803 DACS BLOWER CABLE ADAPTER
CPC code: A0784516 DACS BLOWER CABLE ADAPTER
PEC code: NTQA98EB DACS multispeed blower kit

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CPC code: A0785384 DACS multispeed blower kit

Intervention time
Tools required
• Stepladder
• Allen wrench
CAUTION
Location
the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 525) and on Figure 274 "DACS or Low
Noise DACS unit" (page 763) (see item ‘Twin blowers’ on this figure).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

"OFF" position.
"OFF" position.
"OFF" position.
3 Removal of a DACS twin blower

sheetmetal.
given on Figure 178 "Wiring for the standard DACS without
control kit Nor multispeed blower kit" (page 519).
c. Remove the connector labeled "P4B" for the right blower or the
connector labeled "P4A" for the left blower.
d. Remove the blower.
4 Reinsertion of a DACS twin blower and possibly insertion of a
transfer board by using a DACS multispeed blower kit
blower kit.
b. If the DACS control assembly includes "P4A" and "P4B" five-pin
connectors, connect the connector labeled "P4B" to the right

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
blower and the connector labeled "P4A" to the left blower

(see Figure 180 "Wiring for the standard DACS with a control
assembly and two multispeed blowers" (page 521) for DACS twin
blowers (multispeed blowers) wiring indications).
c. If the DACS control assembly includes "P4A" and "P4B" three-pin
connectors:
S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 520)),
2. insert the transfer board of the DACS control kit,
3. reinsert the earthing wires and screw the M5 nut,
kit (see Figure 181 "Wiring for the standard DACS with one
multispeed blower kit (for FAN B)" (page 522) for an example
of the transfer board wiring: when "FAN B" is replaced).

e. Tighten the four screws attaching the bracket to the base
sheetmetal.
CAUTION
201).
the "I" position.
"I" position.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

"ON" position.
"ON" position.
"ON" position.
—End—

transfer board
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA98EB (DACS multispeed blower kit)
CPC code: A0785384 (DACS multispeed blower kit)
Intervention time
Tools required
• Stepladder
• Allen wrench
CAUTION
Location
the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 525) (see item ‘Twin blowers’ onthis figure).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.

"OFF" position.
"OFF" position.
"OFF" position.
3 Removal of a DACS twin blower and possibly of the transfer board

sheetmetal.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
c. Identify and clearly label the connector of the DACS twin blower
to be replaced.
connectors, indications of the existing wirings are given on
Figure 181 "Wiring for the standard DACS with one multispeed
blower kit (for FAN B)" (page 522) (example in the case of one
twin blower for "FAN A" and one multispeed blower for "FAN B").
connectors, indications of the existing wirings are given on
Figure 182 "Wiring for the Standard DACS with the control kit"
(page 523) (case of two twin blowers) and Figure 183 "Wiring for
the standard DACS with a control kit and one multispeed blower
(FAN A)" (page 524) (example in the case of one twin blower for
"FAN B" and one multispeed blower for "FAN A").
d. Remove the connector of the DACS twin blower to be replaced.
e. Remove the DACS twin blower to be replaced.
f. If the replacement of the transfer board is needed:
board
4 Reinsertion of a DACS twin blower and possibly of the transfer board

by using a DACS multispeed blower kit
blower kit.
needed:
included in the DACS multispeed blower kit
the M5 nut

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
in the DACS multispeed blower kit. See indications below

for the transfer board wiring
If the DACS control assembly includes "P4A" and "P4B"
three-pin connectors, indications of the DACS control
assembly and of the transfer board wirings are given
on Figure 181 "Wiring for the standard DACS with one
multispeed blower kit (for FAN B)" (page 522) (example in
the case of one twin blower for "FAN A" and one multispeed
blower for "FAN B")
If the DACS control assembly includes "P4A" and "P4B"
five-pin connectors, indications of the DACS control assembly
and of the transfer board wirings are given on Figure 182
"Wiring for the Standard DACS with the control kit" (page
523) (case of two twin blowers) and on Figure 183 "Wiring
for the standard DACS with a control kit and one multispeed
blower (FAN A)" (page 524) (example in the case of one twin
blower for "FAN B" and one multispeed blower for "FAN A").
c. Connect the connector of the DACS twin blower replaced if not

done yet.
e. Tighten the four screws attaching the bracket to the base
sheetmetal.
CAUTION
201).
the "I" position.
"I" position.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

"ON" position.
"ON" position.
"ON" position.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 177
Wiring for the Low Noise DACS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 178
Wiring for the standard DACS without control kit Nor multispeed blower kit

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 179
DACS transfer board of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 180
Wiring for the standard DACS with a control assembly and two multispeed blowers

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 181
Wiring for the standard DACS with one multispeed blower kit (for FAN B)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 182
Wiring for the Standard DACS with the control kit

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 183
Wiring for the standard DACS with a control kit and one multispeed blower (FAN A)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 184
DACS twin blowers of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6.2.34 Replacement of the Low Noise DACS ambient thermistor (S8000

Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA98FB

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CPC code: A0785385

Tools required
• Stepladder
• Allen wrench
CAUTION
Location
The Low Noise DACS thermistor is located on DACS Control assembly of
the Low Noise and of the DACS control kit of the S8000 Outdoor BTS.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.


"OFF" position.
"OFF" position.
"OFF" position.
3 Removal of the Low Noise DACS ambient thermistor

a. Remove the connector " P7" from the DACS control assembly
(see Figure 185 "DACS Control assembly of the Low Noise and
of the DACS control kit of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 529)).
b. Remove the probe from the clips located underneath the
sheetmetal where the DACS control assembly is mounted.
c. Pull the thermistor probe up through the washer and remove it.
4 Reinsertion of the Low Noise DACS ambient thermistor

a. Insert the thermistor probe.
b. Insert the probe on the clips located underneath the sheetmetal.
c. Insert the connector "P7" on the DACS control assembly.
CAUTION
201).
fasteners.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

the "I" position.
"I" position.

"ON" position.
"ON" position.
"ON" position.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 185
DACS Control assembly of the Low Noise and of the DACS control kit of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
6.2.35 Replacement of the door gasket (S8000 Indoor BTS and S8003
Indoor BTS)
Table 94
Product reference for S8000 Indoor BTS
Door gasket for the - R0118061
cabinet
(quantity: 2)
Door gasket for the BCF - R0118060
cabinet
Table 95
Product reference for S8003 Indoor BTS
Vertical EMC door - P0603947
gasket
Horizontal EMC door - P0603948
gasket
Partition gasket - P0603949
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately two hours for each gasket.
Tools required
• Lint free cloth
• Solvents: trichloroethylene or perchloroethylene
• Q-LON cutting tool: ref MIS-9001-92 (not used for the S8003 Indoor
BTS)
• Blades: ref MIS-9003-03 SCHLEGEL (not used for the S8003 Indoor
BTS)
• Safety glasses
DANGER
Electric shock

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

Location
For the S8000 Indoor BTS, the door gasket is located on the cabinet (see
Figure 186 "Location of the door gasket of the S8000 Indoor BTS" (page
532)).
For the S8003 Indoor BTS, the five door gaskets are located on the cabinet
(see Figure 188 "Location of the door gasket of the S8003 Indoor BTS"
(page 536)).
Procedure for S8000 Indoor BTS

Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
• For the CBCF, open the door
• For the BCF cabinet, perform the following actions
1. If not done yet, open the door.
2. Undo the ground wire.
3. Push down the hinge pin.
4. Remove the door.
3 Removal of a door gasket
DANGER
ejection.
a. Remove the old gasket from the aluminum surface.


411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
1. Use a lint free cloth applicator moistened with solvents to

wash the aluminum surface until the pressure sensitive
adhesive is removed.
Figure 186
Location of the door gasket of the S8000 Indoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 187
Cut of the gasket of the S8000 Indoor BTS
4 Reinsertion of a door gasket

a. Position the gasket and mark on the two cut points.
b. Cut with the Q-LON cutting tool (see Figure 187 "Cut of the
gasket of the S8000 Indoor BTS" (page 533)).
c. Remove the release liner three to four inches at a time.
d. Put the gasket in place by pressing firmly on the surface (see
Figure 186 "Location of the door gasket of the S8000 Indoor
BTS" (page 532)).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
a. Inspect visually if the unbounded areas of the gasket are

remaining.
b. Close the door and check visually if the gasket compression is
correct everywhere.
c. For the CBCF, close the door.
For the BCF cabinet, perform the following actions.
1. Reinsert the door.
2. Put the ground wire.
3. Close the door.
—End—
Procedure for S8003 Indoor BTS

Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
• Open the door
3 Removal of a door gasket
DANGER
ejection
a. Remove each old gasket from the aluminum surface.


411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
1. Use a lint free cloth applicator moistened with solvents to

wash the aluminum surface until the pressure sensitive
adhesive is removed.
4 Reinsertion of a door gasket

a. Position each gasket at its location.
b. Remove the release liner three to four inches at a time.
c. Put each gasket in place by pressing firmly on the surface (see
Figure 188 "Location of the door gasket of the S8003 Indoor
BTS" (page 536)).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 188
Location of the door gasket of the S8003 Indoor BTS
a. Inspect visually if the unbounded areas of the gasket are
remaining.
b. Close the door and check visually if the gasket compression is
correct everywhere.
c. Close the door of the CBCF.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
6.2.36 Repair or replacement of the door gaskets (S8000 Outdoor BTS)

6.2.36.1 Repair of the door gaskets
Tools required
• Tube of silicone, reference LOCTITE AS310 or equivalent, provided with
a 2-3 mm diameter injector and a mastic gun
• Tube of glue, reference LOCTITE 454 or equivalent
• Anti-stick agent, reference LOCTITE DM4 or equivalent
• Roller (supplier: Grolleau, reference 0985A)
DANGER
Electric shock
care of handling the equipment.
Location
The door gaskets are located on the doors for a cabinet with the DACS
climatic system, and on the hood or on the doors for a cabinet with the
ACU climatic unit.
Gasket length (procedure applicable on site and in the warehouse)
• Inject a spot of glue LOCTITE 454 on the gasket every about 2 cm.
• Put in place the gasket and press on each spot of glue with the finger for
at least ten seconds.
• Use the roller all along the gasket length.
• Close the doors.
Gasket corners (procedure applicable in the warehouse)

• Inject the LOCTITE AS310 silicone or an equivalent, with a 2 - 3 mm
diameter injector and a mastic gun, in the corner hole. Do not damage
the gaskets and do not increase the hole diameter.
• Apply a light pressure on the corner to avoid the concentration of a thick
silicone layer and to have the silicone excess overflowed (inward and
outward side).
• Check that there is no hole left.
• Remove the silicone overflow with a clean rag (if possible, try to avoid a
contact with the skin).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
• Avoid spreading the silicone on the gasket outer surface. There must
not be any remaining mark of silicone beyond a 5 mm width on both
sides of the 455 cut of the gasket (see Figure 189 "View of the door
gaskets of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 540)).
• Exceptional case :
— If there is no contact between the two gaskets, pour some silicone
with the injector on the two gaskets, see Figure 190 "Silicone deposit
at a door gasket corner of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 541).
— Then, press lightly on the gaskets towards the gap, with the finger, to
concentrate the silicone in the gap. This action allows not to have a
silicone excess inside the gasket.
• Repeat the two last steps for each of other seven gasket corners.
• Apply a light pressure on each repaired corner, and check for silicone
overflow. Check by touch on the gasket, the silicone is tacked dry and
does not stick.
CAUTION
Equipment damage
If the silicone (on the corners) is not completely dry when closing
the doors, it can stick to the opposite metal frame of the door.
So, when opening the doors the next time, the gaskets may be
damaged irremediably.
Gasket corners (procedure applicable on site)

• In the case of an in-warehouse retrofit, it is recommended to perform the
above procedure even if the below procedure is applicable.
• Apply the anti-stick agent LOCTITE DM4 (or an equivalent) to the inner
skin of the door in front of the damaged corner. Cover an area of 20 mm
square (see Figure 191 "Front view of an inner corner of a door of the
• Apply a line of a LOCTITE AS310 silicone or an equivalent along the
edge of the gasket :
— For the corners located on the side of the cabinet, apply a silicone
line along the top and side edge of the gasket extending 10 mm
in both directions from the corner (see Figure 192 "Front view of
a door gasket corner of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 543) and
Figure 193 "Side view of a door gasket corner of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS" (page 544)).
— For the corner located in the middle of the cabinet, apply a silicone
line only along the top edge of the gasket extending 10 mm in both
directions from the center of the door axis (see Figure 193 "Side

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
view of a door gasket corner of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page

544) and Figure 194 "Front view of two door gaskets of the S8000
• Close the doors.
It is not a problem if the corner joint between the vertical and horizontal
gaskets is not completely closed, as the silicone barrier ensures complete
impermeability.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 189
View of the door gaskets of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 190
Silicone deposit at a door gasket corner of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 191
Front view of an inner corner of a door of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 192
Front view of a door gasket corner of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 193
Side view of a door gasket corner of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 194
Front view of two door gaskets of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6.2.36.2 Replacement of the door gaskets

Product reference

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CPC codes:
• ACU or DACS left door gasket: NTQA31MA

• ACU or DACS right door gasket: NTQA31NA
Intervention time
Tools required
• Clean lint free cloths
• Non-metallic low abrasive pad
• Gasket PSA roller (Chomerics Ref. C589R1, Grolleau Ref. 0985A)
• Rubber gloves (Talcum free)
• One of the following : 3M Natural Cleaner, Acetone, or MEK
• Wooden tongue depressor or equivalent
• Distilled water
• 90% or higher concentration alcohol
• Flat and cross-head screwdriver
DANGER
Electric shock

Location
The door gaskets are located on the doors for a cabinet with the DACS
climatic system, and on the hood or on the doors for a cabinet with the
ACU climatic unit.
Procedure
Step Action

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
handling boards.
If not done yet, open the doors.
3 Gasket removal
ATTENTION
In all of the following procedures, it is important that the Alodine or gold
colored Chromate conversion coating is not removed from the aluminum
surfaces.
a. Pull out the grounding cables from the Fast-on lugs near the top
hinge side of the doors.
b. Remove the two door stay bars by removing the screw and the
retaining piece from the door end of the bars.
c. Peel off the existing two door gaskets, either from the doors or
the cabinet.
DANGER
Observe the instructions and precautions for the
above products, as they may be hazardous to your
health.
d. Use 3M Natural Cleaner, Acetone, or MEK, and a cloth or

non-metallic low abrasive pad to remove all PSA residue which
remains on the surface. Ensure the gold Chromate plating is not
removed. Repeat as necessary.
e. Any excess silicone remaining on the door or cabinet surface
is peeled off, or scraped off carefully with a wooden tongue
depressor or equivalent. DO NOT REMOVE the silicone used to
fill the gaps between the different sections of the cabinet.
f. Wash with distilled water and dry with a clean lint free cloth.
4 Gasket preparation
The new gaskets will be applied to the doors, regardless of where
they were mounted previously. They mount on the gold colored
aluminum panels riveted to the doors, hereafter referred to as door
panels.
411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Determine if the cabinet is equipped with two ACUs or a DACS unit.

There is a label on the right side of the cabinet which is stamped
’NTQA97AA’ if it is a Standard DACS cabinet, or ’NTQA97BA’ if it is
a Low Noise DACS, or ’NTQA95AB’ if it is an ACU cabinet.
• For a Standard DACS or a Low Noise DACS cabinet: Hold the
gaskets up to the doors to see where they will be installed.
NTQA31MA is installed on the left door (as viewed from the front)
so it is flush with the top, left, and right edges of the door panel.
NTQA31NA is installed on the right door in the same manner.
• For an ACU cabinet: Hold the gaskets up to the doors to see
where they will be installed. NTQA31MA is installed on the left
door (as viewed from the front) so it is centered between the
two rows of rivets on the top, and is flush with the non-hinge
side of the door panel.
5 Gasket application
a. Put on talcum free rubber gloves.
b. On each door panel, clean an area approximately 75 mm wide
from each edge with Acetone, MEK, or alcohol and dry with a
clean lint free cloth. Allow the surface to dry completely.
c. DO NOT TOUCH this surface with bare hands since the oil from
the skin will have a detrimental effect on the adhesion of the
new gasket.
d. Remove 75-100 mm of the protective backing from the PSA at a
time. Start in the upper non-hinge corner of the panel, and press
down on the gasket to tack it in place, as you work around the
perimeter. AVOID any finger contact with the adhesive.
e. Ensure the strip is in correct position, then press down firmly to
ensure a good mechanical bond over the contact surface. Avoid
repositioning, since it hampers the effectiveness of the adhesive
and may bend or kink the strip.
f. Use the gasket roller with moderate pressure to further tack the
gasket in place. Repeat with enough force to collapse the gasket.
g. Reinstall the door stay bars to the doors.
h. Reconnect the grounding lugs to the doors.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
6.2.37 Replacement of the door gasket (battery cabinet)
Table 96
Door gasket (battery cabinet) product reference
Door gasket (battery cabinet) P0943040
Intervention time
Required tool(s)
• Clean lint free cloths
• Non-metallic low abrasive pad
• Gasket PSA roller (Chomerics Ref. C589R1, Grolleau Ref. 0985A)
• Rubber gloves (Talcum free)
• One of the following : 3M Natural Cleaner, Acetone, or MEK
• Wooden Tongue Depressor or Equivalent
• Distilled water
• 90% or higher concentration alcohol
• Flat and Phillips screwdrivers
Procedure
Step Action
1 Gasket removal
a. Remove the old gasket.
DANGER
ejection.
b. Clean the surface:

• Clean up the surface with a lint free cloth moistened with
solvents (MEK or Acetone IPA).
• Let the surface dry for five minutes at ambient temperature.
2 Gasket application

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
a. Use a knife to cut the gasket at the correct length with a 455
angle at each end.
b. Remove the release liner and place the gasket three to four
inches at a time.
c. Roll the gasket with a moderate pressure to glue it using a rubber
roller 3/4" wide.
CAUTION
d. Join the corners of each gasket by using the glue. A full adhesive
strength of the bond shall be achieved within five minutes.
e. Inspect visually if the unbounded areas of the gasket are
remaining.
Close the door and check the gasket compression everywhere.
—End—
6.2.38 Replacement of a DRX module (S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000

There are two types of DRX: DRX and eDRX. The term DRX is used to refer
to the two types unless the context indicates otherwise.
Table 97
DRX module product reference for S8000 BTS
DRX module for GSM-R -110dBm NTQA01WA A0688140
DRX module for GSM 900 -108dBm NTQA01PA A0666905
DRX module for GSM 900 -110dBm NTQA01RA A0679766
DRX module for GSM 1800 -108dBm NTQA01HA A0666904
DRX module for GSM 1800 -110dBm NTQA01KA A0679760
DRX module for GSM 1900 -110dBm NTQA01CB A0686556
DRX ND E-GSM NTQA01SA A0723997

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

DRX module for GSM 1800 (new
NTQA01LA A0723996
design)
DRX module for GSM 1900 (new
NTQA01DA A0723995
design)
DRX ND module for GSM-R NTQA01XA A0723998
DRX-ND3 GSM NTQA89GA A0890649
DRX-ND3 GSM-R NTQA89HA A0511602
eDRX module for GSM 900 NTQA88JA A0510909
eDRX module for GSM 1800 NTQA88DA A0797868
eDRX module for GSM 1900 NTQA88PA A0797870
eDRX module for GSM 850 NTQA88HA A0868931
Table 98
DRX module product reference for S8003 BTS
DRX module for GSM 900 NTQA01SA A0723997
DRX ND3 GSM900 NTQA89GA A0890649
DRX ND module for GSM-R NTQA01XA A0723998
E-DRX module for GSM 1800 NTQA88DA A0797868
Intervention time
Tools required
• 8-mm SMA torque wrench

None if there is a redundant DRX or eDRX.
Loss or service if there is only one DRX or eDRX.
CAUTION
The service is reduced: in fact, the service is lost for the calls
depending on the faulty DRX or eDRX.
However, the service is lost in the case of a configuration O1.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Support of EDGE feature

If EDGE is required, an eDRX module must be replaced by an eDRX
module.
Replacing a DRX by an eDRX or a DRX
If EDGE is not required, a failing DRX can be replaced by an eDRX or a
DRX. In this case, a lock/unlock TRX must be done to ensure that the
coherence of the notifications sent to the OMC-R.
The DRX modules are located on Figure 7 "Maximum equipment of an
CBCF" (page 54).
The DRX modules are located on Figure 42 "S8003 Indoor BTS: view of the
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
b. Set the transceiverEquipment object associated with the faulty
DRX to "locked" at the OMC-R.
c. Put the switch of the associated PA in the "O" position or
disconnect the power cable of the PA from the PA-ICO.
d. Disconnect the coaxial cables and the connectors on the front
panel (PWR, FH-PCM, TX, RXM, RXD). Disconnect the PWR
power lead first (cable on the DRX INTERCO panel first, then
on the DRX).
e. For the left DRX, cut the "Rilsan" ties.
3 Removal of a DRX module

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
a. Undo the four fixing screws on the front panel of the DRX module.
b. Extract the DRX with the extraction tool and remove it.
4 Reinsertion of a DRX module

a. Check the hardware version number of the DRX, identified by its
PEC code, is compatible with the sWVersionRunning parameter
on the transceiverEquipment object at the OMC-R. DO NOT try
to put the DRX into service if this condition is not fulfilled.
CAUTION
Check whether the software version of the DRX is
compatible with the COAM.
b. Insert the DRX into the cabinet with the extraction tool.
c. Tighten the four fixing screws (see Figure 195 "DRX module"
(page 555) and Figure 196 "eDRX module" (page 556)).
a. Reconnect the coaxial cables and the connectors on the front
panel.
CAUTION
Tightening torques
Connect the cables imperatively in the given order.
The tightening torque of the terminals (TX, RXD,
RXM) must be 0.7 N-m + 0.1. Use the 8-mm SMA
torque wrench.
b. Connect the following cables: FH-PCM, TX, RXM, RXD, PWR.

c. Reconnect the PWR power lead part (cable on the DRX final,
then on the DRX INTERCO panel).
d. For the left DRX, attach the cables with "Rilsan" ties.
e. Put the switch of the associated PA in the "I" position or reconnect
the power cable of the PA to the PA-ICO.
f. Set the transceiverEquipment object to "unlocked" at the OMC-R.
g. Check the DRX is up on the MMI and no unexpected notification
appears during the maintenance action.
h. Check the state of the LEDs. They are on. Then take the
following states:

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
• "5 V" LED on

• "RES1" LED off
• "AMNU" LED off
• "BDT" LED off
• "LI" LED off
• "TX" LED off
• "ALA" LED off
• "DRX" LED on
• "SPU" LED off
• "BTSTS" LED off
• "CL" LED off
• "RX" LED off
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 195
DRX module

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 196
eDRX module
6.2.39 Replacement of an external alarm primary lightning protector

(S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
CPC code: A0666945

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 2 hours 30 minutes (for 20 lightning
protectors).
Tools required
• One tubular socket wrench
• One flat screwdriver
DANGER
Electric shock

Location
The external alarm primary lightning protectors are located at the plinth
or the kit.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
If not done yet, open the plinth or the kit according to the site
configuration.
3 Removal of a lightning protector
a. Disconnect the two wires of a lightning protector and mark them
(see Figure 197 "View of the external alarm primary lightning
protectors of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 559)).
b. Undo the ground nut.
c. Remove a lightning protector.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
4 Reinsertion of a lightning protector

a. Insert a new lightning protector (see Figure 197 "View of the
external alarm primary lightning protectors of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS" (page 559)).
b. Tighten the ground nut.
c. Reconnect the two wires, following the marks made on them
beforehand.
Close the plinth or the kit according to the site configuration.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 197
View of the external alarm primary lightning protectors of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
6.2.40 Replacement of the external alarm secondary lightning protector

(S8000 Outdoor BTS)
External alarm secondary lightning protector product reference for the S8000
Outdoor BTS
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 30 minutes (full configuration).
Tools required
• One screwdriver for recessed-head screws
DANGER
Electric shock

Location
The external alarm secondary lightning protectors are located at the plinth
or the kit.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
configuration.
3 Removal of the external alarm secondary lightning protector

• If there is one board (see Figure 198 "View of the external alarm
secondary lightning protector of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page
562)).
1. Undo the four screws of the board.
2. Undo the two screws of the connector no.1.
3. Remove the two connectors no.2.
4. Undo the ground screw.
5. Remove the board.
• If there are two boards.

1. Undo the four screws of the board.
2. Undo the two screws of the connector no.1.
3. Remove the two connectors no.2.
4. Undo the ground screw.
5. Remove the board.
6. Do the five precedent operations for the second board.
4 Reinsertion of the external alarm secondary lightning protector

• If there is one board (see Figure 198 "View of the external alarm
secondary lightning protector of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page
562)).
1. Install the new board.
2. Connect the two connectors no.2.
3. Tighten the ground screw.
4. Tighten the two screws of the connector no.1.
5. Tighten the four screws of the board.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 198
View of the external alarm secondary lightning protector of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
• If there are two boards.

1. Install the new board.
2. Connect the two connectors no.2.
3. Tighten the ground screw.
4. Tighten the two screws of the connector no.1.
5. Tighten the four screws of the board.
6. Do the five precedent operations for the second board.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
—End—
6.2.41 Replacement of the external batteries (battery cabinet)

Product reference
Battery
Type of battery
(string of 4 PEC codes CPC codes
cabinet
batteries)
NTQA36AA SBS 60 NTQA36GA A0758428
SBS 60 NTQA36GA A0758428
NTQA36AB (CE)
SBS C11 NTQA92EA A0809688
SBS 60 NTQA36GA A0758428
NTQA36BA (US)
SBS C11 NTQA92EA A0809688
For NTQA36AA type battery cabinet, only SBS 60 batteries are provided.
For NTQA36AB and NTQA36BA types battery cabinets, both SBS 60 or

SBS C11 batteries can be provided.
6.2.41.1 Replacement of the external batteries (SBS 60 in

NTQA36AA type battery cabinet)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA36GA
CPC code: A0758428
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 30 minutes per string.
Tools required
Wrench
Location
The external batteries are located on Figure 28 "External battery cabinet
NTQA36AA of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (NTQA36GA batteries)" (page 74).
None, provided the BTS remains powered from the mains.
Warning

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
DANGER
Electric shock
The S8000 battery cabinet remains supplied with the mains power
The operational state of the btsSiteManager object is "enabled".
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
DANGER
There is a danger of explosion if the batteries are
incorrectly replaced.
CAUTION
The four batteries must be identical (brand, date-code,
reference number-NMC). So the whole set must be
replaced.
Replace the batteries only with the same or equivalent
type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer
instructions.
a. Open the battery cabinet door.
b. Put the breakers, which are located at the bottom of the cabinet,

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
DANGER
Electric shock
Even if the batteries are powered off, they always
supply -48 V, so take care while handling the
equipment.
3 Removal of the external batteries

a. Remove the four clamps (see Figure 199 "External battery
cabinet (NTQA36AA type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (only SBS
60 batteries)" (page 566)).
b. Identify cables no.1 to no.8.
c. Disconnect, imperatively in the following order, both cables no.1,
both cables no.2, both cables no.3, both cables no.4, and then
the cables no.5, no.6, no.7 and no.8.
d. For each battery (see Figure 199 "External battery cabinet
(NTQA36AA type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (only SBS 60
batteries)" (page 566)):
1. Unscrew nut no.2, which connects the black cable located on
the left side of the cabinet.
2. Unscrew the nut no.1, which connects the blue cable located
on the right side of the cabinet.
e. Remove the four batteries.
4 Reinsertion of the external batteries

a. Place the new batteries in the cabinet.
b. For each battery:
1. Screw nut no. 1, which connects the blue cable located on
the right side of the cabinet.
2. Screw nut no. 2 which connects the black cable located on
3. Connect, imperatively in the following order, the inter-battery
cables no. 8, no. 7, no. 6 and no. 5 and then both cables no.
4, both cables no. 3, both cables no. 2, both cables no. 1.
c. Replace the four clamps.
a. Put the breakers, located at the bottom of the cabinet, in the
"I" position.
b. Close the cabinet door.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
—End—
Figure 199
External battery cabinet (NTQA36AA type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (only SBS 60 batteries)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
6.2.41.2 Replacement of the external batteries (SBS 60 in

NTQA36AB or NTQA36BA type battery cabinet)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA36GA
CPC code: A0758428
Intervention time
Tools required
Wrench
Location
NTQA36AB of the S8000 outdoor BTS (SBS 60 batteries)" (page 75).
Warning
DANGER
Electric shock
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
DANGER
CAUTION
replaced.
instructions.
DANGER
Electric shock
equipment.

a. Identify cables no.1 to no.8 and cables no.1 bis to no.4 bis.
b. Disconnect, imperatively in the following order, cables no.1 and
no.1 bis, cables no.2 and no.2 bis, cables no.3 and no.3 bis,
cables no.4 and no.4 bis, and then cables no.5, no.6, no.7 and
no.8.
c. Remove the four clamps (See Figure 200 "External battery
cabinet (NTQA36AB type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (SBS 60
batteries)" (page 570)).
d. For each battery:
1. Unscrew nut no.2, which connects the blue cable located on
2. Unscrew nut no.1, which connects the black cable located at

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
e. Remove the the four batteries.
4 Insertion of the new external batteries.

b. For each battery.
1. Screw nut no.1, which connects the black cable located at
2. Screw nut no.2, which connects the blue cable located at
c. Connect, imperatively in the following order, cables no.8, no.7,

no.6, no.5, and then cables no.4 and no.4 bis, cables no.3 and
no.3 bis, cables no.2 and no.2 bis, and cables no.1 and no.1 bis.
d. Replace the four clamps.
a. Put the breakers, which are located at the bottom of the cabinet,
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 200
External battery cabinet (NTQA36AB type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (SBS 60 batteries)
6.2.41.3 Replacement of the external batteries (SBS C11 in

NTQA36AB or NTQA36BA type battery cabinet)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA92EA

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CPC code: A0809688

Intervention time
Tools required
Wrench
Location
NTQA36BA of the S8000 BTS (SBS C11 batteries)" (page 76)
Warning
DANGER
Electric shock
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
DANGER

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
replaced.
instructions.
DANGER
Electrical shock
equipment.

a. Identify straps no.1 to no.8, and straps no.1 bis to no.4 bis.
b. disconnect, imperatively in the following order, straps no.1 and
no.1 bis, straps no.2 and no.2 bis, straps no.3 and no.3 bis, straps
no.4 and no.4 bis, and then straps no.5, no.6, no.7 and no.8.
c. Remove the four clamps (see Figure 201 "External battery
cabinet (NTQA36BA type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (SBS C11
batteries)" (page 574)).
d. For each battery:
1. Disconnect lug no.2, which connects the blue cable located
on the left side of the cabinet.
2. Disconnect lug no.1, which connects the black cable located
on the right side of the cabinet.
e. Remove the four batteries.

4 Insertion of the new external batteries
b. For each battery:

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
1. Connect lug no.1, which connects the black cable located on

2. Connect lug no.2, which connects the blue cable located on
3. Connect, imperatively in the following order, straps no.8,
no.7, no.6, no.5, and then straps no.4 and no.4 bis, straps
no.3 and no.3 bis, straps no.2 and no.2 bis, and straps no.1
and no.1 bis.
c. Replace the four clamps.
a. Put the breakers, which are located at the bottom of the cabinet,
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 201
External battery cabinet (NTQA36BA type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (SBS C11 batteries)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
6.2.42 Replacement of the external battery circuit breaker (Battery

cabinet NTQA36AA)
Product reference
Breaker CPC Code

DC Breaker (90A) A0791366
AC Breaker (15A) A0682963
Tools required
• Screwdriver
• Wrench
CAUTION
The cabinet does not remain supplied with the mains power supply.
Location
The external battery circuit breaker is located on Figure 28 "External battery
cabinet NTQA36AA of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (NTQA36GA batteries)"
(page 74).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
a. Put the external battery circuit breaker in the "O" position (see
Figure 202 "External battery cabinet NTQA36AA of the S8000
Outdoor BTS (NTQA36GA batteries)" (page 578)).
b. Switch off the cabinet power supply from the operator box.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
3 Removal of the external battery circuit breaker

a. Locate and insulate the external battery cables.
b. Remove the four screws from the plastic cover on the same side
as the black cable.
c. Remove the no.1 screw from the black cable.
d. Remove the four screws from the plastic cover on the same side
as the blue wire.
e. Remove the no.2 screw fastening the blue cable.
f. Remove the two no.1 hexagonal screws on the DC drawer.
g. Remove the DC drawer.
h. Remove the four no.2 hexagonal screws fastening the circuit
breaker.
i. Locate the cables (see Figure 203 "External battery circuit
breaker of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 579)).
j. Remove the four nuts.
k. Disconnect the cables.
l. Remove the circuit breaker.
4 Reinsertion of the external battery circuit breaker.

a. Connect the external battery cables to the circuit breaker.
b. Tighten the four screws at the back of the circuit breaker.
c. Insert the circuit breaker in its slot.
d. Tighten the four no.2 hexagonal screws from the front of the
circuit breaker.
e. Insert the DC drawer.
f. Tighten the two no.1 hexagonal screws on the DC drawer.
g. Connect the no.2 blue cable.
h. Tighten the four screws on the plastic cover on the same side
as the blue wire.
i. Connect the no.1 black cable.
j. Tighten the four screws on the plastic cover on the same side
as the black wire.
5 Additional operations.
a. Check the following circuit breakers are in the "I" position:
• PA

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
• F converters
• BCF and PSCMD converters
• PCU and rectifier
b. Check the climatic system circuit breaker is in the "I" position.

c. Switch on the cabinet power supply from the operator box.
d. Put the external battery circuit breaker in the "I" position.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 202
External battery cabinet NTQA36AA of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (NTQA36GA batteries)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 203
External battery circuit breaker of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6.2.43 Replacement of the DC breaker (battery cabinet)

Product reference
CPC code: A0791366
Intervention time

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

Tools required
• Hexagonal Wrench

None as far as there is no AC power cut.
Location
See Figure 204 "DC breaker of the battery cabinet" (page 582) to locate
the "DC" breaker.
Warning
DANGER
Electric shock
The BTS remains supplied with the mains, so take care while
handling the equipment.
Procedure
Step Action
a. Put the battery cabinet "DC" breaker in the "0" position.
b. Put the battery cabinet "AC" breaker in the "0" position.
c. Disconnect and insulate the blue wire from each battery stack.
2 Exchange of the "DC" breaker

a. Unscrew the panel holding the circuit breaker (3 cross-head
screws). Then, unscrew the breaker itself (2 smaller cross-head
screws).
b. Disconnect the DC cables two by two (one black an one blue at
the same time) from the faulty breaker and reconnect them the
same way to the new breaker.
c. Disconnect both alarm wires and reconnect them identically to
the new breaker.
d. Screw the breaker to its holding panel and then, screw the panel
to the cabinet.
e. Check the new battery circuit breaker is in the "0" position.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
a. Reconnect the blue wires to each battery stack.
CAUTION
Tightening torques
The tightening torque of the terminals must be 3.9
N.m.
b. Put the battery cabinet "AC" breaker in the "I" position.

c. Put the battery cabinet "DC" breaker in the "I" position.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 204
DC breaker of the battery cabinet
6.2.44 Replacement of the fan filter (S8000 Indoor BTS)

Product reference
PEC code: NTQA6550
CPC code: A0680258

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Intervention time
Tools required
Cross-head screwdrivers
DANGER
Electric shock
The cabinet remains supplied with mains power supply, so take
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
a. Push down or up the two locks of the fan unit (see Figure 205
"View of the fan filter of the S8000 Indoor BTS" (page 585)).
b. Remove the cover.
3 Removal of a fan filter

a. Undo the two right screws (see Figure 205 "View of the fan filter
of the S8000 Indoor BTS" (page 585)).
b. Slide the fan filter and the retainer towards the right.
c. Remove the retainer.
d. Remove the fan filter.
4 Reinsertion of a fan filter

a. Reinsert the new fan filter on the right side (see Figure 205 "View
of the fan filter of the S8000 Indoor BTS" (page 585)).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
b. Slide the fan filter towards the left.

c. Insert the retainer.
d. Tighten the two screws.
a. Reinsert the cover.
b. Push the cover.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 205
View of the fan filter of the S8000 Indoor BTS
6.2.45 Replacement of an F-type converter (S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000

Product reference
PEC code: NTQA57AA

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CPC code: A0651999

Intervention time
Tools required

None.
The F-type converters are located on Figure 7 "Maximum equipment of
an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with the BCF" (page 53), Figure 8
CBCF" (page 54).
The F-type converters are located on Figure 42 "S8003 Indoor BTS: view of
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
b. Put the switch of the F-type converter in the "O" position.
3 Removal of a F-type converter

a. Disconnect all the cables on the front panel of the F-type
converter.
b. Undo the four fixing screws on the front panel of the F-type
converter (see Figure 206 "F-type converter" (page 588)).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
c. Extract the F-type converter with the extraction tool and remove
it.
4 Reinsertion of a F-type converter

a. Insert the F-type converter into the cabinet.
c. Reconnect all the cables.
a. Put the switch of the F-type converter in the "I" position.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 206
F-type converter

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
6.2.46 Replacement of a ground fault interrupter (S8000 Outdoor BTS

with AC mains box)
Table 99
AC mains box product reference for S8000 Outdoor BTS
Single-phase AC Box NTQA90BA A0772600
NTQA90BB
Single-phase AC Box NTQA90BC A0736729
NTQA90BE
Tri-phase AC Box NTQA90CA A0682000
NTQA90CB
NTQA90CC
NTQA90CD
NTQA90FA
Single-phase AC Box NTQA90AA A0693143
NTQA90AB
NTQA90AC
CPC codes:
A0772600 for the single-phase AC box NTQA90BA and NTQA90BB
A0736729 for the single-phase AC box NTQA90BC and NTQA90BE
A0682000 for the tri-phase AC box NTQA90CA, NTQA90CB, NTQA90CC,
NTQA90CD, and NTQA90FA
A0693143 for the single-phase AC box NTQA90AA, NTQA90AB, and
NTQA90AC
Intervention time
Tools required
• 10mm torque wrench
• Flat screwdrivers

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
The operationalState of the btsSiteManager object is "disabled".

Location
The ground fault interrupter is located inside the AC box.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
• For a single-phase mains power supply, perform the following
actions.
2. Switch off the main circuit breaker.
• For a tri-phase mains power supply, perform the following

actions.
3 Open the AC box

• For a single-phase AC box, perform the following actions.
1. Disconnect the alarm cable from the AC box.
2. Disconnect the rectifier cable.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
3. Undo the seven or eight securing screws on the AC box side

and remove the small cover (see Figure 207 "Single-phase
AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 593)).
4. Disconnect the input AC cable by unscrewing the screws
no.4 on the terminal block.
Remove the input AC cable gland by unscrewing the large
nut (see Figure 207 "Single-phase AC box of the S8000
5. Undo the two securing screws no.1 and no.2 on the AC box
top and on the AC box front panel.
8. Undo the sixteen screws on the left side cover of the AC box
(see Figure 209 "View of the ground fault interrupter of the
single-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 595))
and remove the big cover.

1. Disconnect the alarm cable located on top of the tri-phase
AC box.
2. Disconnect the rectifier cable.
3. Undo the seven or eight securing screws on the box side
and remove the small cover.
• three phases
• neutral ground
• ground.

8. Disconnect the AC input cable gland by removing the four
nuts on the filter and the nut on the ground terminal.
9. Remove the input cable gland by unscrewing the large nut.
10. Undo the two securing screws no.1 and no.2 on the AC box
top and on the AC box front panel (see Figure 208 "Tri-phase

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

13. Undo all the screws on the left side cover of the AC box and
remove the big cover.
4 Removal of a ground fault interrupter

actions.
1. Mark and disconnect the four wires by undoing the four
screws.
2. Undo the two nuts of the ground fault interrupter (see Figure
209 "View of the ground fault interrupter of the single-phase
3. Remove the ground fault interrupter.

actions.
1. Unscrew the two front screws no.1 of the service socket
circuit breaker (see Figure 211 "Internal and external views
of the tri-phase ground fault interrupter of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS" (page 597)).
2. Identify each lead and disconnect the cables.
3. Unscrew the two screws no.2 of the DIN rail.
4. Remove the ground fault interrupter.
5 Reinsertion of a ground fault interrupter

actions.
1. Insert the ground fault interrupter.
2. Tighten the two nuts.
3. Reconnect the four wires by tightening the four screws,
following the marks made on them beforehand.

actions.
1. Insert the ground fault interrupter.
2. Tighten the two screws no.2 of the DIN rail.
3. Tighten the two front screws no.1 of the mains connector
circuit breaker.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 207
Single-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 208
Tri-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 209
View of the ground fault interrupter of the single-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 210
View of the ground fault interrupter of the tri-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 211
Internal and external views of the tri-phase ground fault interrupter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6 Close the AC box

a. Insert the big cover.
b. Tighten the sixteen screws on the AC box side.
c. Push the AC box.
d. Install the input AC cable gland and tighten the large nut.
Connect the input AC cable on the terminal block and the ground
connection (see Figure 207 "Single-phase AC box of the S8000
e. Connect the rectifier cable.
f. Connect the ground cable with the nut.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
g. Connect the alarm cable on the AC box.

h. Insert the little cover.
i. Tighten the seven or eight screws on the AC box side.
j. Tighten the two screws no.1 and no.2 on the AC box top and on
the AC box front panel.
Ensure the power supplies of the cabinet are put into service in the
following order:
a. Check the main breaker of the single-phase AC box is set to the
"O" position or the general stop button is switched off.
b. Check the switches of the following modules are set to the "I"
position:
• PAs
• F power supplies
• BCF power supplies and PSCMD
• PCU
• Rectifiers
c. Check the circuit breakers of the climatic unit are set to the "I"
position.
d. Check the circuit breaker of the rectifiers is set to the "I" position.
e. Put the main breaker of the single-phase AC box in the "I"
position or put the electrical outlet breaker of the tri-phase AC
box in the "I" position.
f. Put the battery circuit breaker in the "I" position.
g. Switch on the mains power supply on the operator box.
—End—
6.2.47 Repair or replacement of the hood gasket (S8000 Outdoor BTS)

6.2.47.1 Repair of the hood gasket (procedure applicable on site
and in the warehouse)
Tools required
Glue LOCTITE 454
Impact of the replacement on the service

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The hood gasket is located on Figure 212 "View of the gaskets of the S8000
Outdoor BTS with the ACUs" (page 601).
Repair
• Inject a spot of glue LOCTITE 454 on the gasket every about 2 cm.
• Put in place the gasket and press on each sport of glue with the finger
for a least ten seconds.
CAUTION
To ensure that the hood key-locks are properly secured, refer to
Section 5.2.2 "Final checks after having performed preventive
maintenance procedures" (page 201).
• Close the hood.
6.2.47.2 Replacement of the hood gasket

Product reference
CPC codes:
Environmental gasket: R0117842

ACU exhaust gasket: P0870315 (two per cabinet)
EMI gaskets for the R0117841
bulkheads:
Tools required
• Lint free cloth
• Knife
• Quick set adhesive Permabond 105
• Roller hand 3/4’’ wide 60 durometer
• Safety glasses

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
DANGER
Electic shock
The BTS remains supplied with mains power supply, so take care
while handling the equipment.

Location
The hood gasket is located on Figure 212 "View of the gaskets of the S8000
Outdoor BTS with the ACUs" (page 601)
Intervention time

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 212
View of the gaskets of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the ACUs

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 213
View of the gaskets of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the DACS
Procedure
Step Action

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
handling boards.
If not done yet, open the doors or the hood.
3 Removal of a gasket
a. Remove the old gasket from the aluminum surface (seeFigure
212 "View of the gaskets of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the
ACUs" (page 601) and Figure 213 "View of the gaskets of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS with the DACS" (page 602)).
DANGER
ejection.

1. Use a lint free cloth applicator moistened with solvents
MEK or Acetone IPA to wash the aluminum surface until the
pressure sensitive adhesive is removed.
c. Determine the length of the gasket required and cut it with a knife
to the size with a 45 angle at each extremity.
4 Reinsertion of a gasket
a. Remove the release liner three to four inches at a time.
b. Put the gasket adhesive in place by pressing firmly on the surface
(see Figure 212 "View of the gaskets of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
with the ACUs" (page 601) and Figure 213 "View of the gaskets
of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the DACS" (page 602)).
c. Roll the gasket with a moderate pressure to glue it with a rubber
roller 3/4’’ wide.
d. Repeat the last operation but this time with enough force to
collapse the ‘D’ portion of the gasket. This pressure will ensure a

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
full contact of the pressure sensitive adhesive to the aluminum

surface.
CAUTION
Equipment damage
e. Achieve a full adhesive strength of the bond within 12 hours.

f. Join the corners by using a quick set adhesive (Permabond 105).
g. Inspect visually if the unbounded areas of the gasket are
remaining.
h. Close the doors one by one and check visually if the gasket
compression is correct everywhere.
CAUTION
201).
Close the doors or the hood.
—End—
6.2.48 Replacement of the internal batteries (S8000 Outdoor BTS)

Product reference
PEC code: NTQA36FA
CPC code: A0758427
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 20 minutes for each battery.
Tools required
• Stepladder
• Wrench

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
DANGER
Electric shock
CAUTION
If the AC box breaks down during the replacement, the service
is lost.
Location
The internal batteries are located on Figure 7 "Maximum equipment of an
CBCF" (page 54).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
DANGER

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
replaced.
instructions.
a. Put the battery circuit breaker of the AC mains box or of the DCU
of the GIPS in the "OFF" position.
b. Lift the hood.
DANGER
Electric shock
Even if the batteries are powered-off, they always
supply -48V, so take care while handling the
equipment.
3 Removal of the internal batteries

a. Lift the cover and tie it on the hood with the safety cable.
b. Take care to mark the cables before and isolate them with the
safety cable.
c. For each battery located in the upper cabinet compartment (see
Figure 214 "Internal batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page
608)), perform the following actions.
1. Unscrew the nut no.1 connecting the black cable and the
gray cable.
2. Unscrew the nut no.2 connecting the blue cable.
3. Unscrew the nuts no.3 connecting the black cables.
4. Grasp the battery using front and behind module edges.
5. Remove the battery from its compartment.
d. Remove the four batteries.
4 Reinsertion of the internal batteries

a. Place the new batteries.
b. For each battery, perform the following actions.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
1. Screw the nuts connecting the black cables.

2. Screw the nut connecting the blue cable.
3. Screw the nut connecting the black cable and the gray cable.
c. Untie the cover from the hood and push it down.

CAUTION
201).
a. Push the hood down.

b. Put the battery circuit breaker in the "I" position.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 214
Internal batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6.2.49 Replacement of the internal battery circuit breaker (S8000

Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
CPC code: A0682059

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately one hour.
Tools required
• Screwdriver
• Wrench
CAUTION
Location
The internal battery circuit breaker is located on Figure 7 "Maximum
equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with the BCF" (page 53)
and Figure 8 "Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
a. At the OMC-R, set the administrativeState of the btsSiteManager
object to "shuttingDown".
b. Put the battery circuit breaker of the AC mains box or of the ADU
of the GIPS in the "OFF" position..
c. Switch off the cabinet power supply from the operator box.
d. Lift the cabinet hood (see Figure 215 "Internal batteries of the

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
e. Lift the battery cover and tie it to the cabinet hood with the safety
cable.
f. Locate and insulate the battery cables.
g. Disconnect the battery cables.
h. Remove the no.1 nut fastening the black cable and the gray cable.
i. Remove the no.2 nut fastening the blue cable.
3 Removal of the internal battery circuit breaker

a. For the GIPS, in case of internal battery circuit breaker failure,
replace the GIPS rack (refer to paragraph)
Otherwise, perform the following actions.
b. Remove the six screws from the panel allowing access to the
circuit breaker.
c. Remove the two screws from the front of the circuit breaker (see
Figure 216 "Internal battery circuit breaker of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS" (page 612)).
d. Pull the top of the panel forward.
e. Identify the power cables.
f. Remove the four nuts.
g. Disconnect the power cables.
h. Disconnect the alarm wires.
i. Remove the circuit breaker.
4 Reinsertion of the internal battery circuit breaker

a. Obtain a new circuit breaker.
b. Tighten the two screws on the front of the new circuit breaker.
c. Connect the four power cables.
d. Tighten the four nuts.
e. Connect the alarm wires.
f. Place the circuit breaker panel in its slot.
g. Tighten the six screws on the panel where the circuit breaker
is located.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 215
Internal batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 216
Internal battery circuit breaker of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
CAUTION
Tightening torques
The tightening torque of the terminals must be 3.9 N-m.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
refer to paragraph Section 5.2.2 "Final checks after
having performed preventive maintenance procedures"
(page 201).
a. Tighten the no.1 nut attaching the black cable and the gray
cables.
b. Tighten the no.2 nut fastening the blue cable.
c. Untie the cover from the hood and close it.
d. Close the cabinet hood.
e. Check all the switches of the following modules are in the "I"
position:
• rectifiers
• FAN supply on the PCU or DACS supply on the DCU
• PA supply on the PCU or on the DCU
• F-type converters
• DRX supply on the PCU or on the DCU
• BCF supply on the PCU or on the DCU
• BCF power supplies and PSCMD board, if any
f. Check the PA switches are in "I" position or connect the power

g. Check the climatic system circuit breaker of the AC mains box or
of the ADU of the GIPS is in the "ON" position.
h. Switch on the cabinet power supply from the operator box.
i. Put the battery circuit breaker of the BTS in the "OFF" position.
j. At the OMC-R, set the administrativeState of the btsSiteManager
object to "unlocked".
—End—
6.2.50 Replacement of the lightning protectors of the 48 V box (S8000

Outdoor BTS)
Product reference

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CPC code: A0671776

Intervention time
Tools required
DANGER
Electric shock
The 48 V box does not remain supplied.

Location
The lightning protectors of the 48 V box are located at the plinth or the kit
according to the site configuration.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
configuration.
a. Disconnect the two wires of a lightning protector and mark them
(see Figure 217 "View of the 48 V box lightning protector of the

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
b. Undo the ground nut.

c. Remove a lightning protector.

a. Insert a new lightning protector.
beforehand.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 217
View of the 48 V box lightning protector of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6.2.51 Replacement of a PCM lightning protector (S8000 Outdoor BTS)

Product reference
CPC code: A0666945
Intervention time

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
The intervention time is approximately 20 minutes (for 12 lightning

protectors).
Tools required
• One tubular socket wrench
• One flat screwdriver
DANGER
Electric shock

Location
The PCM lightning protectors are located at the plinth or the kit.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
configuration.

a. Disconnect the two wires of the lightning protector and mark
them (see Figure 218 "View of the PCM lightning protectors of
b. Unscrew the ground nut.
c. Remove the lightning protector.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
a. Insert the new lightning protector (see Figure 218 "View of the
PCM lightning protectors of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page
619)).
beforehand.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 218
View of the PCM lightning protectors of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6.2.52 Replacement of the AC lightning protector (battery cabinet)

Product reference for CE type battery cabinet
CPC code: A0797207, split into:
• CPC code: A0773606 (phase plug-in protection module)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
• CPC code: A0773608 (neutral plug-in protection module)
Product reference for US type battery cabinet

CPC code: N0004020
Intervention time
Tools required

None.
Location
See Figure 219 "AC box (battery cabinet - CE type)" (page 622) to locate
the battery cabinet AC box.
Warning
CAUTION
The BTS remains supplied with the mains, so take care while
handling the equipment.
Procedure
Step Action
a. Check the battery cabinet "DC" breaker is in the "I" position.
b. Switch off the mains at the battery cabinet level ("AC" breaker
to "0").
c. Switch off the mains (battery cabinet breaker only) at the
operator box level.
2 Opening of the AC box

3 Exchange of the lightning protection module(s)
a. Unplug the dead module(s).
b. Plug instead the new one(s).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
4 Closing of the c-AC box

Screw back the cover.
a. Switch on the mains at the operator box level.
b. Switch on the mains at the battery cabinet level ("AC" breaker).
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 219
AC box (battery cabinet - CE type)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 220
Internal view of the AC box (CE type)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 221
Internal view of the AC box (US type)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 222
View of the US lightning protector
6.2.53 Replacement of a power amplifier module (S8000 Outdoor and


PA for GSM 900 NTQA50PA A0659885
ePA for GSM 900 NTQA50EA A0845798
PA for GSM (GSM-R and NTQA50PB A0724497
900)
PA for GSM-R NTQA50PC A0800537
PA module for GSM-R NTQA50PD A0835133
PA for GSM 1800 NTQA50HA A0655060
NTQA50HB A0800541
ePA for GSM 1800 NTQA50FA A0875359
PA for GSM 1900 NTQA50BA A0729151
NTQA50DA A0790178
NTQA50DB A0806545
ePA for GSM 1900 NTQA50GA A0845800
HePA for GSM 1900 NTQA50RA A0898263
HePA for GSM 900 NTQA50SA N0001950
ePA for GSM 850 NTQA37AA A0867496

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

PA module for GSM-R NTQA50PC A0800537
PA module for GSM-R NTQA50PD A0835133
ePA for GSM 900 NTQA50EA A0845798
HePA for GSM 900 NTQA50SA N0001950
Intervention time
Tools required
• 0.7N-m ± 0.1 SMA torque wrench
• 1.5N-m ± 0.1 N torque wrench
CAUTION
The service is reduced.
However, the service is lost in the case of a configuration O1.

The power amplifiers are located on Figure 7 "Maximum equipment of
an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with the BCF" (page 53), Figure 8
CBCF" (page 54), Figure 32 "Overview of an S8000 Indoor BTS with the
BCF cabinet" (page 102), and Figure 33 "Overview of an S8000 Indoor BTS
The power amplifiers are located on Figure 42 "S8003 Indoor BTS: view of
Identification of the PA type

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
At the OMC-R identify the type of the faulty power amplifier (PA, ePA or
HePA). The type of the faulty power amplifier determines the type that
should be used to replace it:
Faulty amplifier type Replacement amplifier

type
PA PA or ePA
ePA PA or ePA
HePA HePA
The replacement of a PA/ePA with an HePA is an upgrade of the

configuration, not a maintenance operation. If you want to make such a
replacement, you must refer to the relevant upgrade documentation.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
b. If incomplete, set the transceiverEquipment object associated
with the faulty DRX to "locked" at the OMC-R.
c. Disconnect the PA power supply:
• For the Type-1 PA: put the "POWER" switch of the PA in the
"O" position (see Figure 223 "Power amplifier (type 1)" (page
629) accor ding to the face plate).
• For the Type-2 PA: unplug the PS cable of the PA (PA side)
(see Figure 224 "Power amplifier (type 2)" (page 630)).
d. Disconnect, imperatively in the following order, the coaxial cables

and the connectors on the front panel:
1. the "POWER IN" power lead (cable on the PA INTERCO
panel first, then the PA or ePA)
2. then the "DATA I/0", "TX-in", "TX-out" cables and connectors

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
3 Removal a power amplifier

a. Undo the four fixing screws on the front panel of the power
amplifier (see Figure 223 "Power amplifier (type 1)" (page 629)
or Figure 224 "Power amplifier (type 2)" (page 630)).
b. Extract the power amplifier with the extraction tool and remove it.
4 Reinsertion of a power amplifier
a. Check the hardware version number of the element according to
the current release of the system.
b. Before putting the power amplifier in place, check the DC power
cable is above the PCM link.
c. Insert the power amplifier into the cabinet.
d. Tighten the four fixing screws.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 223
Power amplifier (type 1)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 224
Power amplifier (type 2)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 225
High Power Amplifier (HePA)
a. Reconnect, imperatively in the following order, the coaxial cables
and the connectors on the front panel:
1. the "DATA I/O", "RF IN", "RF OUT" cables and connectors
2. and last, the "POWER IN" power lead (cable on the PA or
ePA first, then on the PA INTERCO panel)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
Tightening torques
The tightening torque of the terminal "RF IN" must be
0.7 N-m ± 0.1. Use the 8-mm SMA torque wrench.
The tightening torque of the terminal "RF OUT" must
be 1.5 N-m ± 0.1. Use the 19-mm N torque wrench.
b. Connect the PA power supply:

"I" position (see Figure 223 "Power amplifier (type 1)" (page
• For the Type-2 PA: plug the PS cable of the PA (PA side) (see
Figure 224 "Power amplifier (type 2)" (page 630)).
c. Reset the corresponding DRX with its reset button (see Figure
195 "DRX module" (page 555) and Figure 196 "eDRX module"
(page 556)).
d. Set the transceiverEquipment object to "unlocked" at the OMC-R.
e. Ensure that the OMC-R parameter "bsTxPwrMax" has the
correct value for the amplifier type that you have installed:
• PA: bsTxPwrMax <= 30W
• ePA: bsTxPwrMax <= 30W
• HePA (mixed configuration with (e)PAs in a normal cell):
bsTxPwrMax <= 30W
• HePA (other configurations): bsTxPwrMax <= 60W
—End—
6.2.54 Replacement of the power supply rack of the seven-rectifier type

(S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code: NT5C90AO
CPC code: B0252521
Tools required
Flat screwdriver

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
The service is lost for 4 hours.
Location
The power supply rack is located in the system compartment on Figure 7
"Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with the BCF"
(page 53) and Figure 8 "Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS
base cabinet with the CBCF" (page 54)
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
• If the mains power supply is the single-phase or split
single-phase one, perform the following actions.
• If the mains power supply is the tri-phase one, perform the

following actions.
3 Removal of the power supply rack

a. Disconnect the mains power supply on the operator box.
b. Disconnect the battery cables.
c. Disconnect the rectifier cable from the AC box.
d. Open the front panel by unscrewing the two screws ( Figure 226
"Power supply rack (seven-rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS" (page 636)).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
e. Remove each rectifier as described in Section 6.2.56

"Replacement of a rectifier of the seven- rectifier type (500W
rectifier module) (S8000 Outdoor BTS)" (page 648).
f. Remove the cover of the distribution module.
g. Before disconnecting the ground and battery cables (blue and
black), take care to mark them.
h. Disconnect the ground and battery cables by unscrewing the
screw no.1 and no.3.
i. Disconnect the cable "Probe 2".
j. Unscrew the six fixing screws on the front panel which holds the
battery circuit breaker.
k. Unscrew the two screws of the battery circuit breaker.
l. Remove the front panel.
m. Remove at least the first four DRXs as described in Section
6.2.38 "Replacement of a DRX module (S8000 Outdoor BTS,
S8000 Indoor BTS, and S8003 Indoor BTS)" (page 550).
n. Push the battery circuit breaker.
o. Take care to mark the four vertical wires and the five horizontal
wires and unscrew them.
p. Unscrew the four screws of the Rx-splitter panel.
q. Move forward the panel lightly.
r. Undo the two fixing screws no.1 and disconnect the battery lugs
(see Figure 228 "Top view of the PCU (seven-rectifier type) of
s. Before disconnecting the eight DC power cables from the
distribution module, take care to mark them.
t. Unscrew the eight fixing screws no.2 and disconnect the cables.
u. Remove the power supply rack.
4 Reinsertion of the power supply rack

a. Insert the power supply rack in the cabinet.
b. Reconnect the DC power cables on the distribution module and
tighten the eight screws no.2.
c. Reconnect the battery lugs and tighten the two screws no.1.
d. Screw the four screws of the Rx-splitter panel.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
e. Reinsert the DRXs removed as described in Section 6.2.38

"Replacement of a DRX module (S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000
Indoor BTS, and S8003 Indoor BTS)" (page 550).
f. Insert the panel which holds the battery circuit breaker.
g. Tighten the two screws of the battery circuit breaker.
h. Tighten the six screws which holds the battery circuit breaker.
i. Connect the cable "Probe 2".
j. Put the cover of the distribution module.
k. Close the front panel of the power supply rack and tighten the
two screws.
l. Reconnect the rectifier cable on the AC box.
m. Reconnect the mains power supply on the operator box.

following actions.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 226
Power supply rack (seven-rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 227

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 228
Top view of the PCU (seven-rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6.2.55 Replacement of the power supply rack of the six-rectifier type

(S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA9101

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CPC code: A0651996

Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 3 hours.
Tools required
• The torque value for the connector jack screw for the PCU cables is
contained in the following table:
Tightening Torque
Type IN-LB N-CM
#4-40 Connector Between 1.3 and 2.0 Between 14.1 and 22.6
screw
CAUTION
Location
The power supply rack is located in the system compartment on Figure 7
"Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with the BCF"
(page 53) and Figure 8 "Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS
base cabinet with the CBCF" (page 54).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.


following actions.

a. Disconnect the mains power supply on the operator box.
b. Disconnect the cables from the batteries.
c. Disconnect the rectifier cable from the AC box.
d. Remove each rectifier as described in Section 6.2.57 "
Replacement of a rectifier of the six-rectifier type (600W rectifier
module) (S8000 Outdoor BTS)" (page 652).
e. Before disconnecting the battery cables (blue and black), take
care to mark them.
f. Disconnect the ground cable and the battery cables.
g. Unscrew the two fixing screws no.1 and disconnect the battery
lugs (see Figure 231 "Power supply rack (six-rectifier type) of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS (type 1)" (page 645)).
h. Unscrew the fixing screw for the cable "Probe 2".
i. Unscrew the six fixing screws no.2 on the front panel which holds
the battery circuit breaker.
j. Unscrew the two fixing screws of the battery circuit breaker.
k. Remove the front panel.
l. Remove at least the first four DRXs as described in Section
m. Push the battery circuit breaker.
n. From the top of the power supply rack, disconnect the eight
cables of the PCU, taking care to mark them (see Figure 233
"Top view of the PCU (six-rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS (type 1)" (page 647)).
o. Unscrew the eight screws, fixing the cables.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
p. Unscrew the four screws of the Rx-splitter panel and pull it lightly.
q. Disconnect the two D-sub connectors.
r. Unscrew the four fixing screws of the power supply rack.
s. Remove the two fillers.
t. Disconnect the Abis board.
u. Remove the power supply rack.
4 Reinsertion of the power supply rack

a. Insert the power supply rack in the cabinet.
b. Put the fillers in their place.
c. Screw the four fixing screws of the power supply rack.
d. Connect the Abis board.
e. Connect the two D-sub connectors.
f. Screw the four screws of the Rx-splitter panel.
g. Connect the eight cables to the PCU.
h. Screw the eight fixing screws of the PCU.
i. Turn on the battery circuit breaker.
j. Reinsert the DRXs as described in Section 6.2.38 "Replacement
of a DRX module (S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS, and
S8003 Indoor BTS)" (page 550).
k. Screw the two screws of the battery circuit breaker.
l. Insert the panel which holds the battery circuit breaker (see
Figure 231 "Power supply rack (six-rectifier type) of the S8000
Outdoor BTS (type 1)" (page 645)).
m. Tighten the six fixing screws no.2.
n. Screw the ground and battery cables.
o. Reconnect the cable "Probe 2".
p. Insert all the rectifiers.
q. Reconnect the rectifier cable on the AC box.
r. Reconnect the battery cables.
s. Reconnect the mains power supply on the operator box.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.


following actions.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 229
Power supply rack (six-rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (type 1)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 230

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 231

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 232

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 233
Top view of the PCU (six-rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (type 1)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 234
Top view of the PCU (six-rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (type 2)
6.2.56 Replacement of a rectifier of the seven- rectifier type (500W

rectifier module) (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
PEC code: NT5C15BC

CPC code: A0638313
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
None.
Location
The rectifiers are located in the system compartment on Figure 7 "Maximum
with the CBCF" (page 54)
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
Open the front panel of the power supply rack by unscrewing the two
screws (see Figure 227 "Power supply rack (seven-rectifier type) of
3 Removal of a rectifier
Extract the failed rectifier and remove it (see Figure 236 "Rectifier
(seven-rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 651)).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 235

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 236
Rectifier (seven-rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
4 Reinsertion of a rectifier
Insert the new rectifier into the rack and push it.
Close the front panel of the power supply rack and tighten the two
screws.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
6.2.57 Replacement of a rectifier of the six-rectifier type (600W rectifier

module) (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA91AA
CPC code: A0651991
Intervention time
Tools required

None.
Location
The rectifiers are located in the system compartment on Figure 7 "Maximum
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
On the front panel of the failed rectifier, put the switch of the faulty
rectifier in the "O" position.
a. Undo the four fixing screws on the front panel of the rectifier (see
Figure 237 "Rectifier (six-rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS (type 1)" (page 653)).
b. Extract the rectifier with the extraction tool and remove it.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 237
Rectifier (six-rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (type 1)
a. Insert the rectifier with its switch in "O" position, into the cabinet
and put it in place by pushing on the top and bottom edges.
Put the switch of the rectifier in the "I" position.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
6.2.58 Replacement of the GIPS (S8000 Outdoor BTS)

Product reference
PEC code:
• GIPS with ADU: NTQA9108
• GIPS without ADU: NTQA9109
CPC code:
• GIPS with ADU: A0996401
• GIPS without ADU: A0517945
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 3 hours.
Tools required
CAUTION
Location
The power supply rack is located on Figure 4 "Overview of an S8000
Outdoor BTS base cabinet (with DACS - type 1)" (page 50).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
2. Put the BTS site circuit breaker in the "O" position.

a. Disconnect the cables from the batteries.
b. Disconnect the AC main cable from the AC box.
c. Remove the ADU of the GIPS (refer to Section 6.2.60 "
Replacement of the AC Distribution Unit (ADU) (S8000 Outdoor
BTS with GIPS)" (page 661)).
d. Remove each rectifier as described in Section 6.2.59 "
Replacement of a rectifier of the GIPS (680W rectifier module)
(S8000 Outdoor BTS)" (page 659).
e. Before disconnecting the battery cables (blue and black), take
care to mark them.
f. Disconnect the ground cable and the battery cables above the
DCU.
g. Unscrew the two fixing screws and disconnect the battery lugs.
h. Disconnect the cable "Probe 2".
i. Remove at least the first four DRXs as described in Section
j. From the top of the GIPS, disconnect the eight cables of the
DCU, taking care to mark them.
k. Unscrew the eight screws, fixing the cables.
l. Unscrew the four screws of the Rx-splitter panel and pull it lightly.
m. Disconnect the D-sub connector.
n. Unscrew the four fixing screws of the GIPS.
o. Remove the filler.
p. Disconnect the Abis board.
q. Remove the GIPS.
4 Reinsertion of the GIPS
a. Insert the GIPS in the cabinet.
b. Put the filler in their place.
c. Screw the four fixing screws of the GIPS.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
d. Connect the Abis board.

e. Connect the D-sub connector.
f. Screw the four screws of the Rx-splitter panel.
g. Reinsert the DRXs as described in Section 6.2.38 "Replacement
of a DRX module (S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS, and
S8003 Indoor BTS)" (page 550).
h. From the top of the GIPS, reconnect the eight cables of the DCU.
i. Insert the panel above the GIPS.
j. Tighten the six fixing screws.
k. Screw the ground and battery cables.
l. Reconnect the cable "Probe 2".
m. Insert all the rectifiers.
n. Insert the ADU of the GIPS (refer to Section 6.2.60 "
Replacement of the AC Distribution Unit (ADU) (S8000 Outdoor
BTS with GIPS)" (page 661)).
o. Reconnect the AC main cable on the AC box.
p. Reconnect the battery cables.
1. Put the BTS site circuit breaker in the "I" position.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 238
GIPS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 239
View of the DCU

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
6.2.59 Replacement of a rectifier of the GIPS (680W rectifier module)

(S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference

680W rectifier NTQA91HA A0996402
rectifier filler NTQA91DA A0518068
Intervention time
Tools required
• Pozidrive screwdriver

None.
Location
The rectifiers are located in the system compartment on Figure 3 "Overview
of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet (with ACUs)" (page 49).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
On the front panel of the failed rectifier, put the switch of the faulty
rectifier in the "O" position.
a. Undo the four fixing screws on the front panel of the rectifier (see
Figure 241 "View of the ADU of the GIPS" (page 663)).
b. Extract the rectifier with the extraction tool and remove it.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 240
680W rectifier of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
a. Insert the rectifier with its switch in "O" position, into the cabinet
and put it in place by pushing on the top and bottom edges.
Put the switch of the rectifier in the "I" position.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
6.2.60 Replacement of the AC Distribution Unit (ADU) (S8000 Outdoor

BTS with GIPS)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA19AA
CPC code: A0504894
Intervention time
Tools required
• Pozidrive screwdriver
CAUTION
The BTS does not remain supplied with the power supply.
Location
The ADU is located in the GIPS in the system compartment.
Procedure
Step Action
1 Safety instruction
CAUTION
ESDS handling precaution
handling boards.
• Put the three circuit breakers in the "OFF" position.
• Disconnect the BTS site breaker.
• Disconnect the mains cable from the AC box.
3 Removal of the ADU

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
a. Unscrew the four fixing screws of the ADU front plate.

b. Extract the ADU and insert it into the fourth rectifier slot.
c. Remove the cable clamp from the DACS cable.
d. Disconnect the DACS connector.
e. Remove the ADU.
4 Reinsertion of the ADU

a. Insert the ADU into the fourth rectifier slot.
b. Connect the DACS connector.
c. Screw the cable clamp of the DACS cable.
d. Reinsert the ADU in the ADU slot.
e. Screw the four screws of the ADU front plate.
a. Connect the mains cable into the AC box.
b. Put the three circuit breakers of the ADU in the "ON" position.
c. Reconnect the BTS site breaker.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 241
View of the ADU of the GIPS
6.2.61 Replacement of a (CC8) remote tunable cavity combiner (S8000

Indoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA52SA

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CPC code: A0802416

Intervention time
Tools required
• 19-mm N torque wrench
CAUTION
Location
The CC8 module is located on Figure 38 "Maximum equipment of an S8000
Indoor BTS base cabinet with tx-filter/duplexer coupling" (page 108).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
a. Observe the state of the cell
b. Put the switch of the associated PA(s) in the ‘‘O’’ position
or disconnect the power cable of the PA from the PA
interconnections module.
c. Before disconnecting the cables, take care to mark them.
d. Disconnect the following cables on the front panel:
• the power cable (Power)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
• the coaxial cables (TX_in)
3 Removal of the cavity combiner module

a. Undo the ten fixing screws on the front panel (see Figure 242
"Remote tunable cavity combiner (CC8)" (page 666)).
b. Extract the module with the extraction tool and remove it.
4 Reinsertion of the cavity combiner module
b. Insert the cavity combiner module into the cabinet.
c. Tighten the ten fixing screws.
a. Reconnect the coaxial cables.
CAUTION
Equipment damage
Connect the cables imperatively in the given order, to
avoid damage to the equipment.
Connect the following cables on the front panel:

• the coaxial cables (TX_in)
• the power cable (Power)
b. Put the switch of the associated PA(s) in the ‘‘I’’ position or

connect the power cable of the PA to the PA interconnections
module.
c. Verify the LED is green for the power and the PCMs
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 242
Remote tunable cavity combiner (CC8)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
6.2.62 Replacement of a RF-combiner module (S8000 Outdoor and


900 RF-Combiner Module Duplexer
LNA: NTQA51SA A0671022
- without VSWR NTQA51VA A0684509
- with VSWR NTQA59BA A0842529
- without VSWR NTQA59AA A0842528
- with VSWR
900 RF-Combiner Module H2D LNA:
- without VSWR NTQA51PA A0659887
- with VSWR NTQA51QA A0684508
- without VSWR NTQA59HA A0842535
- with VSWR NTQA59GA A0842534
AMPS CONT:
- without VSWR NTQA51PB A0743003
- with VSWR NTQA51QB A0743004
- without VSWR NTQA59MA
- with VSWR NTQA59LA
- without VSWR NTQA52QA A0688927
- with VSWR NTQA52QB A0688930
- without VSWR NTQA59PA A0842541
- with VSWR NTQA59NA A0844250
AMPS:
- without VSWR NTQA52QC A0743053
- with VSWR NTQA52QD A0743054
- without VSWR AMPS NTQA59TA A0842545
- with VSWR AMPS NTQA59SA A0842544
LNA: NTQA51KA A0671021
- without VSWR NTQA51MA A0684507
- with VSWR NTQA59DA A0842531
- without VSWR NTQA59CA A0842530

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

- with VSWR
- with VSWR NTQA51JA A0684506
- without VSWR NTQA59KA A0842537
- without VSWR NTQA52JA A0688926
- with VSWR NTQA52JB A0688929
- without VSWR NTQA59RA A0842543
- with VSWR NTQA59QA A0842542
LNA: NTQA51DA A0671020
- without VSWR NTQA51FA A0684505
- with VSWR
1900 RF- Combiner Module H4D LNA:
- without VSWR NTQA52BA A0688925
- with VSWR NTQA52BB A0688928
1900 RF-Combiner Module H2D LNA
(not compatible with HePA)
1900 RF-Combiner Module H2D LNA
(HePA handling):
- with VSWR NTQA38LA A0501391
NTQA38CA A0867499
LNA:
- without VSWR (Part band) SMR
NTQA38DA A0867500
cositing
- with VSWR (Part band) SMR cositing NTQA38GA A0998581
- without VSWR (Full band) NTQA38FA A0998538
- with VSWR (Full band)
- without VSWR (Part band) NTQA38BA A0867498

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

- with VSWR (Part band) NTQA38AA A0867497
- without VSWR (Full band) NTQA38JA A0998593
- with VSWR (Full band) NTQA38HA A0998582
850 RF-Combiner Module H4D SMR:
without VSWR NTQA38NA A0537203
with VSWR NTQA38MA A0537202
GSM-R RF-Combiner Module Duplexer
LNA
V1: NTQA51XA A0688142
- without VSWR NTQA51XB A0688144
- with VSWR NTQA59FA A0842533
- without VSWR NTQA59EA A0842550
- with VSWR
GSM-R DUPLEXER V2:
- without VSWR NTQA51XC A0743018
- with VSWR NTQA51XD A0743019
- without VSWR NTQA59ZA A0842551
- with VSWR NTQA59YA A0842550
E-GSM H2D

LNA:
- without VSWR NTQA59BA A0842529
- with VSWR NTQA59AA A0842528
- with VSWR NTQA59GA A0842534
LNA:
- without VSWR NTQA59DA A0842531

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

- with VSWR NTQA59CA A0842530
GSM-R RF-Combiner Module Duplexer:
- without VSWR NTQA59ZA A0842551
- with VSWR NTQA59YA A0842550
Intervention time
Tools required
• 7/16" torque wrench
• 8-mm SMA torque wrench
CAUTION
The service is reduced: in fact, the service is lost for the calls of
the faulty RF-combiners.

The RF-combiner modules are located on Figure 7 "Maximum equipment
of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with the BCF" (page 53) to Figure
14 "Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS extension cabinet with
tx-filter/duplexer coupling" (page 60) andFigure 32 "Overview of an S8000
Indoor BTS with the BCF cabinet" (page 102) to Figure 39 "Maximum
equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS extension cabinet with tx-filter/duplexer
coupling" (page 109)
The RF-combiner modules are located on Figure 42 "S8003 Indoor BTS:
view of the cabinet (H2D coupling)" (page 131)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
b. Disconnect the PA power supply:
• For Power Amplifier (Type 1): put the "POWER" switch of the
PA in the "O" position (see Figure 223 "Power amplifier (type
1)" (page 629) according to the face plate).
• For Power Amplifier (Type 2 ): unplug the PS cable of the PA
(PA side) (see Figure 224 "Power amplifier (type 2)" (page
630)).
c. Before disconnecting the cables, take care to mark them.

d. Disconnect the following cables on the front panel:
CAUTION
Equipment damage
The connections of the other RF-combiners can
hamper the disconnection of the cables.
• for the duplexer RF-combiner module:

— the power cable (Pwr/Alarm VSWR)
— the coaxial cables (Int _0, Antenna, TX_in)
• for the H2D RF-combiner module:

— the coaxial cables (PA in, Int_0, Antenna)
• for the H4D RF-combiner module (for S8000 BTS only) :


411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
— the coaxial cables (PA in, Int_0, Antenna)
3 Removal of a RF-combiner module

a. Undo the fixing screws on the front panel (see Figure 243
"RF-combiner (duplexer) (S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor
BTS, and S8003 Indoor BTS)" (page 672) to Figure 245
"RF-combiner (H4D with VSWR) (S8000 Outdoor BTS and
S8000 Indoor BTS)" (page 674)): four screws for the duplexer
and H2D modules, six screws for the H4D modules (H4D is not
used in S8003 BTS).
Figure 243
RF-combiner (duplexer) (S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS, and S8003 Indoor BTS)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 244
RF-combiner (H2D) (S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS, and S8003 Indoor BTS)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 245
RF-combiner (H4D with VSWR) (S8000 Outdoor BTS and S8000 Indoor BTS)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 246
RF-combiner (H4D without VSWR) (S8000 Outdoor BTS and S8000 Indoor BTS)
4 Reinsertion of a RF-combiner module

b. Insert the RF-combiner module into the cabinet.
c. Tighten the four or six fixing screws.
a. Reconnect the coaxial cables.
Tightening torques

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
The tightening torque of the terminal "Antenna" must be 25 N-m

-0.1/+0.2. Use the 7/16" torque wrench.
The tightening torque of the terminals "Int_0", "Int_1", "Ext_0"
and‘‘Ext_1’’ must be 0.7 N-m + 0.1. Use the 8-mm SMA torque
wrench.
The tightening torque of the terminal "TX_in" of the duplexer, of
the terminals "PA in" of the H2D and H4D RF-combiners must be
1.5 N-m±0.1. Use the 19-mm N torque wrench.
• for the duplexer RF-combiner module:
— the power cables (LNA Pwr/Alarm, Pwr/Alarm VSWR)
— the coaxial cables (Int_0, Antenna, TX_in)
• for the H2D RF-combiner module:

— the coaxial cables (PA_in, Int_0 Antenna)
• for the H4D RF-combiner module (not used in S8003 BTS):

— the coaxial cables (PA_in, Int_0 Antenna)

629) according to the face plate).
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
6.2.63 Replacement of a Rx-splitter (S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor


Rx-splitter S4 for GSM 900 NTQA10PA A0666907
Rx-splitter S4 for GSM 1800 NTQA10HA A0666906
Rx-splitter S4 for GSM 1900 NTQA10AA A0660099
Rx-splitter for GSM 850 NTQA88XA A0868934

Rx splitter module for GSM 900 NTQA10PA A06669067
Rx splitter module for GSM 1800 NTQA10HA A0666906
Intervention time
Tools required
• Torque wrench
CAUTION
the faulty RF-combiners.

The Rx-splitters are located on Figure 7 "Maximum equipment of an S8000
equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with the CBCF" (page
54),Figure 32 "Overview of an S8000 Indoor BTS with the BCF cabinet"
(page 102) and Figure 33 "Overview of an S8000 Indoor BTS with the
CBCF" (page 103).
The Rx-splitters are located on Figure 42 "S8003 Indoor BTS: view of the

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
b. Unscrew the RF cables from the right side to the left side to have
some place to put the extraction tool.
c. Undo the two fixing screws no.1 on the higher Rx-splitter, if it
is to be replaced.
ATTENTION
For the S8003 BTS: due to the RF-cables number and location, the
following two steps (2-d and 2-e) are not imperative. Do them only if
necessary.
d. Undo the two fixing screws no.2 on the lower Rx-splitter. DO

NOT DISCONNECT THE RF CABLES.
e. Grasp and pull the lower splitter using the top and bottom edges.
f. Grasp and pull the higher splitter using the top and bottom
edges, if it is to be replaced.
3 Removal of a Rx-splitter
a. Disconnect the RF cables on the faulty Rx-splitter.
b. Remove the Rx-splitter.
4 Reinsertion of a Rx-splitter
b. Insert the module into the cabinet.
c. Reconnect the RF cables.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
a. Push the lower and possibly the higher Rx-splitter into the
cabinet.
b. Tighten the two fixing screws no.2 on the lower Rx-splitter.
c. Tighten possibly the two fixing screws no.1 on the higher
Rx-splitter.
d. Tighten the RF cables from the left side to the right side.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 247
Rx-splitter

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 248
Higher and lower Rx-splitter

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
6.2.64 Replacement of the external alarm secondary lightning protector

(S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference

Intervention time
Tools required
• One screwdriver for recessed cross-head screws
• One stepladder
DANGER
Electric shock
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
2 Removal of the external alarm secondary lightning protector

a. Remove the two connectors no.1 (see Figure 249 "View of the
secondary lightning protector (ALPRO board) of the S8000
Indoor BTS and S8003 Indoor BTS" (page 684)).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
b. Undo the four nuts of the external alarm secondary lightning

protector cover.
c. Undo the two screws of the connector no.2.
d. Undo the four cross-head screws.
e. Undo the ground screw.
f. Remove the board.
3 Reinsertion of the external alarm secondary lightning protector

a. Insert the board (see Figure 249 "View of the secondary lightning
protector (ALPRO board) of the S8000 Indoor BTS and S8003
Indoor BTS" (page 684)).
b. Tighten the ground screw.
c. Tighten the four cross-head screws.
d. Tighten the two screws of the connector no.2.
e. Insert the two connectors no.1.
f. Tighten the four nuts of the external alarm secondary lightning
protector cover.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 249
View of the secondary lightning protector (ALPRO board) of the S8000 Indoor BTS and S8003
Indoor BTS
6.2.65 Replacement of the ADU AC surge protector (S8000 Outdoor

BTS with GIPS)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
This procedure applies to the AC surge protector in the ADU. This surge
protector protects the GIPS and the BTS from damage caused by voltage or
current transients on the AC input line.
Product reference
ADU for S8000 GIPS
• PEC code: NTQA19AA
• CPC code: A0504894
Procedure
Step Action
1 Replace the ADU module of the GIPS (See Section 6.2.60 "
Replacement of the AC Distribution Unit (ADU) (S8000 Outdoor BTS
with GIPS)" (page 661)).
2 Replace the user AC plug if it is used (see Section 6.2.66

"Replacement of the user AC plug (S8000 Outdoor BTS with GIPS)"
(page 685)).
—End—
6.2.66 Replacement of the user AC plug (S8000 Outdoor BTS with GIPS)
Product reference

kit E type plug (GIPS/AC Box) NTQA18BA A0501183
kit F type plug (GIPS/AC Box) NTQA18DA A0501185
kit UK type plug (GIPS/AC NTQA18CA A0501184
Box)
kit US type plug (GIPS/AC NTQA18EA A0501193
Box)
Intervention time
Tool required
• Star screwdriver

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
The cabinet is operating on its battery power supply. If this is not
the case, the cabinet does not remain supplied with the mains
power supply and the service will be lost.
For batteries, perform the procedure without interruption, due to
the limited autonomy of the batteries.
Location
The user AC plug is located above the AC box / GIPS.
Procedure
Step Action
a. Check the battery circuit breaker located above the GIPS is in
the "I" position.
b. Switch off the mains power supply on the operator box.
2 Removal of the user AC plug

a. Unscrew the four screws of the AC box cover and remove.
b. Inside the AC box on the top left and right, unscrew the two
screws maintaining the user AC plug kit.
c. Inside the AC box, disconnect the three wires (neutral, phase,
and ground) connected from the user AC plug.
d. Unscrew the screw on the top of the user AC plug.
e. Remove the user AC plug.
3 Reinsertion of the user AC plug

a. Insert the new user AC plug above the AC box.
b. Align the two small punch on the AC box with the two small holes
of the user AC plug.
c. Inside the AC box on the top left and right, screw the two screws
fixing the user AC plug.
d. Screw the screw on the top of the user AC plug.
e. Reconnect the three wires (phase, neutral, and ground)
according to the label inside the AC box.
f. Put in place the AC box cover.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
g. Screw the four screws fixing the AC box cover.
a. Switch on the mains power supply on the operator box.
—End—
6.2.67 Replacement of the single-phase AC lightning protector (S8000

Outdoor BTS with AC main box)
Product references
Type 1 Type 2 Type 3

PEC code CPC code PEC code CPC code PEC code CPC code
NTQA90B A0662896
Single-phas
A NTQA90 NTQA90
e AC box A0731697 A0771948
NTQA90B A0724617 BC BE
B
Single-p
hase AC A083015
A0797207 A0797207
lightning 9*
protector
Neutral plug-in Neutral plug-in
A0773608 A0773608
Cartridge
Phase plug-in Phase plug-in
A0773606 A0773606
* Replacement KIT
PEC CODE CPC codes
Single-phase lightning protector replacement kit NTQA90KA A0828534
Single-phase AC lightning protector A0830159
Alarm cable NTQA9214
Ground cable NTQA9215

Split Single- PEC COD CPC COD PEC COD CPC COD PEC COD CPC COD
phase AC E E E E E E
box
NTQA90 A0651990 NTQA90 A0731695 NTQA90 A0771947
AA AB AC

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

Split
Single-p
hase AC A0681514 A0747999 A0747999
lightning
protector
Cartridge Neutral plug-in Neutral plug-in
A0773608 A0773608
A0773606 A0773606
Intervention time
Tools required
• Screwdriver
• Wrench
CAUTION
Location
The AC lightning protector is located inside the AC box.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
a. Check the battery circuit breaker, located above the rectifier
shelf, is in the "I" position.
b. Put the main circuit breaker in the "O" position.
c. Switch off the mains power supply on the operator box.
d. Disconnect the alarm cable from the AC box and the rectifier
cable.
e. Undo the seven or eight securing screws no.4 on the AC box side
and remove the small cover (see Figure 250 "Single-phase AC
box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 691) and Figure 253 "Split
single-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 694)).
3 Actions on lightning protector depending on the single phase AC box
type1, type 2 or type 3 and on split-single-phase AC box.
For a lightning protector of a single-phase AC box type 1, see
procedure paragraph 6.2.74.
For a lightning protector of single-phase AC type 2 or type 3,
perform the following actions:
• Removal of the lightning protector
1. Before disconnecting the cables, take care to mark them.
2. Disconnect each cable from the lightning protector by
unscrewing the screws no.5 (see Figure 252 "Single-phase
AC lightning protector of AC box type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS" (page 693) and Figure 255 "Split single-phase AC
lightning protector of AC box type 2 of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS" (page 696)).
3. Disconnect the alarm cables from the terminal block on the
lightning protector by unscrewing the screws no.6.
4. Pull the plastic piece to remove the lightning protector from
the rail din.
• Reinsertion of the lightning protector

1. Install the new lightning protector.
2. Reconnect the alarm cables on the lightning protector by
screwing the two screws no.2.
3. Connect each cable on the lightning protector by screwing
the three screws no.1.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
For a lightning protector of split-single-phase AC box type 1,

type 2 or type 3, perform the following actions:
• Removal of the lightning protector
1. Take care to mark the cables before.
2. Disconnect each cable from the terminal block, by unscrewing
the screwsAno.3 (see Figure 251 "Single-phase AC lightning
protector of AC box type 2 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS"
(page 692) and Figure 254 "Split single-phase AC lightning
protector of AC box type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page
695)).
3. Disconnect the alarm cables on the lightning protector
terminal block.
4. Undo the two nuts securing the lightning protector.
5. Remove the lightning protector.
• Reinsertion of the lightning protector

1. Connect the alarm cable on the lightning protector
2. Connect the lug of the ground cable
4. Screw the two nuts securing the lightning protector.
5. Reconnect the alarm cables on the lightning protector
terminal block.
6. Reconnect each cable on the terminal block, by screwing
the screws no.2.
a. Put the small cover back on.
b. Tighten the seven or eight screws (see Figure 250 "Single-phase
AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 691) and Figure 253
"Split single-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page
694)).
c. Connect the alarm cable on the AC box and the rectifier cable.
d. Switch on the mains power supply on the operator box.
e. Put the main circuit breaker in the "I" position.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 250
Single-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 251
Single-phase AC lightning protector of AC box type 2 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 252
Single-phase AC lightning protector of AC box type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 253
Split single-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 254
Split single-phase AC lightning protector of AC box type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 255
Split single-phase AC lightning protector of AC box type 2 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6.2.68 Replacement of the thermostats (S8000 Outdoor BTS)

Product reference
CPC codes: high temperature thermostat: A0664132

low temperature thermostat: A0664133

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately four hours.
Tools required
• Stepladder
• Allen wrench
CAUTION
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
• For a single-phase or split single-phase mains power supply,
3. Remove the right climatic unit of the ACU (see the
replacement procedure in Section 6.2.14 "Replacement of
an ACU climatic unit (S8000 Outdoor BTS)" (page 393)) or
the DACS (see the replacement procedure in Section 6.2.20
BTS)" (page 426)).
4. Unscrew the six fixing screws on the front panel holding the
5. Remove the front panel.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
6. If necessary, remove:
• some DRXs (see the replacement procedure in Section
6.2.38 "Replacement of a DRX module (S8000 Outdoor
BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS, and S8003 Indoor BTS)" (page
550))
• some Rx-splitters (see the replacement procedure in
Section 6.2.63 "Replacement of a Rx-splitter (S8000
Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS, and S8003 Indoor
BTS)" (page 677))
• the power supply rack (see the replacement procedure
in Section 6.2.54 "Replacement of the power supply
rack of the seven-rectifier type (S8000 Outdoor BTS)"
(page 632) or Section 6.2.55 "Replacement of the power
supply rack of the six-rectifier type (S8000 Outdoor BTS)"
(page 638))

actions.
3. Remove the right climatic unit of the ACU (see the
replacement of one climatic unit (ACU)) or the DACS (see the
replacement of the DACS).
4. Unscrew the six fixing screws on the front panel holding the
5. Remove the front panel.
6. If necessary, remove:
• some DRXs (see the replacement procedure in Section
6.2.38 "Replacement of a DRX module (S8000 Outdoor
BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS, and S8003 Indoor BTS)" (page
550))
• some Rx-splitters (see the replacement procedure in
Section 6.2.63 "Replacement of a Rx-splitter (S8000
Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS, and S8003 Indoor
BTS)" (page 677))
• the power supply rack (see the replacement procedure
in Section 6.2.54 "Replacement of the power supply
rack of the seven-rectifier type (S8000 Outdoor BTS)"
(page 632) or Section 6.2.55 "Replacement of the power
supply rack of the six-rectifier type (S8000 Outdoor BTS)"
(page 638))

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
3 Removal of the thermostats

a. Unscrew the two fixing screws holding the high temperature
thermostat.
b. Disconnect the two lugs fixed on the high temperature thermostat.
c. Remove the high temperature thermostat.
d. Unscrew the two fixing screws holding the low temperature
thermostat.
e. Disconnect the two lugs fixed on the low temperature thermostat.
f. Remove the low temperature thermostat.
4 Reinsertion of the thermostats
a. Insert the high temperature thermostat.
b. Connect the two lugs fixed on the high temperature thermostat.
c. Screw the two fixing screws holding the high temperature
thermostat.
d. Insert the low temperature thermostat.
e. Connect the two lugs fixed on the low temperature thermostat.
f. Screw the two fixing screws holding the low temperature
thermostat.
1. If necessary, insert the DRX modules, the Rx-splitters and
the power supply rack.
2. Insert the panel which holds the battery circuit breaker.
3. Screw the six fixing screws on the front panel which holds the
4. Install the right climatic unit of the ACU (see the replacement
procedure in Section 6.2.14 "Replacement of an ACU
climatic unit (S8000 Outdoor BTS)" (page 393)) or the
DACS (see the replacement procedure in Section 6.2.20
BTS)" (page 426)).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

following actions.
1. If necessary, insert the DRX modules, the Rx-splitters and
the power supply rack.
2. Insert the panel which holds the battery circuit breaker.
3. Screw the six fixing screws on the front panel which holds the
4. Install the right climatic unit of the ACU (see the replacement
procedure in Section 6.2.14 "Replacement of an ACU
climatic unit (S8000 Outdoor BTS)" (page 393)) or the
DACS (see the replacement procedure in Section 6.2.20
BTS)" (page 426)).
—End—
6.2.69 Replacement of the tri-phase AC lightning protector (S8000

Outdoor BTS with AC main box)
Product references

PEC code CPC code PEC code CPC code PEC code CPC code
Tri-phase NTQA90
AC box A0681891
CA NTQA90 NTQA90
A0731698 A0771949
NTQA90 CC CD
A0724618
CB
Tri-phase
kit
AC
NTQA90L A0797205 A0797205
lightning
A
protector

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Neutral plug-in Neutral plug-in

A0773608 A0773608
Cartridge
A0773606 A0773606
Component of the kit NTQA90LA

PEC code CPC codes
Tri-phase AC lightning protector A0830189
Alarm cable NTQA9214
Ground cable NTQA9215
Intervention time
Tools required
• Screwdriver
• Wrench
• Drill machine (5-mm drill bit)
• Punch tool with a hammer
CAUTION
CAUTION
Location

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
a. Check the battery circuit breakers, if any, are in the "I" position.
b. Press the general stop button.
c. Switch off the mains power supply of the cabinet from the
operator box (see Figure 256 "Tri-phase AC box of the S8000
d. Disconnect the alarm cable from the AC box and the rectifier
cable.
e. Remove the seven or eight screws on the side of the tri-phase
AC box and remove the small cover.
3 Removal of the lightning protector
• For a lightning protector of AC box type 1, perform the
following actions.
1. Make a note of the wire positions (see Figure 257 "Tri-phase
AC lightning protector of AC box type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS" (page 706)).
2. Disconnect the cables connected on the filters by unscrewing
the four nuts.
lightning protector.
4. Remove the four screws securing the lightning protector.
• For a tri-phase lightning protectors replacements perform the

following actions.
1. Before disconnecting the cables, take care to mark them (see
Figure 258 "Tri-phase AC lightning protector of AC box type 2

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
2. Disconnect the cables connected on the filters by unscrewing

the four nuts.
3. Disconnect the connector of the alarm cable.
4. Disconnect the ground cable from the ground connection.
5. Remove the four screws securing the lightning protector.
• For a lightning protector of AC box type 2 or type 3, perform

1. Before disconnecting the cables, take care to mark them (see
Figure 258 "Tri-phase AC lightning protector of AC box type 2
2. Disconnect each cable from the lightning protector by
unscrewing the five screws no.5.
lightning protector by unscrewing the screws no.6.
4. Pull the plastic piece to remove the lightning protector from
the rail din.
4 Reinsertion of the lightning protector

• For a lightning protector of AC box type 1, perform the
following actions.
2. Tighten the four fixing screws.
3. Connect the lightning protector alarm wires.
4. Connect the cables by tightening the four nuts.
• For a tri-phase lightning protectors replacement kit perform

1. Install the tri-phase lightning protectors replacement kit.
2. Crimp the terminal lugs on each AC wires of the lightning
protector.
3. Crimp the terminal lugs on each ground wires of the lightning
protector.
4. Remove the metallic support of the new surge arrestor and
place it on the external face of the AC box.
5. Tighten the two lower screws.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
6. Mark with a felt-tip through the two upper clinch nuts of the
metallic support.
7. Remove the metallic support from the external face of the AC
box and replace it on the new surge arrestor.
8. Make a punch mark on each felt-tip mark with a punch tool
with a hammer.
9. Drill a hole on each punch mark.
10. Burr the holes and and clean the filings from the AC box and
the BTS.
11. Connect the alarm cables lug to position 2 on the lightning
protector.
12. Connect the smaller lug of the ground cable to position 3 on
the lightning protector.
14. Tighten the four fixing screws.
15. Connect the biggest lug of the ground cables to ground
connection.
16. Connect the connector of the alarm cables.
17. Connect the cables of phases and neutral.
18. Tighten the four nuts.
• For a lightning protector of AC box type 2 or type 3 perform

2. Reconnect the alarm cables on the lightning protector by
screwing the two screws no.2.
3. Connect each cable on the lightning protector by screwing
the five screws no.1.
a. Put the small cover back on.
b. Tighten the seven or eight screws (see Figure 256 "Tri-phase AC
box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 705)).
c. Reconnect the alarm cable on the AC box and the rectifier cable.
d. Switch on the mains power supply on the operator box.
e. Put the circuit breakers of the AC box in the "I" position.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
—End—
Figure 256
Tri-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 257
Tri-phase AC lightning protector of AC box type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 258
Tri-phase AC lightning protector of AC box type 2 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
6.2.70 Replacement of a Tx-filter module (TX-F) (S8000 Outdoor BTS,

S8000 Indoor BTS and S8003 Indoor BTS)
Product references for S8000 BTS

900 RF-Combiner Module
Tx-filter:
- without VSWR NTQA52RA A0688933
- with VSWR NTQA52RB A0729306
- without VSWR NTQA59UA A0842546
- with VSWR NTQA59VA A0842547
Tx-filter:
- with VSWR NTQA52KB A0729305
- without VSWR NTQA59WA A0842548
- with VSWR NTQA59XA A0842549
Tx-filter:
- without VSWR NTQA52CA A0688931
- with VSWR NTQA52CB A0729304
Tx-filter:
- without VSWR (Part Band) NTQA39AA A0867505
- with VSWR (Part Band) NTQA39BA A0867506
- without VSWR (Full Band) NTQA39CA A0500688
- with VSWR (Full Band) NTQA39DA A0500689
Product references for S8003 BTS

Tx-filter:
- without VSWR NTQA59VA A0842547
- with VSWR NTQA59UA A0842546
Tx-filter:

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

- without VSWR NTQA59XA A0842549
- with VSWR NTQA59WA A0842548
Intervention time
Tools required
• Extraction tool P0850747
• 7/16" torque wrench
CAUTION
Service reduction
the faulty Tx-filters.
Location
The Tx-filter modules are located on Figure 13 "Maximum equipment of an
S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with tx-filter/duplexer coupling" (page
59), Figure 14 "Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS extension
cabinet with tx-filter/duplexer coupling" (page 60), Figure 38 "Maximum
equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet with tx-filter/duplexer
coupling" (page 108) and Figure 39 "Maximum equipment of an S8000
Indoor BTS extension cabinet with tx-filter/duplexer coupling" (page 109)
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

b. Disconnect the PA power supply:
"O" position (see Figure 223 "Power amplifier (type 1)" (page
• For the Type-2 PA: unplug the PS cable of the PA (PA side)
(see Figure 224 "Power amplifier (type 2)" (page 630)).
c. Disconnect the following cables on the front panel:
CAUTION
Equipment damage
The connections of the other RF-combiners can
hamper the disconnection of the cables.
1. the power cable (Pwr/Alarm VSWR)

2. the coaxial cables (PA in, Antenna)
3 Removal of a Tx-filter module

a. Undo the four fixing screws on the front panel (see Figure 259
"Tx-filter" (page 712)).
4 Reinsertion of a Tx-filter module

b. Insert the RF-combiner module into the cabinet.
c. Tighten the four fixing screws.
a. Reconnect the cables from the following information (except for
PA power cable in case of Type-2 PA):

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
Tightening torques
The tightening torque of the terminal "Antenna" must
be 25 N-m -0.1/+0.2. Use the 7/16" torque wrench.
The tightening torque of the terminal of the terminal
"PA must be 1.5 N-m + 0.1. Use the 19-mm N torque
wrench.

1. the power cables (Pwr/Alarm VSWR)
2. the coaxial cables (Antenna, PA_in)

—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 259
Tx-filter

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
6.2.71 Replacement of the 75 Ohms kit (S8000 Indoor BTS and S8003
Indoor BTS)
Product reference S8000

Adaptation Box 75 ohm evol NTQA17DL A0548929
Product reference S8003

Adaptation Box 75 ohm evol NTQA17DL A0548929
Intervention time
Tools required
DANGER
Electric shock
The 48 V box does not remain supplied.

Location
The 75 kit is located on the cabinet top of the S8000 Indoor BTS and the
S8003 Indoor BTS (see Figure 260 "S8000 Indoor BTS: Cabinet top" (page
715) and Figure 261 "S8003 Indoor BTS: Cabinet top" (page 716)).
Procedure
Step Action

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
handling boards.
2 Removal of a 75 ohms kit

a. Disconnect all wires leading to or from the 75 ohms kit and mark
them.
b. Undo the screws attaching the 75 ohms kit to the cabinet top.
c. Remove the kit.
3 Reinsertion of a 75 ohms kit

a. Place a 75 ohms kit in the correct position on the cabinet top.
b. Attach the 75 ohms kit to the cabinet top by tightening the screws
previously removed.
c. Reconnect all wires leading to or from the kit, following the marks
made on them beforehand.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 260
S8000 Indoor BTS: Cabinet top

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 261
S8003 Indoor BTS: Cabinet top

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
6.2.72 Replacement of the 75 Ohms kit (S8000 BTS Outdoor)

Product reference

IP 67 75 ohms adaptation module
NTQA17RA N0002199
(L=1.5m with PCM)
NTQA17RB N0002200
(L=5.5m without PCM)
NTQA17RC N0002201
(L=1.5m without PCM)
NTQA17RD N0002202
(L=5.5m with PCM)
Intervention time
Tools required
DANGER
Electric shock
The 48V box does not remain supplied.

Location
The 75 kit is located in one of two types of adaptation module. These are
located in the plinth of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (see Figure 262 "View of the
75 Ohms adaptation module" (page 719) and Figure 263 "View of the 75
Ohms adaptation module" (page 720)).
Procedure
Step Action

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
handling boards.
a. Open the plinth according to the site configuration.
3 Open the 75 ohms adaptation module

4 Removal of the 75 ohms kit
a. Disconnect all wires leading to or from the 75 ohms kit and mark
them.
b. Undo the screws attaching the 75 ohms kit to the adaptation
module.
c. Remove the kit.
5 Reinsertion of a 75 ohms kit

a. Place a 75 ohms kit in the correct position in the adaptation
module.
b. Attach the 75 ohms kit to the adaptation module by tightening
the screws previously removed.
c. Reconnect all wires leading to or from the kit, following the marks
made on them beforehand.
6 Close the 75 ohms adaptation module
a. Close the plinth according to site configuration.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 262
View of the 75 Ohms adaptation module

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 263
View of the 75 Ohms adaptation module

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
6.2.73 Replacement of the air filter (S8003 Indoor BTS)

Product reference

Air filter P0604420
Intervention time
Tools required
-head screwdrivers
DANGER
Electric shock
The cabinet remains supplied with the mains power supply, so
take care while handling the equipment.

Location
The air filter is located on the door of the cabinet (see Figure 264 "View of
the air filter of the S8003 Indoor BTS" (page 723)).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
2 Removal of an air filter

a. Undo the six nuts of the mechanical frame (see Figure 264 "View
of the air filter of the S8003 Indoor BTS" (page 723)) containing
the air filter.
b. Remove the mechanical frame.
c. Dissociate the air filter from the mechanical frame.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
d. Remove the air filter.
3 Reinsertion of an air filter

a. Reinsert the new air filter (in any direction) in the mechanical
frame (see Figure 264 "View of the air filter of the S8003 Indoor
BTS" (page 723)).
b. Put the mechanical frame on the cabinet door on the opposite
page of its fastening holes.
c. Tighten the six nuts of the mechanical frame.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 264
View of the air filter of the S8003 Indoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
6.2.74 Replacement of a fan (S8003 Indoor BTS)

Product reference

Fan S8003 Indoor NTE682AA A0512639
Intervention time
Intervention time is approximately 30 minutes when changing all four fans.
CAUTION
Overtemperature
During this procedure, the cabinet operates without the cooling
system. This does not generate trouble because the intervention
time is not long.
If the procedure is prolonged for an extended period of time (for
any reason), the temperature increases: the cabinet thermostat
triggers an alarm when the cabinet temperature exceeds 45 C.
The PA alarm appears when the cabinet temperature exceeds 60

C, causing a loss of service.
Tools required
• head screwdrivers
• Flat head screwdrivers

When changing only one fan, there is no loss of service. When changing all
four, the service can be lost.
Location
The four fans are located in the fan tray of the cabinet (see Figure 265
"Extraction of the fan tray from the S8003 Indoor BTS cabinet" (page 728)).
Procedure
Step Action

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
DANGER
Electric shock
The cabinet remains supplied with the mains power
CAUTION
handling boards.
DANGER
To avoid injury, wait until the fan stops rotating before
removing the fan tray.
a. This replacement procedure is required in two cases:
• After a test of the fans, if the test result requires changing
one or more fans. The operator notes the position of the
faulty fan(s).
• During a systematic and periodic replacement procedure of
the fans. In this case, the four fans must be changed.
b. Open the door.
3 Removal of the fan tray (see Figure 265 "Extraction of the fan tray
from the S8003 Indoor BTS cabinet" (page 728)):
a. Unplug the connector of the power supply cable from the fan tray.
REMEMBER THE CABLE CONNECTOR REMAINS SUPPLIED
WITH -48V.
b. Undo the two screws securing the fan tray in the cabinet.
c. Extract the fan tray as follows:
• Pull the fan tray forward until the first two fans are exposed.
• WAIT UNTIL THE FAN STOPS ROTATING.
• Remove the fan tray.
d. Turn the fan tray upside down and place on a table.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
4 Removal of the faulty fan(s) (see Figure 266 "Removal of an S8003

Indoor fan from the fan tray" (page 729)):
a. Undo the four screws maintaining the fan on the fan tray.
b. Cut the ty-wrap maintaining the two PS wires of the faulty fan
with the PS wires of the other fans.
c. Unplug its two PS wires from the connection box by using a small
flat head screwdriver as follows:
• Insert the screwdriver in the empty slot nearest the wire slot.
• Push the screwdriver towards the middle axe of the
connection box opening the connector jaws.
• Extract the wire.
• Push the screwdriver in the opposite direction of the middle
axe of the connection box to shut the connector jaws.
d. Remove the faulty fan. Remove other fans as needed.

5 Installation of a new fan on the fan tray (see Figure 266 "Removal of
an S8003 Indoor fan from the fan tray" (page 729)):
a. Put the spare fan in place. The two PS wires must be grouped
with the PS wires of the other fans.
b. Tighten the four fan screws in order to maintain the fan on the
tray.
c. Plug its two PS wires on the connection box by using a small flat
head screwdriver as follows:
• Insert the screwdriver in the empty slot nearest the wire slot.
• Push the screwdriver towards the middle axe of the
connection box opening the connector jaws.
• Insert the wire termination
• Push the screwdriver in the opposite direction of the middle
axe of the connection box to shut the connector jaws.
d. The fan is installed. Install other fans as needed.

e. Install the ty-wrap maintaining the two PS wires of the fan with
the six other PS wires.
6 Installation of the fan tray in the cabinet (see Figure 265 "Extraction
of the fan tray from the S8003 Indoor BTS cabinet" (page 728)):
a. Turn the fan tray right side up and insert it completely in the
cabinet.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
b. Plug the PS cable connector in the tray PS connector.

REMEMBER THE CABLE CONNECTOR REMAINS SUPPLIED
WITH -48V.
7 Check the fan operation (see Figure 265 "Extraction of the fan tray
from the S8003 Indoor BTS cabinet" (page 728))
a. Partially extract the fan tray as follows:
• Pull the fan tray forward, without unplugging the PS
connector, until the four fans are exposed.
b. Check the four fans for rotation:

• In case of failure, note the position of the faulty fan(s),
re-insert the tray in its slot, and go to step 3.
• Otherwise, re-insert the tray in its slot.
c. Tighten the two screws securing the fan tray on the cabinet.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 265
Extraction of the fan tray from the S8003 Indoor BTS cabinet

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 266
Removal of an S8003 Indoor fan from the fan tray
6.2.75 Installation of the new S8000 Outdoor BTS AC single phase

lightning protector
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA90KA

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CPC code: A0830159

Intervention time
Tools required
• Flashlight
• Flat screwdriver 2.5 mm (length: 150 mm)
• Cross-head screwdriver #3 and #4
• Open end wrench #10
• Crimping-plier for cable 1.5 to 2.5 mm2
• Drill machine and drill bit 5 or 6 mm
• Automatic center punch or a punch tool with a hammer
• Multimeter
• Inspection mirror in plastic frame
• Retrofit kit NTQA90KA
Impact of the installation on service
CAUTION
The battery backup must be available for one hour.
Location
To remove the old AC lightning protector, refer to Section 6.2.67
"Replacement of the single-phase AC lightning protector (S8000 Outdoor
BTS with AC main box)" (page 687).
Procedure
Step Action

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
handling boards.
2 Connect the alarm cables’ lug (NTQA9214, refer to Figure 262 "View
of the 75 Ohms adaptation module" (page 719)) to the position 2 on
the lightning protector (refer to Figure 263 "View of the 75 Ohms
adaptation module" (page 720)).
3 Connect the smaller lug of alarm of GND cable (NTQA9215, refer to

Figure 262 "View of the 75 Ohms adaptation module" (page 719)) to
the position 3 on the lightning protector (refer to Figure 263 "View of
the 75 Ohms adaptation module" (page 720)).
4 Install the new single phase AC lightning protector.
5 Tighten the four fixing screws (refer to Figure 252 "Single-phase AC

lightning protector of AC box type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS"
(page 693)).
6 Connect the biggest lug of GND cable NTQA9215 (refer to Figure

262 "View of the 75 Ohms adaptation module" (page 719)) to the
ground connection (refer to Figure 252 "Single-phase AC lightning
protector of AC box type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 693)).
7 Connect the sub-D connector of the alarm cable NTQA9214.
8 Connect the cables of phase (brown) and neutral (blue) on the

terminal block (refer to Figure 252 "Single-phase AC lightning
protector of AC box type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 693)).
9 Reconnect the alarm cable (connector C01) and rectifier cable
(connector C02) from AC box.
10 Turn on the following breakers:

a. The site breaker dedicated to the cabinet.
b. The "Main circuit breaker" CB01 of the AC box.
c. The "Climatic System circuit breaker" CB03 on the AC box.
d. The "Rectifier circuit breaker" CB02
11 Check the LED with an inspection mirror if necessary. If the LED
is not illuminated, the lightning protector is defective and must be
replaced.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
12 Remove the old label and stick the new one on the AC box following
the type and release :
PEC code Impacted release New release after

retrofit
NTQA90BA 06 07
NTQA90BB 05 06
NTQA90CA 02 03
NTQA90CB 01 03
NTQA90CB 02 04
13 Put in place the cover and tighten the seven or eight screws (see
Figure 250 "Single-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS"
(page 691) and Figure 253 "Split single-phase AC box of the S8000
—End—
Figure 267
Lightning protector cables

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 268
Single phase AC lightning protector
6.2.76 Installation of the new S8000 Outdoor BTS AC three phase

lightning protector
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA90LA
CPC code: A0830189
Intervention time
Tools required
• Flashlight
• Flat screwdriver 2.5 mm (length: 150 mm)
• Felt tipped marker
• Cross-head screwdriver #3 and #4
• Open end wrench #10
• Crimping-plier for cable 1.5 to 2.5 mm2
• Drill machine and drill bit 5 or 6 mm
• Automatic center punch or a punch tool with a hammer
• Multimeter
• Inspection mirror in plastic frame

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
• Retrofit kit NTQA90LA
Impact of the installation on service
CAUTION
The battery backup must be available for one hour.
Location
To remove the old AC lightning protector, refer to Section 6.2.69
"Replacement of the tri-phase AC lightning protector (S8000 Outdoor BTS
with AC main box)" (page 700).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
2 Crimp the terminal lugs on each AC and GND wires of the AC

lightning protector (refer to Figure 268 "Single phase AC lightning
protector" (page 733)).
3 Remove the metallic support of the new surge arrestor and place it
on the external side of the AC box and tighten the two lower screws
(refer to Figure 256 "Tri-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS"
(page 705)).
4 Mark with a felt-tipped marker through the two upper clinch nuts of
the metallic support.
5 Remove the metallic support from the external side of the AC box
and replace it on the new surge arrestor.
6 Make a punch mark on each felt-tip mark with an automatic center
punch or a punch tool with hammer.
7 Drill a hole (5 or 6 mm of diameter) on each punch mark.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
8 Burr the holes and clean the filings from the AC box and the S8000
Outdoor BTS.
9 Connect the alarm cables’ lug (NTQA9214, refer to Figure 267

"Lightning protector cables" (page 732)) to position 2 on the AC
lightning protector (refer to Figure 268 "Single phase AC lightning
protector" (page 733)).
10 Connect the smaller lug of the GND cable NTQA9215 (refer to
Figure 267 "Lightning protector cables" (page 732)) to position 3 on
the AC lightning protector (refer to Figure 268 "Single phase AC
lightning protector" (page 733)).
11 Install the new AC lightning protector.

12 Tighten the four fixing screws.
13 Connect the biggest lug of GND cable (NTQA9215, refer to Figure

267 "Lightning protector cables" (page 732)) and green and yellow
wire of lightning protector to ground connection (refer to Figure 256
"Tri-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 705)).
14 Connect the sub-D connector of the NTQA 9214 alarm cable (refer
to Figure 267 "Lightning protector cables" (page 732)).
15 Connect the four phase cables (brown, 1, 2, 3) and neutral blue

cable by tightening the four nuts (refer to Figure 256 "Tri-phase AC
box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 705)).
16 Reconnect the alarm cable (connector C01) and rectifier cable

(connector C02) from AC box.
17 Turn on the following breakers:
a. The site breaker dedicated to the cabinet.
b. The "ACU0" circuit breaker (CB02) and "ACU1" circuit breaker
(CB03) on the AC box.
c. The "Rectifier circuit breaker" (CB01) on three phase AC box.
18 Check the LED with an inspection mirror if necessary. If the LED
is not illuminated, the lightning protector is defective and must be
replaced.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
19 Remove the old label and stick the new one on the AC box following
the type and release :
PEC code Impacted release New release after

retrofit
NTQA90BA 06 07
NTQA90BB 05 06
NTQA90CA 02 03
NTQA90CB 01 03
NTQA90CB 02 04
20 Put in place the cover and tighten the seven or eight screws (see
Figure 250 "Single-phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS"
(page 691) and Figure 253 "Split single-phase AC box of the S8000
—End—
Figure 269
Lightning protector cables

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 270
Single phase AC lightning protector
6.2.77 Replacement of the BRC module (S8000 Outdoor BTS)

Product reference

BRC NTQA91CA A0820070
ATTENTION
GSM-R specific
The BRC module is equipment specific to GSM-R applications. It allows the
Battery Remote Maintenance.
Intervention time
Required tool(s)
Location
The Battery Remote Controller (BRC) is located in the power supply rack,
at position 6.
Warning

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
Wear the antistatic bracelet when performing the maintenance
procedure described below, especially when handling boards.
Procedure
Step Action
1 Preliminary operation
Disconnect the different cables from the front face of the BRC
module.
2 Removal of the BRC module
a. Unscrew the front face of the BRC module (four fixing screws).
b. Remove the BRC module with the extraction tool.
ATTENTION
Prior to BRC removal, if the BTS was switched to battery using OMCR,
the “Battery on Discharge” alarm will clear from the OMCR alarm window.
However, there will be no CLEAR ALARM indication in the Notification
window.
3 Reinsertion of a new BRC module

a. Insert and push the BRC module into the dc power supply rack.
4 Additional operation
Reconnect the different cables onto the front face of the BRC module.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 271
Battery Remote Controler (BRC) module
Replacement of the heating and ventilation unit (S8000 Outdoor BTS)

Intervention time The intervention time is
Tools required
Screwdriver
Location

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
The HVU (heating and ventilation unit) is located in the base cabinet of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
b. Put the “AC” and “DC” breakers, which are located at the bottom
of the cabinet in the “0” position.
DANGER
Electric shock
Even if the batteries are powered off, they always supply
--48 V, so take care while handling the equipment.
3 Removal of the heating and ventilation unit

a. Disconnect the cables from the front panel.
b. Undo the four screws of the heating and ventilation unit.
c. Remove the heating and ventilation unit.
4 Reinsertion of the heating and ventilation unit
a. Insert the heating and ventilation unit.
b. Tighten the four fixing screws onto the cabinet.
c. Reconnect the different cables onto the front panel.
5 Put the “AC” and “DC” breakers in the “I” position.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
741
Chapter 7
On-site TIL use
7.1 Introduction
This chapter presents the actions to be taken in case of fault number 1067
on the DRX or PA equipment.
The TIL can be used on-site to confirm the faults at the OMC-R. The
available TIL menus are described in NTP < 51 >.
This chapter presents the on-site maintenance actions for the following
causes of fault number 1067:
• for the PA equipment:
— (6815745) Hardware
— (6815746) DRX/PA connection
• for the DRX equipment (the term DRX refers to DRX, eDRX, or
DRX-ND3, unless the context indicates otherwise)
— (9437185) RX fault
— (9437190) BBFILTER ASIC fault
— (9437193) Self test failed
— (9437194) Major fault on TX
— (9437206) DRX link
— (9437216) The TX has not acknowledged the power consign request
— (9437217) PA DRX control loop fault
7.2 Preliminary actions

7.2.1 Actions at the OMC-R
Before any intervention, confirm the alarm at the OMC-R:
• Switch the transceiverEquipment object to "locked".
• Switch the transceiverEquipment object to "unlocked".

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
742 Chapter 7 On-site TIL use
• Check for a change in the alarm.
7.2.2 On-site actions

Perform the following actions to identify the alarms.
7.2.2.1 TIL connection

Log on to the TIL (using the link Ethernet connected to the active CMCF
board). Refer to NTP < 51 > .
7.2.2.2 Alarm identification

When the cabinet is displayed, perform the following actions.
• click on the "DRX" object
• display the options
• choose ’Alarms"
Thirteen different alarms are possible:

• High temperature alarm
• High current alarm
• Low power alarm
• VSWR alarm
• Automatic Level Control alarm
• PA power shutdown alarm
• Main RX connector alarm
• Diversity RX connector alarm
• Diversity loss - main channel alarm
• Diversity loss - diversity channel alarm
• RX PLL alarm
• TX alarm
• BB filter alarm
7.3 Corrective action sheets

These sheets are given in the following pages.
7.3.1 Alarm: High temperature alarm

Reaction of the system
This alarm indicates an excessively high temperature on the PA.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
On-site maintenance
Step Action
1 Checks
Check the running of the DACS climatic system.
a. If it is correct, go to step 2.
b. If it is not correct, perform a corrective action on the DACS.
2 FRU replacement
a. Switch the transceiverEquipment object corresponding to the
faulty PA to "locked".
CAUTION
Service reduction
In most cases, the TRX and one TDMA are lost.
b. Replace the faulty PA according to the replacement procedure

(see Section 6.2.53 "Replacement of a power amplifier module
(S8000 Outdoor & Indoor BTS and S8003 Indoor BTS)"
(page 625)).
c. Switch the transceiverEquipment object corresponding to the
replaced PA to "unlocked".
d. Ensure the ALARM LED of the PA is green.
e. Verify the fault is cleared (the alarms are transferred to the alarm
history file of the OMC-R).
f. Go to step 3.
—End—
7.3.2 Alarm: High current alarm

This alarm indicates errors concerning the PA power supply.
It concerns the following errors:
• errors on the DC/DC converters of the PA
• errors of an excessive power consumption of the PA

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
On-site maintenance
Step Action
1 FRU replacement.
CAUTION
Service reduction

(page 625)).
f. Go to step 2.
—End—
7.3.3 Alarm: Low power alarm

This alarm indicates a weak transmission level at the PA output.
The alarm threshold is equal to the nominal cell power (-6dB).
On-site maintenance
Step Action
1 Checks
a. Check the RF cables between the DRX and the PA.
b. Using the TIL, have the DRX transmit in BCCH mode at the cell
frequency (see Section 7.4 "TX test" (page 757)).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
• If the problem persists, go to step 2.

• If the problem disappears, go to step 3.
2 FRU replacement
CAUTION
Service reduction

(page 625)).
e. Make sure the fault is cleared (the alarms are transferred to the
alarm history file of the OMC-R).
f. Go to step 3.
—End—
7.3.4 Alarm: VSWR alarm

This alarm indicates VSWR errors at the PA output.
On-site maintenance
Step Action
1 Checks
a. Check all the cables of the chain: PA-duplexer-feeder-antenna.
b. If necessary, tighten the cables at the PA output.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
Tightening torques
The tightening torque of the terminal "RF IN" must be
0.7 N-m ± 0.1. Use the 8-mm SMA torque wrench.
The tightening torque of the terminal "RF OUT" must
be 1.5 N-m ± 0.1. Use the 19-mm N torque wrench.
c. Using the TIL, have the TX transmit in BCCH mode at the cell
• If the problem disappears, go to step 3.
• If the problem persists, go to step 2.
2 FRU replacement
CAUTION
Service reduction

(page 625)).
f. Go to step 3.
—End—
7.3.5 Alarm: Automatic level control

This alarm indicates the power closed-loop control of the DRX/PA couple
is reaching saturation (high or low).
411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
The alarm cause can be:

• a problem in the DRX
• a problem on the RF cable between the DRX and the PA
• a problem in the PA
• a problem on the "DATA" cable between the PA and the DRX
On-site maintenance
Step Action
1 Checks
a. Check the "RF" and ’DATA" cables.
b. If necessary, tighten the "RF" cable.
CAUTION
Tightening torques
The tightening torque must be 0.7 N-m ± 0.1. Use the
8-mm SMA torque wrench.
c. Using the TIL, have the TX transmit in BCCH mode at the cell
• If the alarm persists, go to step 2.
• If the alarm disappears, go to step 6.
2 PA replacement

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
Service reduction

(page 625)).
e. Using the TIL, have the TX transmit in BCCH mode at the cell
3 DRX replacement
faulty DRX to "locked".
CAUTION
Service reduction
b. Replace the faulty DRX according to the replacement procedure

(see Section 6.2.38 "Replacement of a DRX module (S8000
Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS, and S8003 Indoor BTS)"
(page 550)).
c. After DRX start-up, check the following LEDs:
1. +5V for DRX, or PWR for eDRX is ON
2. BIT, SPU and ALA are OFF
3. DRX is blinking
d. Switch the transceiverEquipment object corresponding to the

replaced DRX to "unlocked".
411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

4 Cable replacement
a. Replace the following cables:
CAUTION
Tightening torques
The tightening torque of the terminals of the RF
cables must be 0.7 N-m ± 0.1. Use the 8-mm SMA
torque wrench.
1. the "FH-PCM" cable between the DRX and the DRX-ICO

2. the "DATA I/O" cable between the DRX and the PA
3. the "RF" cable
b. Go to step 1.
5 New PA replacement
PA to "locked".
CAUTION
Service reduction
b. Replace the new PA with the old one according to the

replacement procedure (see Section 6.2.53 "Replacement of a
power amplifier module (S8000 Outdoor & Indoor BTS and
S8003 Indoor BTS)" (page 625)).
PA to "unlocked".
• If the alarm persists, the old PA and the old DRX are not
correct. Go to step 2.
• If the alarm disappears, the old PA is correct and the old DRX
is not correct. Go to step 6.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
—End—
7.3.6 Alarm: PA power shutdown alarm

This alarm indicates an excessively high input level on the PA.
On-site maintenance
Step Action
1 Checks
a. Check the RF wiring between the DRX and the PA.
b. Using the TIL, have the TX transmit in BCCH mode at the cell
2 FRU replacement
CAUTION
Service reduction

(page 625)).
f. Go to step 3.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
—End—
7.3.7 Alarm: Main RX connector alarm

This alarm corresponds to a fault in the reception amplifier of the main path,
located in the Rx-splitter. A current overload is detected on the main path. It
may be due to a hardware problem on the cable.
On-site maintenance
Step Action
1
• Check the RF cabling between the DRX and the RX splitter.
— If it is correct, replace the RX splitter according to the
replacement procedure (see Section 6.2.63 "Replacement
of a Rx-splitter (S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS, and
• If it is not correct, replace the cable between the DRX and the
RX splitter.
• Verify the fault is cleared (the alarms are transferred to the alarm
• The procedure is complete.
—End—
7.3.8 Alarm: Diversity RX connector alarm

This alarm corresponds to a fault in the reception amplifier of the diversity
path, located in the Rx-splitter. A current overload is detected on the
diversity path. It can be caused by a hardware problem on the cable.
On-site maintenance
Step Action
1
• Check the RF cabling between the DRX and the RX splitter.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
— If it is correct, replace the RX splitter according to the

replacement procedure (see Section 6.2.63 "Replacement
of a Rx-splitter (S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS, and
• If it is not correct, replace the cable between the DRX and the
RX splitter.
• Verify the fault is cleared (the alarms are transferred to the alarm
• The procedure is complete.
—End—
7.3.9 Alarm: Diversity loss - main channel alarm

This alarm indicates the DRX is detecting a received signal level difference
between the main path and the diversity path.
On-site maintenance
Step Action
1 Check the antenna reception route: RF-combiner, Rx-splitter, DRX.

• If any cables are removed, re-insert them. Go to step 2.
2 Check the cables and the connectors are correctly tightened.

• If the cables are not correctly tightened, tighten them.
— If the alarm persists, go to step 3.
— Otherwise, go to step 5.
• If the cables are correctly tightened and if the alarm persists, go

to step 3. Otherwise, go to step 5.
3 Replace the DRX module (Field Replaceable Unit). Refer to:

• Section 6.2.38 "Replacement of a DRX module (S8000 Outdoor
BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS, and S8003 Indoor BTS)" (page 550)
Analyze the alarm.


411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
• If the alarm has disappeared, go to step 5.
4 Replace the RF-combiner (Field Replaceable Unit). Refer to:

• Section 6.2.62 " Replacement of a RF-combiner module (S8000
Outdoor & Indoor BTS, and S8003 Indoor BTS)" (page 667)
Analyze the alarm.

• If the alarm persists, replace the Rx-splitter (Field Replaceable
Unit). Refer toSection 6.2.63 "Replacement of a Rx-splitter
(S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS, and S8003 Indoor
BTS)" (page 677)
—End—
7.3.10 Alarm: Diversity loss - diversity channel alarm

This alarm indicates the DRX detects a received signal level difference
between the main path and the diversity path.
On-site maintenance
Step Action
1 Check the antenna reception route: RF-combiner, Rx-splitter, DRX.

• If any cables are removed, re-insert them. Go to step 2.
2 Check the cables and the connectors are correctly tightened.

• If the cables are not correctly tightened, tighten them.
— Otherwise, go to step 5.
• If the cables are correctly tightened and if the alarm persists, go

to step 3. Otherwise, go to step 5.
3 Replace the DRX module (Field Replaceable Unit). Refer to:

• Section 6.2.38 "Replacement of a DRX module (S8000 Outdoor
BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS, and S8003 Indoor BTS)" (page 550)

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Analyze the alarm.

4 Replace the RF-combiner (Field Replaceable Unit). Refer to:

• Section 6.2.62 " Replacement of a RF-combiner module (S8000
Outdoor & Indoor BTS, and S8003 Indoor BTS)" (page 667)
Analyze the alarm.

• If the alarm persists, replace the Rx-splitter (Field Replaceable
Unit). Refer to Section 6.2.63 "Replacement of a Rx-splitter
(S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS, and S8003 Indoor
BTS)" (page 677):
—End—
7.3.11 Alarm: RX PLL alarm

This alarm indicates the TRX is no longer operational.
On-site maintenance
Step Action
1 Reset the DRX.

2 Switch the transceiverEquipment object corresponding to the faulty

DRX to "locked".
CAUTION
Service reduction
3 Disconnect the PWR cable on the front panel of the DRX (DRX-ICO
side).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
4 Check the fuse of the DRX-ICO unit.

• If it is correct, replace the faulty DRX according to the
replacement procedure (see Section 6.2.38 "Replacement of
a DRX module (S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS, and
• If it is not correct, replace the fuse (Shop Replaceable Unit).
Go to step 5.
5 After DRX start-up, check the following LEDs:

• +5V for DRX, or PWR for eDRX is ON
• BIST, SPU, and ALA are OFF
• DRX is blinking
6 Switch the transceiverEquipment object corresponding to the

replaced DRX to "unlocked". Go to step 6.
—End—
7.3.12 Alarm: TX alarm

This alarm indicates a problem on the DRX.
On-site maintenance
Step Action
1 Reset the DRX.

2 Set the administrativeState of the transceiverEquipment object

corresponding to the faulty DRX to "locked".
CAUTION
Service reduction
In most cases, the transceiverEquipment and one
transceiver object are lost.
3 Disconnect the PWR cable on the front panel of the DRX (DRX-ICO
side).

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
4 Check the fuse of the DRX unit.

• If it is correct, replace the faulty DRX module (Field Replaceable
Unit). Refer to:
— Section 6.2.38 "Replacement of a DRX module (S8000
(page 550)
Go to step 6.
• If it is not correct, replace the fuse (Shop Replaceable Unit).
Go to step 6.
5 After DRX start-up, check the following LEDs:

• +5V for DRX, or PWR for eDRX is ON
• BIST, SPU and ALA are OFF
• DRX is blinking
6 Set the administrativeState of the transceiverEquipment object

corresponding to the faulty DRX to "unlocked".
7 Replace the PA module (Field Replaceable Unit). Refer to:

• Section 6.2.53 "Replacement of a power amplifier module
(page 625)
— If the alarm has disappeared, go to step 9.
8 Check the cable between the PA and the DRX.

• If it is correct, go to step 9.
• If it is not correct, replace it (Shop Replaceable Unit). Go to
step 9.
—End—
7.3.13 Alarm: BB filter alarm


411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
7.4 TX test 757
This alarm indicates a hardware problem.
On-site maintenance
Step Action
1 Reset the DRX.

2 DRX replacement
faulty DRX to "locked".
CAUTION
Service reduction
b. Disconnect the PWR cable on the front panel of the DRX

(DRX-ICO side).
c. Replace the faulty DRX according to the replacement procedure
(see Section 6.2.38 "Replacement of a DRX module (S8000
(page 550)).
d. After DRX start-up, check the following LEDs:
1. +5V for DRX, or PWR for eDRX is ON
2. BIST, SPU and ALA are OFF
3. DRX is blinking
e. Switch the transceiverEquipment object corresponding to the

replaced DRX to "unlocked".
—End—
7.4 TX test
7.4.1 Introduction
This test enables a TX to be configured in a special test mode in order to
monitor its transmission power in a given channel.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
The following procedure is performed either in standalone mode (BTS not

operational) or in connected mode after TX isolation (see NTP < 51 >).
7.4.2 TX test procedure
Step Action
1 TX isolation
a. If the BTS is in connected mode, isolate the TX.
b. Install the test bench of the power measurement.
2 Equipment installation
Install the measuring equipment on the transmission channel and
check the transmitter load is correct (see Figure 272 "Installation for
the TX test procedure" (page 759)).
3 Checks
a. For the TX to be examined, run the "BCCH configuration" menu
of the PA object.
b. Enter the value "4" (maximum output power in dBm).
c. Enter the value of the selected channel. Enter either the value of
the frequency of the TX being measured, or one of the following
central values:
• 62 for PGSM
• 975 for EGSM
• 965 for RGSM
• 190 for GSM 850
• 699 for GSM 1800
• 66 for GSM 1900
When the TX receives the information, a message indicates the

correct configuration. The TX begins to transmit.
d. Read the value displayed by the measuring device.
e. Add the attenuation caused by the measurement and the
attenuation caused by the combiner and the internal cables.
f. Check the final result corresponds to the theoretical value.
g. Stop the DRX Transmission using Transmission stop command.
4 TX de-isolation
De-isolate the TX.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
7.4 TX test 759
—End—
Figure 272
Installation for the TX test procedure

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
761
Chapter 8
DACS and Low Noise DACS technical
manual
This chapter gives technical and operational descriptions and covers the
troubleshooting for the following:
• the Direct Ambient Cooling System (DACS)
• the Low Noise Direct Ambient Cooling System (Low Noise DACS)
DACS and Low Noise DACS Maintenance is described in Chapter 5 in this

guide.
The DACS and Low Noise DACS are used for cooling the Nortel Networks
GSM base station cabinets. These cabinets may be located in most
environments, normally outdoor.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
762 Chapter 8 DACS and Low Noise DACS technical manual
Figure 273
DACS or Low Noise DACS unit in the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Chapter 8 DACS and Low Noise DACS technical manual 763
Figure 274
DACS or Low Noise DACS unit

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
8.1 DACS technical manual

8.1.1 Technical aspects
8.1.1.1 Construction
The DACS cabinet is constructed from zinc-coated sheet steel (Galvatite
600). The metalwork is left unpainted to ensure good electrical bonding
between the component parts, essential for the control of electromagnetic
radiation from and into the unit. To avoid corrosion, no parts are welded.
The filter is accessed through the small plate at the front of the unit, while
internal components may be reached through the removable top lid. Both lid
and plate are secured by quick release, quarter-turn fasteners.
Figure 274 "DACS or Low Noise DACS unit" (page 763) shows the key
internal components.
8.1.1.2 Twin blowers

The blowers serve to circulate air through the BTS cabinet, to cool the
internal loads. They are brushless DC types, driven either by the internal
transformer/rectifier unit at low temperatures, by the rectifier at normal
temperatures or by the internal battery during mains failure conditions.
The blowers incorporate a soft-start feature ramping up their speed slowly

and minimizes inrush currents. Each provides a fan running signal (5V
square wave), employed to announce a fan failure.
8.1.1.3 Air-directing damper

The damper, which rotates around a pivot point close to the base, is used to
control air movement within the DACS unit. When fully closed, the damper
excludes outside air and air is circulated within the BTS cabinet. When the
damper is fully open, there is no recirculation and the cooling unit operates
by drawing in ambient air which is then routed through the BTS cabinet and
ejected through the outlet ducts at the two sides of the DACS.
At intermediate positions, the damper is adjusted automatically to give a

mix of recirculated and fresh air and therefore obtain the internal working
temperature of 40C.
8.1.1.4 Modulating damper motor and linkages

The damper is controlled by the modulating motor using suitable linkages.
Operation of the damper between extreme positions is achieved within a
motor rotation of approximately 70C, so the motor is not limited by its end
stops in either direction. This guarantees a very good seal against outside
or recirculated air, since the motor can apply maximum pressure to the
sealing gaskets.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
The DC motor driving the gearbox of the actuator, is brushed and rated for
continuous operation under stalled conditions; its life expectancy is in excess
of five years. The actuator is equipped with a feedback potentiometer used
by the controller to control damper position. The damper motor can exert a
maximum closing force of 5.6N-m.
8.1.1.5 Inlet air filter

The EU4 filter is employed to remove unwanted particles from the incoming
air. Because of the possibility of high humidity, it is encased within a metal
frame. Since the service life of the filter is influenced by the local weather
conditions, the local air quality and the rate of heat rejection required by the
cooled equipment, it will vary considerably. Under no circumstances is the
time period between inlet filter replacements to exceed 1 year.
8.1.1.6 Air inlet clogged switch

A pressure differential switch, which functions by operating a micro-switch
in response to movements of a large area diaphragm induced by
pressure differences either side of it, monitors the air inlet. The switch is
factory-adjusted to provide a contact closure to the control board when
the pressure drop across the air inlet exceeds 150 Pascal. The use and
purpose of the air inlet clogged switch is described in Section 8.1.2.11
"Alarms" (page 770).
8.1.1.7 Water ingress control fins

A set of vertical metal fins, situated along the front of the DACS, serves
to annihilate the kinetic energy of water drops deflected by the incoming
louvres on the lid of the BTS cabinet. This water then runs down the fins
into the drain pan beneath.
8.1.1.8 Drain pan

The front part of the base is configured as a drain pan extending under the
water control fins and filter frame. Collected water is directed out of the
DACS using a series of holes near the cabinet front.
8.1.1.9 Temperature control element

Temperature control of the unit is effected by a high quality thermistor, having
an accuracy of +/-0.2C between 0 and 70C. The element is encased in
epoxy resin within an aluminum case. The device is located in the left
hand exit duct above a 9.5mm hole on the duct side; this hole ensures the
thermistor is always in a moving air stream, regardless of damper position.
8.1.1.10 Heater
The heater element, used to heat the BTS cabinet between temperatures
of -40 and +15C, is located in the fan outlet duct. It has a rating of 2.5kW
at the nominal input of 230V AC. The element is equipped with stainless
steel fins, to maximize heat transfer.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
8.1.1.11 Heater thermostat

The heater element is protected against over temperature, generated by air
failure or blockage within the BTS cabinet, by a manual-reset thermostat
located on the top of the fan discharge duct and over the element. It is
set to alarm at 65C.
Under particularly cold weather conditions, some erratic heating commands

might be conductive to safety thermostat tripping. Because the current
thermostat has a manual reset, the customer must send people on site to
recover the DACS heating feature. The modification consists of replacing
the manual reset thermostat (CPC# A0724335/NTQA98KA) with an
automatic reset thermostat (CPC# A0520118/NTQA8111).
8.1.1.12 Rectifier/capacitor assembly

The transformer/rectifier unit consists of two rectifier bridges and storage
capacitor, mounted on an anodized aluminum bracket, and situated at the
left rear of the cabinet. This arrangement, which is powered by the main
transformer, provides approximately 45V DC, and is used to supply the
blowers at temperatures below 0C when the main rectifier is inactive. Heat
generated by the rectifier bridges is dissipated by the aluminum, enhanced
by air flow into the blower inlet nearby.
8.1.1.13 Transformer
The transformer is a torroidal type, encapsulated in resin to protect it from
the effects of high humidity likely in the interior of the DACS. It has an output
of 35V at 9A and a voltage regulation of less than 5%.
8.1.1.14 Terminal block TB1

The terminal block situated in the middle fan duct is used as the interface for
AC power between the DACS and the BTS cabinet; terminal designations
are clearly marked on the adjacent label.
8.1.1.15 Printed circuit assembly (PCA) for control and power

distribution
Control of the DACS and power distribution therein is accomplished by this
assembly and is described below in later paragraphs. The control assembly
is tropicalized to afford protection against the effects of high humidity.
8.1.1.16 Alarm LEDs

The alarm LED’s, which may be viewed from the top of the DACS through
a window in the lid, are normally illuminated when healthy and extinguish
on alarm. They are red for fan failure, yellow for heater circuit failure and
green for clogged filter.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
8.1.2 DACS operation

8.1.2.1 General Principle
Figure 273 "DACS or Low Noise DACS unit in the S8000 Outdoor BTS"
(page 762) shows a sectional view of the DACS installed in the BTS
cabinet. For normal outside temperatures, the inner cabinet aims to run
at 40C. Once achieved, the air damper opens to admit external air, and
controls the inner cabinet environment by mixing appropriate amounts of
outside and recirculated air. The blowers drive air down the rear duct and
into the equipment enclosure using slots at the rear. Return air to the DACS
is routed through the two sets of holes in the base, with excess air being
rejected from vents either side of the DACS.
8.1.2.2 Specific Modes

The DACS functions in four operational modes, dictated solely by information
from the thermistor located in the left hand vent duct.
Low temperature (-40 degrees Celsius < Tcab < 15 degrees Celsius) In
this region, the heater is energized, the damper is closed to the outside, and
air is recirculated through the holes in the base of the DACS. The total area
of these holes is chosen to maintain a near-constant static pressure on the
blowers, irrespective of damper position, and to balance air flow in the two
sides of the BTS internal equipment cubicle.
Medium temperature (15 degrees Celsius < Tcab < 40 degrees

Celsius) Once the cabinet temperature has reached 15C, the heater
is switched off, the damper remains closed, and further heating of the
equipment enclosure is achieved solely by the internal equipment loading.
Normal temperature (Tcab = 40 degrees Celsius) The control circuitry

aims to run the cabinet at 40C, whenever the conditions of load and
external temperature allow. In this regime, the damper position is controlled
automatically by the modulating motor, mixing appropriate amounts of
recirculated and external air to maintain a constant temperature. Excess air
is rejected from the DACS from vents either side of the DACS cabinet.
High temperature (Tcab > 40 degrees Celsius) At higher outside

temperatures, although the damper is fully open, the DACS is unable to
keep the cabinet temperature to 40C which now rises in sympathy with
the external temperature. At an outside temperature of 50C, the internal
cabinet will rise to a nominal 60C under fully loaded conditions.
8.1.2.3 Control and Power Distribution Assembly

This paragraph deals with the detailed workings of the printed circuit
assembly (PCA). This assembly is not only responsible for control and
supervision of the DACS, but also for directing both AC and DC power within
the equipment. The reader is referred to schematics when following the

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
replacement procedures (see Section 6.2.24 "Replacement of the DACS

control assembly (S8000 Outdoor BTS)" (page 445)), the PCA silk screen,
which shows the component layout.
8.1.2.4 Power Distribution

The alternating supply, which enters the DACS using terminal block TB1
on the base of the unit, is routed to P2-1 and P2-2. It then passes through
an EMC filter, comprising capacitors C10, C11, C12, C13 and common
mode inductor L1, to feed the heater element on pins P2-3, P2-4 and main
transformer T1 on pins P2-5 and P2-6. The heater is protected against over
temperature by a manual reset thermostat, HRS.

The secondary winding of T1 feeds bridge rectifier BR1 whose DC output is

smoothed by the computer-grade electrolytic capacitor C1. The resulting
voltage level (45V DC at the nominal 230V AC input) is then routed back
to the printed circuit assembly (PCA) on P3-3 and P3-5 to supply power to
the board and direct-drive blowers.
Power from the BTS battery also feeds the PCA on plug P3; the positive
pole is connected directly to pin P3-4, while the negative pole is routed to
pin P3-2 using a diode for a bridge rectifier BR2. For cabinet temperatures
between -40 and +7C, DC power to the DACS is supplied by the internal
transformer-rectifier unit (TRU). Above 7C, the main TRU in the BTS
cabinet, which float-charges the battery at a voltage of 54.4V, becomes
active. Because of its higher output voltage and the diode effect of the two
rectifiers, this TRU now takes over the running of the unit and the internal
TRU is left on, but idling only.
In the event of an AC supply failure, the power to the DACS is transferred

automatically, without interruption, to the battery. Under these conditions, all
control and alarm functions will continue as normal. At a battery discharge
level of 45V the internal control shuts off all radio transmission equipment
and at 42V all power is switched off.
The blowers, fed from plugs P4A and P4B, are fused individually so a
catastrophic failure of one blower will not affect the other. The fuse links
F1 and F2, which are 10A, fast blow ceramic types, must be replaced by
exact equivalents.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
8.1.2.5 Control Power Supplies

The control board operates from a 24V DC supply, produced from the raw
rectified/battery supplies by regulator REG1 and associated components.
Setting up of the 24V level is effected by means of potentiometer VR1, the
only adjustment on the board; this level may be measured on tests points
TP1 and TP2. A center supply of 12V is provided by IC1/1, R1, R2 and C1.
8.1.2.6 Temperature Sensing

Measurement of the cabinet temperature is carried out by a close-tolerance
thermistor (+/-0.2C in the range 0 to 70C), linearized by the parallel
resistor R6. The combination is driven by a constant current of 0.5mA,
generated by components R3, R4, R5, IC1/2 and Q1. The resulting
temperature-dependent voltage is buffered by IC1/4 to give an output of
46mV/C at pin 14 of IC1. To ensure a rapid response from the thermistor, it
is mounted over a hole in the side duct of the DACS guaranteeing a supply
of recirculated air across the device at all times.
8.1.2.7 40 degrees Celsius Reference

The reference voltage (-1.74V) for 40C operation is set by resistors R7, R8
and IC1/3 and appears on pin 8 of the amplifier package. This is offset
against the temperature output (with resistors R9 and R10) to give a zero
input to the error amplifier when the cabinet temperature equals 40C.
8.1.2.8 Error Amplifier

The error amplifier, comprising components IC2/1, R9, R19, R11 and C2,
has a proportional gain of 30 and an output of 1.38V/C measured at pin
1 of IC2. This voltage, together with the buffered output of the feedback
potentiometer in the damper motor, is fed to a differential amplifier consisting
of IC2/3, R14, R15, R16 and R17. At balance conditions, when the actuator
has reached its required position, the voltage at pin 8 of IC2 will be zero
with respect to the 12V rail.
8.1.2.9 Damper Motor Drive

The damper motor driver is made up of amplifiers IC2/4, IC3/1 and IC3/2,
together with resistors R18, R19, R20, R21, R22, R23, R24, R25, diodes
D10, D11 and transistors Q2, Q3. Q4 and Q5. This circuit is capable of
driving the motor in either direction as well as stopping it at any position,
when the outputs (pins 1 and 7) of IC3 are both low. This balance occurs
when the voltage from the error amplifier matches the buffered output from
the feedback potentiometer of the damper motor.
Amplifiers IC3/1 and IC3/2 both have a DC gain of 100 facilitating a fine
modulation of the motor close to its aiming point. At balance, since the
bases of transistors Q2 and Q3 are both low, the transistors are in a
conducting state and are effective, in conjunction with the reverse power flow

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
diodes D10 and D11, in providing dynamic braking to the actuator motor.
This prevents unwanted damper movements by forces imposed on the
damper by the static pressure generated at the suction inlets of the blowers.
Since the active voltage across the 5k.ohm potentiometer is approximately

3V, the temperature change required to drive the damper from a fully closed
to fully open position is 2C or +/-1C on the nominal setting of 40C. To
prevent the damper from responding to very small changes, the control
also incorporates a dead zone of +/-0.3C, set up by the resistors R20 and
R21. This and the current limiting imposed by R28 during stalled motor
conditions, serves to maximize the life of the actuator motor.
Connections to the modulating motor are effected by connector P5.
8.1.2.10 Heater Drive Circuit

The temperature-dependent voltage from pin 14 of IC1 is compared with the
15C reference voltage (3.05V), set by resistors R35 and R36, by means
of amplifier IC3/3. The output at pin 8 is fed to the relay driver comprising
IC3/4, resistors R37, R38, R39, transistor Q7 and relay HTR. The relay is
energized for all temperatures below 15C.
IC3/4 is provided with a large amount of hysteresis, to prevent erratic

operation of the relay. Energization of the relay powers the heater using a
normally-o pen contact, the current transformer CT1 and manually reset,
overheat thermostat.

8.1.2.11 Alarms
All alarm relays (RA1, RA2 and RA3) and respective LED’s are energized
when healthy. The alarm LED’s may be viewed, without removal of the lid,
through a window on top of the unit. Volt-free, normally-closed contacts for
the critical alarms are routed to pins 5 and 6 of connector P6 while those
for the maintenance alarm are fed to pins 3 and 4. One side of each alarm
output is grounded (pins 4 and 5). Communication to Nortel Networks
equipment is by means of a "D" type connector which also carries an alarm
for the main cabinet hood.
Critical Alarm 1 - Heater Failure Alarm relay RA1 is kept normally

energized using transistor Q6, in turn driven by the series combination of
R31, D12 and R31. On a call for heating, generated by cabinet temperatures
below 15C, the collector of transistor Q7 goes low and, by means of diode

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
D13, removes the drive from Q6. However, if current is present in the
heater circuit, the drive to Q6 is taken over by the rectified output of current
transformer CT1. Capacitor C4, in conjunction with R31, creates a time
delay to hold on RA1 during the switch over period.
Since this alarm requires current in the heater, it registers any fault in the
heater circuit, including element failure, open-circuit thermostat or fractured
wire.
Critical Alarm 2 - Fan Failure The DC blowers, connected to plugs P4A

and P4B, each generate a square wave signal to pin 3 of their respective
connector during healthy operation. Since these signals can end up either
high or low in the event of a fan failure, the signals are capacitively coupled
and then rectified. If both fans are running correctly, transistors Q11 and
Q12 are both conducting and relay RA2 is energized by transistor Q9, held
in saturation by R41. If however, a fan fails, Q11 or Q12 is turned off and
transistor Q8 is driven by diode D7 or D9. This action shorts out the drive
to Q9 and relay RA2 de-energizes.
Warning Alarm - Air Inlet Clogged Switch An adjustable diaphragm

switch (factory pre-set to the specified static pressure drop) monitors the
pressure drop across the air inlet. When static pressure across the air inlet
is detected as too high, the air inlet is deemed clogged, the switch closes,
de-energizes alarm relay RA2 and an alarm is given.
ATTENTION
The air inlet clogged switch alarm function must not be used as a substitute
for the planned periodic replacement of the air inlet filter (see Section 8.1.3
"Troubleshooting" (page 771)).
When fan speed control mode is chosen, this alarm is inhibited at high fan speed.
8.1.3 Troubleshooting
This paragraph is included to assist the service person - it is not meant to
be an exhaustive list of possible faults since service personnel are well
trained on the functioning of the unit.
DANGER
Electric shock
Isolate all power supplies to the unit before removing the lid.
Lethal voltages are present when the unit is operating.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Symptom Possible Cause Check or Remedy

Heater alarm Thermostat tripped Reset stat, find cause
Fractured or disconnected Make good
wire connection
Faulty control board Change board
Heater element open circuit Replace element
Air inlet clogged Blocked filter Change filter
switch alarm
Maladjusted switch Readjust switch
Faulty clog switch Change switch
Cabinet inlet louvers Clear obstruction
obstructed
Ingress control fins obstructed Clear obstruction
Fan failure alarm Blown fuse on board Change fuse, check
Broken connection Check plugs, wires
Faulty blower Change blower
Faulty board Change board
Fans inoperative Check AC/DC supplies Rectify
Both fuses blown Change and check
Damper not open Loose linkage Reset and tighten
Open circuit thermistor Check thermistor/plu
g P1
Faulty actuator Check/change
Damper not closed Loose linkage Reset and tighten
Short-circuit thermistor Check thermistor/plu
g P1
Poor temp regulation Loose linkage Reset and tighten
Intermittent thermistor Check plug P1

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

Incorrect cab temp Board 24V DC incorrect Check TP1,TP2/adju
st

might conduce to a safety thermostat tripping. Because the current
recover the Dacs heating feature. The modification consists of replacing the
manual reset thermostat (CPC# A0724335/NTQA98KA) with an automatic
reset thermostat (CPC# A0520118/NTQA8111).
8.1.3.1 Re-activation of the DACS thermostat (S8000 outdoor

BTS)
Reminder
Once the thermostat is tripped, the BTS send a notification to the OMC-R.
This notification is the following : fault number 1067, cause 7864322.
ATTENTION
If you do not find the notification, it may be because the event appeared more
than 7 days ago (it depends on the OMC-R configuration).
If this notification is not taken into account immediately, retrieve it by using the
following tool:
• /OMC/base/tools/shell
• DisplayNotif.sh -day 20010614 -BSS all -SQL "where codano=1067
and cause=7864322" > /home/OMC/notif_1067
It is necessary to go on site to re-activate the thermostat. The re-activation

procedure is described below.
Intervention time
Tools required
• Stepladder
• Allen wrench

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
Location
The DACS thermostat is located on Figure 275 "Re-activation of the DACS
thermostat of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 776)
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
handling boards.
a. In the case of an AC mains box, perform the following actions.
and carefully remove it.
b. In the case of a GIPS, perform the following actions.

1. Put the battery circuit breaker of the DCU in the "OFF"
position.
2. Put the rectifier circuit breakers of the ADU in the "OFF"
position.
3. Put the DACS circuit breaker of the ACU in the "OFF"
position.
4. Put the DACS circuit breaker of the DCU in the "OFF"
position.
411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
c. Open the hood and the doors of the cabinet.
3 Re-activation of the thermostat

The thermostat is located between the blowers. It is fixed on
the heater cover (refer to Figure 275 "Re-activation of the DACS
thermostat of the S8000 Outdoor BTS" (page 776)).
a. Press the red button which is located at the top of the thermostat.
the "I" position.
c. in the case of a GIPS, perform the following actions.

1. Put the DACS circuit breaker of the DCU in the "ON" position.
2. Put the DACS circuit breaker of the ACU in the "ON" position.
3. Put the rectifier circuit breakers of the ADU in the "ON"
position.
4. Put the battery circuit breaker of the DCU in the "ON"
position.
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 275
Re-activation of the DACS thermostat of the S8000 Outdoor BTS

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
8.2 Low noise DACS technical manual

8.2.1 Technical aspects
8.2.1.1 Construction
The Low Noise DACS cabinet is constructed from sheet steel, coated with an
aluminum/zinc/silicon alloy (Aluzinc 185 or Galvalume 0.55 oz/ft2) or coated
with zinc (Galvatite 600). The metalwork is left unpainted to ensure good
electrical bonding between the component parts, essential for the control
of electromagnetic radiation from and into the unit. To avoid corrosion, no
parts are welded. The filter is accessed through the small plate at the front
of the unit, while internal components may be reached by the removable top
lid. Both lid and plate are secured by quick release, quarter-turn fasteners.
8.2.1.2 Twin blowers

The blowers serve to circulate air through the BTS cabinet, to cool the
internal loads. The blowers are brushless DC types, driven either by
the internal transformer/rectifier unit at low temperatures, by the rectifier
at normal temperatures or by the internal battery during mains failure
conditions.
The blowers incorporate a soft-start feature ramping up speed slowly to

minimize inrush. Each provides a fan running signal (5V square wave),
employed to announce a fan failure. The blower speed is controlled by a
0-10VDC signal.
8.2.1.3 Air-directing damper

The damper, which rotates around a pivot point close to the base, is used to
control air movement within the Low Noise DACS unit. When fully closed,
the damper excludes outside air and air is circulated within the BTS cabinet;
at the other extreme, when the damper is fully open, there is no recirculation
and the cooling unit operates by drawing in ambient air which is then routed
through the BTS cabinet and ejected by the outlet ducts at the two sides of
the Low Noise DACS.
At intermediate positions, the damper is adjusted automatically to give a mix

of recirculated and fresh air and therefore to obtain the internal working
temperature.
8.2.1.4 Modulating damper motor and linkages

The damper is controlled by the modulating motor by suitable linkages.
Operation of the damper between extreme positions is achieved within a
motor rotation of approximately 45C, so the motor is not limited by its end
stops in either direction. This guarantees a very good seal against outside
or recirculated air, since the motor can apply maximum pressure to the
sealing gaskets.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
The DC motor driving the gearbox of the actuator, is brushed and rated for
continuous operation under stalled conditions; its life expectancy is in excess
of five years. The actuator is equipped with a feedback potentiometer used
by the controller to control damper position. The damper motor can exert a
maximum closing force of 5.6N-m.
8.2.1.5 Inlet air filter

The EU4 filter is employed to remove unwanted particles from the incoming
air. Because of the possibility of high humidity, it is encased within a metal
frame. Since influenced by the local weather conditions, the local air quality,
and the rate of heat rejection required by the cooled equipment, the service
life of the filter will vary considerably. Under no circumstances is the time
period between inlet filter replacements to exceed 1 year.
8.2.1.6 Air inlet clogged switch

A pressure differential switch, functions by operating a micro-switch
in response to movements of a large area diaphragm induced by
pressure differences either side of it, monitors the air inlet. The switch is
factory-adjusted to provide a contact closure to the control board when
the pressure drop across the air inlet exceeds 150 Pascal. The use and
purpose of the air inlet clogged switch is described in Section 8.2.2.12
"Alarms" (page 784).
8.2.1.7 Water ingress control fins

A set of vertical metal fins, situated along the front of the Low Noise DACS,
serves to annihilate the kinetic energy of water drops deflected by the
incoming louvers on the lid of the BTS cabinet. This water then runs down
the fins into the drain pan beneath.
8.2.1.8 Drain pan

The front part of the base is configured as a drain pan extending under the
water control fins and filter frame. Collected water is directed out of the Low
Noise DACS by a series of holes near the cabinet front.
8.2.1.9 Temperature control elements

Temperature control of the unit is effected by two high quality thermistors,
having an accuracy of +/-0.2C between 0 and 70C. The elements are
encased in epoxy resin within an aluminum case.
The first device (connected to plug P1 on the PCA controller) is located in

the left hand exit duct above a hole on the duct side; this hole ensures
the thermistor is always in a moving air stream, regardless of the damper
position. The thermistor measures the temperature of the internal
equipment cabinet.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
The other thermistor (connected to plug P7 on the PCA controller), is

located between the inlet air filter and the water ingress control fins and
measures the ambient air temperature. When fan speed control mode is
chosen (see Section 8.2.1.13 "Transformer" (page 779)), this information
is employed to control the speed of the blowers. The blowers are switched
to high speed for ambient above 45C. They are switched to low speed
operation once the temperature has dropped to 40C.
8.2.1.10 Heater
The heater element, used to maintain the BTS cabinet above +10 C, is
located in the fan outlet duct. It has a rating of 2,5kW at the nominal input of
230V AC and is equipped with stainless steel fins, to maximize heat transfer.
The element is turned off at +15C, for rising temperature, and energized at
10C for falling temperature.
8.2.1.11 Heater thermostat

The heater element is protected against over temperature, generated by air
failure or blockage within the BTS cabinet, by a manual-reset thermostat
located on the top of the fan discharge duct and over the element. It is
set to alarm at 65C.

8.2.1.12 Rectifier/capacitor assembly

The transformer/rectifier unit consists of two rectifier bridges and storage
capacitor, mounted on an aluminum bracket, and situated towards the rear
of the cabinet. This arrangement, which is powered by the main transformer,
provides approximately 45V DC, and is used to supply the blowers at
temperatures below 0 C when the main BTS rectifier is inactive. Heat
generated by the rectifier bridges is dissipated by the aluminum, enhanced
by air flow into the blower inlet nearby.
8.2.1.13 Transformer
The transformer is a torroidal type, encased in epoxy resin against the
effects of high humidity likely in the interior of the Low Noise DACS. It has
an output of 37V at 9A and a voltage regulation of less than 5%.
8.2.1.14 Terminal block TB1

The terminal block situated in the middle fan duct is used as the interface
for AC power between the Low Noise DACS and the BTS cabinet; terminal
designations are clearly marked on the adjacent label.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
8.2.1.15 Printed circuit assembly (PCA) for control and power

distribution
Control of the Low Noise DACS and power distribution therein is
accomplished by this assembly and is described below in later paragraphs.
The control assembly is tropicalized to afford protection against the effects
of high humidity.
8.2.1.16 Alarm LEDs

The alarm LED’s, which may be viewed from the top of the Low Noise
DACS through a window in the lid, are normally illuminated when healthy
and extinguish on alarm. They are red for fan failure, yellow for heater circuit
failure and green for clogged filter.
8.2.2 Low noise DACS operation

8.2.2.1 General principles
Figure 273 "DACS or Low Noise DACS unit in the S8000 Outdoor BTS"
(page 762) shows a sectional view of the Low Noise DACS installed in the
BTS cabinet. For normal outside temperatures, the inner cabinet aims to
run at a constant temperature, as defined by the setting on the control
assembly. Once achieved, the air damper opens to admit external air, and
controls the inner cabinet environment by mixing appropriate amounts of
outside and recirculated air. The blowers drive air down the rear duct and
into the equipment enclosure through slots at the rear. Return air to the Low
Noise DACS is routed through the set of holes in the base, with excess air
being rejected from the exhaust duct either sides of the Low Noise DACS.
8.2.2.2 Specific modes

The Low Noise DACS functions in four operational modes, dictated solely
by information from the thermistor located in the left hand vent duct. The
required cabinet temperature is defined as Ts.
Low temperature (-40 degrees Celsius < Tcab < 15 degrees Celsius) In
this region, the heater is energized, the damper is closed to the outside, and
air is recirculated through the holes in the base of the Low Noise DACS.
The total area of these holes is chosen to maintain a near-constant static
pressure on the blowers, irrespective of damper position.
Medium temperature (15 degrees Celsius < Tcab < Ts) Once the
cabinet temperature has reached 15C, the heater is switched off, the
damper remains closed, and further heating of the equipment enclosure is
achieved solely by the internal equipment loading.
Normal temperature (Tcab = Ts) The control circuitry aims to run the
cabinet at Ts, whenever the conditions of load and external temperature
allow. In this regime, the damper position is controlled automatically by the

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
modulating motor, mixing appropriate amounts of recirculated and external

air to maintain a constant temperature. Excess air is ejected from the Low
Noise DACS from vents on either sides of the Low Noise DACS cabinet.
High temperature (Tcab > Ts) At higher outside temperatures, although

the damper is fully open, the Low Noise DACS is unable to keep the
cabinet temperature to Ts which now rises in sympathy with the external
temperature. At an outside temperature of 50 C, the internal cabinet will
rise to a nominal 60C under fully loaded conditions.
8.2.2.3 Fan speed control

This feature is activated when fan speed control mode is chosen on the
printed circuit assembly (PCA) (see Section 8.2.1.13 "Transformer" (page
779)). As long as the cabinet temperature is at, or below, Ts, the fans are
running at their lower speed setting. However, for ambient temperatures
above Ts, the damper is fully open and, when 45C is reached, the fan
speed is increased automatically to minimize the temperature rise in the
internal equipment cubicle. As the outside temperature falls, the fans revert
to low speed operation at an ambient temperature of 40C.
This feature is important, since it reduces the acoustic noise during the
majority of the year and, more especially at night, when the call density (or
cabinet loading) and outside temperature are likely to be at their lowest level.
8.2.2.4 Control and power distribution assembly

This paragraph deals with the detailed workings of the printed circuit
assembly (PCA). This assembly is responsible not only for control and
supervision of the Low Noise DACS, but also for directing both AC and
DC power within the equipment. The reader is referred Section 6.2.24
"Replacement of the DACS control assembly (S8000 Outdoor BTS)" (page
445) when following the replacement procedures.
8.2.2.5 Power distribution

The alternating supply, which enters the Low Noise DACS through a
terminal block at the rear of the unit, is routed to plug P2 on the printed
circuit assembly (PCA). It then passes through an EMC filter, to feed the
heater element and main transformer T1. The heater is protected against
over temperature by a manual reset thermostat, HRS.


411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
The secondary winding of T1 feeds bridge rectifier BR1, the DC output of

which is smoothed by the computer-grade electrolytic capacitor C1. The
resulting voltage level (approximately 45V DC at the nominal 230V AC input)
is used to provide power to the direct-drive, DC blowers and PCA control
and supervisory circuitry.
DC power from the BTS rectifier/battery also feeds the PCA on plug P3; the
positive pole (grounded in the BTS cabinet) is connected directly, while the
negative pole is routed through a diode of bridge rectifier BR2. For cabinet
temperatures between -40 and +0C, DC power to the Low Noise DACS is
supplied by the internal transformer-rectifier unit (TRU). Above 0C, the
main TRU in the BTS cabinet, which float-charges the battery at a voltage of
54.5V, becomes active. Because of its higher output voltage and the diode
effect of the two rectifiers, this TRU now takes over the running of the unit
and the internal TRU is left on, but idling only.
In the event of an AC supply failure, the power to the Low Noise DACS is
transferred automatically, without interruption, to the battery. Under these
conditions, all control and alarm functions will continue as normal. At a
battery discharge level of 45V the BTS internal control starts to shed load
until the entire cabinet switches off at a voltage of 42V DC.
The blowers, fed from plugs P4A and P4B, are fused individually so a
catastrophic failure of one blower does not affect the other. The fuse links
F1 and F2, which are 10A, fast blow ceramic types, must be replaced by
exact equivalents.
8.2.2.6 Control Power Supplies

The control board operates from a 24V DC supply, produced from the raw
rectified/battery supplies by regulator REG1 and associated components.
Setting up of the 24V level is effected by means of potentiometer VR1, the
only adjustment on the board; this level may be measured on tests points
TP1 and TP2. The voltage level is factory set and is not altered except in
extraordinary circumstances. A center supply of 12V is also used.
8.2.2.7 Temperature Sensing

Measurement of the cabinet temperature is carried out by a close-tolerance
thermistor (+/-0.2C in the range 0 to 70C), linearized by a parallel resistor.
The combination is driven by a constant current of 0.5mA. The resulting
temperature-dependent voltage is buffered to give an output of 46mV/ C.
To ensure a rapid response from the thermistor, it is mounted over a hole
in the left exhaust duct of the Low Noise DACS guaranteeing a supply of
recirculated air across the device at all times.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
8.2.2.8 Ts Reference
The reference voltage relevant to the cabinet internal temperature is
selected by means of DIL switch SW1. SW1/1 off and SW1/2 on run the
cabinet at 35C, while SW1/1 and SW1/2 both on give a Ts of 25C. The
setting is defined by Nortel Networks and is dependent on the prevailing
weather conditions in the operational area.
8.2.2.9 Error Amplifier

Information from the cabinet thermistor is offset against the voltage from the
actuator feedback potentiometer and fed to an error amplifier. The output of
the error amplifier controls the damper motor drive circuitry.
8.2.2.10 Damper Motor Drive

The damper motor drive is capable of driving the motor in either direction
as well as stopping it at any position, as directed by the output of the error
amplifier. This balance occurs when the voltage from the error amplifier
matches the buffered output from the feedback potentiometer of the damper
motor.
Diodes D1 and D2 provide dynamic braking to the actuator motor. This

action prevents unwanted damper movements by forces imposed on the
damper by the static pressure generated at the suction inlets of the blowers.
The temperature change required to move the damper from one extreme to
the other is approximately 2C. To prevent the damper from responding to
very small changes, the control also incorporates a dead zone of 10.6C.
This, and the current limiting imposed by the series resistor during stalled
motor conditions, serves to maximize the life of the actuator motor.
Connections to the modulating motor are effected by connector P5.
8.2.2.11 Heater Drive Circuit

Information from the cabinet sensor is also used to control the operation
of the heater. For rising cabinet temperature, the heater is de-energized
at +15C and re-energized at +10C as the temperature falls. The 5C
hysteresis prevents erratic operation of the heater. The element is powered
by means of relay HTR through the current transformer CT1 and heater
safety thermostat HRS. The thermostat is manually reset following a trip.


411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
8.2.2.12 Alarms
The control board features three alarm circuits, two critical and one
maintenance. The alarm relays (RA1, RA2) and respective LED’s are
energized when healthy. The alarm LED’s may be viewed, without removal
of the lid, through a window on top of the unit.
Volt-free, normally-closed contacts for the alarms are routed, through

connector P6, to the "D" type connector. The maintenance alarm appears
on pins 3 and 4 of connector P6, while the critical alarms are summarized
and fed to pins 5 and 6 of connector P6. The alarm contacts open to alarm.
In the event of power failure to the printed circuit assembly (PCA), both
alarms will be activated.
Critical Alarm 1 - Heater Failure On a call for heating, generated by

cabinet temperatures below 10 C, drive to the alarm relay RA1 is held in an
energized state provided current is detected in the heater element. If there
is no current, the relay drops out and an alarm is given. Since this alarm
requires current in the heater, it registers any fault in the heater circuit,
including element failure, open-circuit thermostat or fractured wire.
Critical Alarm 2 - Fan Failure The DC blowers, connected to plugs P4A

and P4B, each generate a square wave signal during healthy operation.
These signals are used to reset the counters IC6 and IC7; if either counter
times out, the alarm relay RA1 is de-energized and an alarm is given.
When fan speed control mode is chosen (see Section 8.1.1.13

"Transformer" (page 766)), if either fan fails, the other is automatically driven
at the higher speed.
Warning Alarm - Air Inlet Clogged Switch An adjustable diaphragm

switch (factory pre-set to the specified static pressure drop) monitors the
pressure drop across the air inlet. When detecting static pressure across
the air inlet as too high, the air inlet is deemed clogged, the switch closes,
de-energizes alarm relay RA2 and an alarm is given.
ATTENTION
Do not use the air inlet clogged switch alarm function as a substitute for the
planned periodic replacement of the air inlet filter (see Chapter 5 "Preventive
maintenance procedures" (page 183)).
When fan speed control mode is chosen, this alarm is inhibited at high
fan speed.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
8.2.2.13 PCA Controller Options

Switch SW1 has three positions - the first two define Ts, the cabinet working
temperature. For 35C operation, set SW1/1 to off and SW1/2 to on; for
25C operation, set both positions to on. The factory pre-setting is 35C.
The choice of cabinet temperature is location dependent.
The third position over-rides the fan speed control and constrains the
blowers to run always at high speed - with this set-up, the air inlet clogged
switch is not inhibited. For this, set SW1/3 to on.
The header H1 has four positions and is used to define the high and low fan
speeds. For the Low Noise DACS unit, the shorting links are in positions
1 and 3.
The DACS Control Board NTU498AA contains a switch SW2 (10 different
positions) that allows to control the nominal fans speed. The different
positions of SW2 lead to the following fan control voltage :
For the S8000 Outdoor cabinet, the low fans speed corresponds to a 5V
control voltage (SW2-1 and SW2-9 ON, others OFF).
8.2.3 Troubleshooting
This paragraph is included to assist the service person - it is not meant to be
an exhaustive list of possible faults since it is expected for service personnel
to be well trained on the functioning of the unit.
DANGER
Electric shock
Isolate all power supplies to the unit before removing the lid.
Lethal voltages are present when the unit is operating.

Heater alarm Thermostat tripped Reset stat, find cause
Fractured or disconnected Make good
wire connection
Faulty control board Change board
Heater element open circuit Replace element
Air inlet clogged Blocked filter Change filter
switch alarm
Maladjusted switch Readjust switch
Faulty clog switch Change switch

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

Cabinet inlet louvers Clear obstruction
obstructed
Ingress control fins obstructed Clear obstruction
Fan failure alarm Blown fuse on board Change fuse, check
Broken connection Check plugs, wires
Faulty blower Change blower
Fans inoperative Check AC/DC supplies Rectify
Both fuses blown Change and check
Damper not open Loose linkage Reset and tighten
Open circuit thermistor Check thermistor/plu
g P1
Damper not closed Loose linkage Reset and tighten
Short-circuit thermistor Check thermistor/plu
g P1
Poor temp regulation Loose linkage Reset and tighten
Intermittent thermistor Check plug P1
Incorrect cab temp Board 24V DC incorrect Check TP1,TP2/adju
st

8.2.3.1 Re-activation of the Low Noise DACS thermostat

Reminder
Once the thermostat is tripped, the BTS send a notification to the OMC-R.
This notification is the following : fault number 1067, cause 7864322.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
ATTENTION
If you do not find the notification, it may be because the event appeared more
than 7 days ago (it depends on the OMC-R configuration).
If this notification is not taken into account immediately, retrieve it by using the
following tool:
• /OMC/base/tools/shell
• DisplayNotif.sh -day 20010614 -BSS all -SQL "where codano=1067
and cause=7864322" > /home/OMC/notif_1067
It is necessary to go on site to re-activate the thermostat. The re-activation

procedure is described below.
The Replacement Procedure of the Auto-reset DACS heater thermostat is
described in Chapter 6 paragraph 6.2.30.
Intervention time
Tools required
• Stepladder
• Allen wrench
CAUTION
Location
The DACS thermostat is located on Re-activation of the DACS thermostat
of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Procedure
Step Action

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
CAUTION
handling boards.

1. Put the battery circuit breaker of the DCU in the "OFF"
position.
2. Put the rectifier circuit breakers of the ADU in the "OFF"
position.
3. Put the DACS circuit breaker of the ACU in the "OFF"
position.
4. Put the DACS circuit breaker of the DCU in the "OFF"
position.
3 Re-activation of the thermostat

The thermostat is located between the blowers. It is fixed on the
heater cover (refer to Re-activation of the DACS thermostat of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS).
a. Press the red button which is located at the top of the thermostat.
the "I" position.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

c. in the case of a GIPS, perform the following actions.

1. Put the DACS circuit breaker of the DCU in the "ON" position.
2. Put the DACS circuit breaker of the ACU in the "ON" position.
3. Put the rectifier circuit breakers of the ADU in the "ON"
position.
4. Put the battery circuit breaker of the DCU in the "ON"
position.

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.
Figure 276
Re-activation of the DACS thermostat of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
—End—

411-9001-048 16.04 Standard
16.0 6 October 2006
.

Copyright © 1999-2006, Nortel Networks
All Rights Reserved.
Publication: 411-9001-048
Document status: Standard
Document version: 16.04
Document date: 6 October 2006
For more information, please contact:
For all countries, except USA:
Documentation Department
Parc d’activité de Magny-Chateaufort
CHATEAUFORT
78928 YVELINES CEDEX 9
FRANCE
Email : umts-gsm.ntp@nortelnetworks.com
Fax : (33) (1) 39-44-50-29
In the USA:
2221 Lakeside Boulevard

Richardson TX 75082
USA
Tel: 1-800-4 NORTEL
1-800-466-7838 or (972) 684-5935
Internet Address:
www.nortel.com
To provide feedback or report a problem in this document, go to www.nortel.com/documentfeedback
The information contained in this document is the property of Nortel Networks. Except as specifically authorized in writing by Nortel
Networks, the holder of this document shall keep the information contained herein confidential and shall protect same in whole or in
part from disclosure and dissemination to third parties and use for evaluation, operation and maintenance purposes only.
You may not reproduce, represent, or download through any means, the information contained herein in any way or in any form
without prior written consent of Nortel Networks.
The following are trademarks of Nortel Networks: *NORTEL NETWORKS, the NORTEL NETWORKS corporate logo, the NORTEL
Globemark, UNIFIED NETWORKS, S2000, S4000, S8000. GSM is a trademark of France Telecom.
All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
Originated in France

BTS-8K Troubleshooting 411-9001-048 1604

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BTS-8K Troubleshooting 411-9001-048 1604

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8003

Copyright © 1999-2006, Nortel Networks

Chapter 2 Description of the cabinets 33

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

2.4.3 Description of the S8003 Indoor BTS products 129

Chapter 3 Description of a start-up 141

Chapter 4 Faults without alarms at the OMC-R 179

Chapter 5 Preventive maintenance procedures 183

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

5.2 On-site checks 198

Chapter 6 Replacement procedures 313

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

6.2.8 Replacement of the PSCMD board 359

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

6.2.41 Replacement of the external batteries (battery cabinet) 563

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

6.2.69 Replacement of the tri-phase AC lightning protector (S8000 Outdoor

Chapter 7 On-site TIL use 741

Chapter 8 DACS and Low Noise DACS technical manual 761

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

8.2.1 Technical aspects 777

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

Figure 25 Tri-phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) type 5 of the S8000 Outdoor

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

Figure 258 Tri-phase AC lightning protector of AC box type 2 of the S8000

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

Table 28 DRX location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 112

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

Table 78 Replacements performed every four years 187

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

New in this release

• RoHS compliancy (30066, 30067, 30068) (v16.02).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

<01> : Nortel GSM BSS Overview

<51> : Nortel GSM TML (BTS) Commissioning and Fault Management

< 63 > : Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals

<103> : Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fault Clearing

Readers should also refer to the following NTPs:

< 07 > : Nortel GSM BSS Fundamentals — Operating Principles

<101> : Nortel GSM BSC 12000HC/TCU 2G Fault Clearing

<102> : Nortel GSM BTS S2000/S2000E/S4000 Fault Clearing

<105> : Nortel GSM BSS Fault Clearing — Advanced Maintenance

<124> : Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference

<125> : Nortel GSM BSS Performance Management — Observation

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

<129> : Nortel GSM OMC-R Commands Reference — Configuration,

<130> : Nortel GSM OMC-R Commands Reference — Security,

<131> : Nortel GSM BSC 3000/TCU 3000 Fault Clearing

<133>: Nortel GSM BSS Performance Management— Observations

• Chapter 7 "On-site TIL use" (page 741) provides a guide of actions to

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

• Chapter 8 "DACS and Low Noise DACS technical manual" (page

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)